Ricoh AFICIO MP 6001 Service Manual Download Page 730

Page: 730 / 1351

Service Program Mode Tables

SM Appendix

4-197

D062/D063/D065/D066

Appe

ndix:

Service

Progra

Mode T

bles

ABBREVIATION

WHAT IT MEANS

S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail

SMC

SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are

recorded in the SMC report.

Svr Server

TonEnd Toner

End

TonSave Toner

Save

TXJob Send,

Transmission

WSD

Web Services Devices

YMC

Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

YMCK

Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black

All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear, or the Counter

Reset SP7 808.

8001 T:Total

Jobs

8002 C:Total

Jobs

8004 P:Total

Jobs

8005 S:Total

Jobs

8006 L:Total

Jobs

These SPs count the number of times each application is

used to do a job.

[0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note:

The L: counter is the total number of times the other

applications are used to send a job to the document server,

plus the number of times a file already on the document

server is used.

These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number of pages

processed.

When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.

Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.

Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer

Summary of Contents for AFICIO MP 6001

Page 1: ...D062 D063 D065 D066 SERVICE MANUAL Book 1 of 2 004778MIU MAINFRAME ...

Page 2: ......

Page 3: ...D062 D063 D065 D066 SERVICE MANUAL BOOK 1 OF 2 MAINFRAME ...

Page 4: ......

Page 5: ...D062 D063 D065 D066 SERVICE MANUAL Book 1 of 2 MAINFRAME 004778MIU ...

Page 6: ......

Page 7: ...SION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION All product names domain names or product illustrations including desktop images used in this document are trademarks registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies No such use or the use of any trade name or web site is inte...

Page 8: ......

Page 9: ...ation Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury damage to property or loss of warranty protection Ricoh Americas Corporation WARNING ...

Page 10: ......

Page 11: ...6001 SP 9060 9060sp D063 MP 7001 MP 7001SP LD370 LD370sp Aficio MP 7001 MP 7001 SP 9070 9070sp D065 MP 8001 MP 8001SP LD380 LD380sp Aficio MP 8001 MP 8001 SP 9080 9080sp D066 MP 9001 MP 9001SP LD390 LD390sp Aficio MP 9001 MP 9001 SP 9090 9090sp DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV NO DATE COMMENTS 06 2009 Original Printing ...

Page 12: ......

Page 13: ...NMENT 2 1 2 1 2 MACHINE LEVEL 2 2 2 1 3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS 2 2 2 1 4 DIMENSIONS 2 3 2 1 5 PERIPHERAL OPTION SUMMARY TABLE 2 3 2 1 6 POWER REQUIREMENTS 2 6 2 2 MAIN MACHINE 2 7 2 2 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 2 7 2 2 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 8 Removing Tapes and Retainers 2 8 Removing and Filling the Development Unit 2 11 Re installing the Development Unit 2 14 Initializing the Drum Settings 2 15 T...

Page 14: ...ATION 2 49 2 9 JOGGER UNIT B513 2 54 2 9 1 ACCESSORY CHECK 2 54 2 9 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 54 2 10 2000 3000 SHEET FINISHERS D373 D374 2 56 2 10 1 ACCESSORIES 2 56 2 10 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 2 57 Removing Tapes and Retainers 2 57 Docking the Finisher 2 59 Attaching the Trays 2 62 Leveling the Finisher 2 63 Selecting the Staple Supply Name 2 63 Enabling Booklet Binding D373 Only 2 63 Auxilia...

Page 15: ...Assembled Key Counter 2 92 2 17 KEY COUNTER TYPE A B870 2 95 2 17 1 INSTALLATION 2 95 2 18 COPY CONNECTOR KIT B328 2 99 2 18 1 ACCESSORIES 2 99 2 18 2 PREPARATION 2 99 2 18 3 INSTALLATION 2 100 2 19 USB2 0 SD SLOT TYPE C D464 2 102 2 19 1 ACCESSORIES 2 102 2 19 2 INSTALLATION 2 102 2 20 MFP OPTIONS 2 107 2 20 1 MERGING APPLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD 2 107 Overview 2 107 Merging Applications 2 108 Und...

Page 16: ...22 2 20 10 BROWSER UNIT TYPE E D430 2 123 Accessories 2 123 Installation 2 123 2 20 11 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT TYPE C B829 2 124 Accessories 2 124 Installation 2 124 IPU 2 124 After Replacing the Copy Data Security Unit 2 125 2 20 12 VM CARD D463 2 125 Accessories 2 125 Installation 2 126 2 20 13 IEEE1284 B679 2 127 Accessories 2 127 Installation 2 127 2 20 14 GIGABIT ETHERNET TYPE B D377 2 127 Ac...

Page 17: ...B 4 14 4 4 7 SCANNER MOTOR 4 15 4 4 8 SCANNER HP SENSOR 4 16 4 4 9 SCANNER WIRE REPLACEMENT 4 17 Scanner Wire Removal 4 17 Scanner Wire Reinstallation and Scanner Position Adjustment 4 18 4 5 LASER UNIT 4 20 4 5 1 CAUTION DECALS 4 20 4 5 2 LD UNIT POLYGON MOTOR AND POLYGON MOTOR DRIVE BOARD 4 20 SP Adjustments 4 22 4 5 3 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR REPLACEMENT 4 22 4 5 4 LASER UNIT ALIGNMENT 4 ...

Page 18: ... 47 4 7 5 TONER END SENSOR 4 48 4 7 6 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR 4 48 Cleaning Requirement 4 49 4 7 7 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR 4 50 4 8 TRANSFER BELT UNIT 4 51 4 8 1 TRANSFER BELT UNIT REMOVAL 4 51 4 8 2 TRANSFER BELT REMOVAL 4 52 Re installation 4 53 4 8 3 TRANSFER ROLLER CLEANING BLADE 4 54 4 8 4 DISCHARGE PLATE 4 55 Reinstallation 4 55 4 8 5 TRANSFER POWER PACK 4 56 Re installation 4 56 4 9 FUSING UNIT 4 57 4...

Page 19: ...0 6 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ADJUSTMENT 4 80 4 11 PAPER FEED 4 82 4 11 1 PAPER TRAY 4 82 Tandem Tray 4 82 Universal Tray 4 84 4 11 2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT 4 84 4 11 3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT 4 85 4 11 4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT 4 85 4 11 5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT 4 86 Reinstallation 4 87 4 11 6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE 4 88 4 11 7 TANDEM TRAY SID...

Page 20: ...D SKEW CORRECTION SENSORS 4 120 4 13 8 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS 4 121 4 13 9 DF POSITION AND APS SENSORS 4 122 4 13 10 OTHER ADF SENSORS 4 123 4 13 11 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR 4 124 4 13 12 FEED MOTOR 4 124 4 13 13 EXIT MOTOR AND TRANSPORT MOTOR 4 125 4 13 14 PICK UP ROLLER MOTOR AND HP SENSOR 4 126 4 13 15 CIS UNIT 4 126 4 13 16 ADF EXIT SENSOR 4 127 4 13 17 ADF TRANSPORT BELT ASSEMBLY 4 128 Reinst...

Page 21: ...e Reset 5 7 Resetting the System 5 7 Resetting Copy Document Server Features Only 5 7 Resetting Scanner Features Only 5 8 5 3 TEST PATTERN PRINTING 5 9 5 3 1 PRINTING TEST PATTERN SP2902 003 5 9 Test Pattern Table 5 9 5 3 2 IPU FRONT BACK TEST PATTERNS SP2902 001 002 5 11 Test Pattern Table 5 11 5 3 3 IPU PRINTING TEST PATTERN SP2902 004 5 13 5 4 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 5 15 5 4 1 SOFTWARE UPDATE 5 ...

Page 22: ...E CALL CONDITIONS 6 1 6 2 IMPORTANT SP CODES 6 2 6 3 JAM DETECTION 6 3 6 3 1 SENSOR LOCATIONS 6 3 6 3 2 FREQUENT PAPER JAMS 6 3 6 4 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 6 6 6 4 1 RECOVERY METHODS 6 6 6 4 2 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES 6 6 6 5 TIMING CHARTS 6 12 6 5 1 FEED TRANSPORT FEED OUT FACE UP 6 12 6 5 2 TRANSPORT INVERTER FEED OUT FACE DOWN 6 13 6 5 3 DUPLEX TRANSPORT 6 14 6 6 OTHER PROBLEMS 6 16 6 6 1 BLOWN FUSE CONDI...

Page 23: ...IT TYPE 1075 SEE SECTION B513 B531 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS B704 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY TYPE 3260 SEE SECTION B704 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS B762 MAILBOX CS391 SEE SECTION B762 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D373 FINISHER SR4040 D374 FINISHER SR4030 SEE SECTION D373 D374 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D418 FAX OPTION TYPE 9001 SEE SECTION D418 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS D454 MULTI FO...

Page 24: ......

Page 25: ...ompleted 6 The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the machine is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands 7 Always connect the power cord directly into a wall outlet Never use an extension cord 8 Inspect the power cord for damage Never cut or attempt to modify the power cord in any way 9 Keep the machine away from dust and h...

Page 26: ...ns and local regulations 4 Test the breaker switches on the main machine and all peripheral devices at least once a year Safety and Ecological Notes For Disposal 1 Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame 2 Dispose of used toner developer and organic photoconductors in accordance with local regulations These are non toxic supplies 3...

Page 27: ... when replacement of the optical subsystem is required WARNING Use of controls or adjustment or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure WARNING Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes CAUTION MARKING Conventions and Trademarks Conventi...

Page 28: ...f paper feed In this manual Horizontal means the Main Scan Direction and Vertical means the Sub Scan Direction relative to the paper feed direction Switches and Symbols Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for Europe and other areas the meaning of each symbol conforms with IEC60417 ...

Page 29: ... This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine Points to Confirm with Operators At the end of installation or a service call instruct the user about use of the machine Emphasize the following points Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems by following the procedures described in the operating instructions Point out the parts...

Page 30: ...lumping on one end of the toner cartridge it should always be stored horizontally on a flat service A toner cartridge should never be stored on its end vertically Trademarks Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated PCL is a registered trademark of He...

Page 31: ...AND ADJUSTMENT APPENDIX SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES B513 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE 1075 B531 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 1075 B762 MAILBOX CS391 D373 FINISHER SR4040 D374 FINISHER SR4030 D454 MULTI FOLDING UNIT FD5000 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING ENERGY SAVING B704 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY TYPE 3260 TAB POSITION 1 TAB POSITION 3 TAB POSITION 4 TAB POSITION 6 TAB POSITION 5 TAB POSITION 8 TAB POSITION 7 TAB P...

Page 32: ......

Page 33: ...PRODUCT INFORMATION REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 34: ......

Page 35: ...Specifications SM 1 1 D062 D063 D065 D066 Product Information 1 PRODUCT INFORMATION 1 1 SPECIFICATIONS See Appendices for the following information General Specifications Optional Equipment ...

Page 36: ... D066 1 A3 11 x 17 Tray Type 9001 D482 Tab Sheet Holder Type3260 B499 Inside mainframe RT43 LCT B473 2 LG Size Tray Type1075 B474 Inside LCT Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 4 Finisher SR4050 D460 5 Punch Unit Type 1075 NA 3 2 B531 Inside Punch Unit Type 1075 EU 2 4 B531 Inside Punch Unit Type 850 SC B531 Inside Finisher No 5 ...

Page 37: ...0 B703 11 Cover Interposer Tray Type 3260 B704 8 Mailbox CS391 B762 9 Copy Tray Type 2075 B756 3 Fax Option Type 9001 D418 G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 D418 Copy Connector Type 3260 B328 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A B870 Copy Data Security Unit Type F B829 Gigabit Ethernet Type B D377 Inside mainframe File Format Converter Type E D377 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A B679 IEEE 802 11a g I...

Page 38: ...e Number DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type H D377 Post Script3 Unit Type 9001 D462 IPDS Unit Type 9001 D462 HDD Encryption Unit Type A D377 Browser Unit Type E D430 USB2 0 SD Slot Type C D464 Card Reader Bracket B498 Key Counter Bracket Type1027 B452 Outside mainframe ...

Page 39: ...063 D065 D066 D052 D053 D054 SD Slot 2 slots 3 slots I F Slot 2 slots 4 slots Model Line Up 4 models 60cpm 70cpm 80cpm 90cpm 3 models 60cpm 70cpm 80cpm Fusing Unit D062 D063 D065 Fusing roller dia 40mm Pressure roller dia 40mm D066 Fusing roller dia 50mm Pressure roller dia 50mm Fusing roller dia 40mm Pressure roller dia 40mm Scanner Color B W Development Unit Only for D066 Pressure release tube i...

Page 40: ... D063 D065 D066 1 6 SM D062 D063 D065 D066 D052 D053 D054 D066 Paper feed motor is installed at the rear of the mainframe Fusing Lamp 2 lamps 3 lamps ADF original size sensor 4 sensors 5 sensors ADF Separation Sensor Yes No HDD 160GB 80GB Scan to USB SD Yes Option No ...

Page 41: ...Overview SM 1 7 D062 D063 D065 D066 Product Information 1 4 OVERVIEW 1 4 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT ...

Page 42: ... 13 Registration Sensor 14 By pass Tray 15 Relay Sensor 16 Grip Roller 17 Feed Sensor Paper Tray 18 Feed Roller Paper Tray 19 Separation Roller Paper Tray 20 Pick up Roller Paper Tray 21 Universal Tray Tray 3 22 Universal Tray Tray 2 23 Tandem Tray Tray 1 24 Duplex Unit 25 Inverter 26 Inverter Exit Roller 27 Inverter Entrance Roller 28 Duplex Junction Gate 29 Reverse Trigger Roller 30 Exit Unit 31...

Page 43: ...3 D065 D066 Product Information 1 4 2 PAPER PATH WITH COVER INTERPOSER TRAY 1 Proof Exit Tray 2 Cover Sheet Path 3 Original Path 4 By pass Tray 5 LCT Feed 6 Vertical Transport Path 7 Finisher Exit Tray 2 8 Finisher Exit Tray 1 ...

Page 44: ... Original Paper Path 2 Vertical Transport Path 3 LCT Feed 4 Selected Trays 5 Turn Gates 6 Mailbox Paper Path 7 Junction Gate paper goes either up to the mailbox or out to the finisher s proof tray 8 Junction Gates two junction gates control the paper path inside the finisher ...

Page 45: ...Information 1 4 4 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Scanner Motor 2 Drum Motor 3 Fusing Exit Motor 4 Registration Motor 5 Toner Collection Motor 6 Paper Feed Motor 3 7 Paper Feed Motor 2 8 Lower Relay Motor 9 Paper Feed Motor 1 10 By pass Motor 11 Development Motor ...

Page 46: ......

Page 47: ...133 08 03 2009 Key Counter Type A B870 102 07 02 2009 Added steps to USB installation 118 119 2 22 2011 HDD Encryption Installation 123 132 6 15 2011 Browser Unit 124 125 10 05 2010 Copy Data Security Unit Type F 126 07 02 2009 Added Testing the SD Card USB Slot ...

Page 48: ......

Page 49: ...2 C 54 3 Ambient Illumination Less than 1 500 lux do not expose to direct sunlight or strong light 4 Ventilation Room air should turn over at least 3 times per hour 5 Ambient Dust Less than 0 10 mg m3 6 If the place of installation is air conditioned or heated do not place the machine where it will be Subjected to sudden temperature changes Directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner Dire...

Page 50: ... shared with another electrical appliance 12 The machine can generate an electromagnetic field which could interfere with radio or television reception 2 1 2 MACHINE LEVEL Front to back Within 5 mm 0 2 of level Right to left Within 5 mm 0 2 of level The machine legs may be screwed up or down in order to level the machine Set a carpenter s level on the exposure glass 2 1 3 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENT...

Page 51: ...RIPHERAL OPTION SUMMARY TABLE The table below summarizes all the peripheral devices and controller options Bnnn Name Class 1 Comment B452 Key Counter Bracket Type 1027 1 Common option B473 LCT RT43 1 Paper bank for LT A4 paper B474 81 2 x 14 Paper Size Tray Type 1075 1 Paper bank for LG paper ...

Page 52: ...ch Unit Type 1075 EU 2 4 2 Installed in D460 B531 17 Punch Unit Type 1075 NA 3 2 2 Installed in D460 D377 File Format Converter Type E 3 Board B679 IEEE1284 Interface Board Type A 3 Board D460 Finisher SR4050 1 Punching sorting shifting corner stapling only D373 Finisher SR4040 1 Punching sorting shifting corner booklet stapling D374 Finisher SR4030 1 Punching sorting shifting corner stapling only...

Page 53: ...ype E 3 SD card B829 Copy Data Security Unit Type F 3 IPU Board D462 Printer Scanner Unit Type 9001 3 SD Card B328 Copy Connector Type 3260 1 Links two mainframes D463 VM Card Type J 3 SD card D377 Gigabit Ethernet Type B 3 Board D377 IEEE 802 11a g g Interface Unit Type J 3 Board D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 1 D418 01 Fax Option Type 9001 1 Board D418 05 G3 Interface Unit Type 9001 1 Board 1 Cl...

Page 54: ...avoid damaging the hard disk or memory press the operation power switch to switch the power off wait for the power LED to go off and then switch the main power switch off The Main Power LED lights or flashes at the following times While the platen cover or ADF is open While the main machine is communicating with the network server While the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory when reading...

Page 55: ...pport 2 4 Decal Paper Size 1 5 Decal Caution Chart Paper Set Direction 1 6 Leveling Shoe 2 7 Operating Instructions Holder 2 8 Decal Cleaning Multiple 1 9 Cloth DF Exposure Glass 1 10 Cloth Holder 1 11 Decal Toner Supply Multiple 1 12 Decal Power Source Off 1 13 Decal Exposure Glass Multiple 1 14 Decal D1 E1 Multiple 1 15 EU Safety Sheet 27 67 only 1 16 Clear Cover 17 29 57 only 1 17 Ferrite Core ...

Page 56: ...the power plug to the machine until you are instructed to do so 1 Unpack the machine and remove all the wrapping 2 Remove all filament tape from the front of the machine 3 Open the lower tray A and remove the operating instructions holder and foot risers 4 Open the ADF feed cover and remove the tape and retainer 5 Remove the tape from the back of the machine Save the filament tape and shipping ret...

Page 57: ...e the ADF and remove all the tape and shipping retainers around the exposure glass A and operation panel 7 Remove the shipping retaining sheet B under the white pad 8 Open the front door open the toner bottle holder A then remove all tape and shipping retainers ...

Page 58: ...Main Machine D062 D063 D065 D066 2 10 SM 9 Open the right door and remove the tapes from the vertical transport plate 10 Remove the PCU inner cover A x 2 and disconnect the fan motor B x 1 ...

Page 59: ...n C and the red tag from the cleaning plate 14 Open the tandem tray top paper tray and remove the metal retainer bracket A x 1 and wire then the red tags x2 and all tape Removing and Filling the Development Unit Before you begin remove the toner bottle if it is installed The toner bottle holder can be damaged if it is in the machine when you do the procedure below 1 Open the front door ...

Page 60: ...r D and swing it to the right 6 Remove the face plate A of the development unit knob x 1 x 2 7 Disconnect the development unit A x 2 If the LCT is installed disconnect it This lets the front door open far enough for development unit removal 8 Close the supply pipe shutter B 9 While allowing the development unit C to slip to the right slowly pull it out of the machine ...

Page 61: ...For D066 only remove the pressure release tube A 11 Toner hopper A p 4 43 Developer Replacement 12 Rotate the toner hopper slightly 10 to 20 as you slide it up to remove it 13 While turning the knob A slowly pour in one pack of developer B from one end of the ...

Page 62: ...n the inside of the front door to install the toner bottle If the door does not close make sure that the pipe line shutter is rotated down See Step 7 above Re installing the Development Unit 1 Push the development unit to the right 2 While continuing to hold the unit to the right push it into the machine 3 Confirm that the pin A goes into the left side of the oval hole B in the development unit pl...

Page 63: ...ntrol items potential sensor calibration Vsg Vref etc will not initialize correctly 1 Open the front door 2 Connect the power cord 3 Turn the main power switch on 4 Go into the SP mode 5 Close the front door 6 Enter SP2963 002 then enter the lot number of the developer The lot number should be seven digits If seven digits are not entered before you do SP2963 001 the LCD shows error messages 7 Do S...

Page 64: ...another paper size Feed Station Allowed Size Tandem Tray Tray 1 A4 LEF LT LEF 1 Open the front cover 2 Completely pull out the tandem feed tray A so that the right tandem tray B separates from the left tandem tray 3 Remove the right tandem inner cover A 4 Re position the side fences B x 2 The outer slot position is used when loading A4 size paper 5 Re install the right tandem inner cover A ...

Page 65: ...63 D065 D066 Installation 6 Remove the tray cover A x 3 7 Remove the motor cover B x 5 8 Re position the side fences A x 8 The outer slot position is used when loading A4 size paper 9 Re install the motor cover and the tray cover ...

Page 66: ...t hole as shown For LT size the screw should be placed on the right 12 Re install the rear bottom plate 13 Change the paper size using SP5959 001 Paper Size Tray 1 For details see SP5959 in Service Tables Machine Level 1 Set a stand A at two front foot of the machine 2 Set the leveling shoes C x2 under the feet B then level the machine Two leveling shoes should be installed at the front side ...

Page 67: ...imer Setting tab Press Set Date to enter the date Press Set Time to enter the time SP Codes SP5812 001 Service Telephone Number Settings Enter the contact number of the customer engineer This is the number displayed when a service call is issued SP5841 001 Supply Name Setting Toner Name Setting Black This name appears when the user presses the Inquiry on the User Tools screen SP5853 Stamp Data Dow...

Page 68: ...er connector to the CN103 connector B Installing the Scanner Heater 1 Rear upper cover p 4 8 2 Exposure glass p 4 11 3 Operation panel p 4 6 4 Left stay p 4 17 Scanner Wire Replacement 5 Install the scanner heater A x 2 6 Fasten the cable with the harness clamps x 3 7 Fasten the connector B on the rear side of the machine x 1 ...

Page 69: ...Main Machine SM 2 21 D062 D063 D065 D066 Installation 8 Connect the harness C to the connector B on the rear side of the machine ...

Page 70: ...482 2 3 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Q ty 1 A3 DLT Tray 1 2 Short connector 1 3 Page size decals 1 2 3 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure ...

Page 71: ...D482 SM 2 23 D062 D063 D065 D066 Installation 1 Remove the stay A x 2 2 Remove the retainers B C 3 Draw out the tandem tray A completely to separate the left and right sides of the tray 4 Push in the right tandem tray B ...

Page 72: ...A3 DLT Feeder Kit D482 D062 D063 D065 D066 2 24 SM 5 Remove the left tandem tray A x 5 Keep these screws 6 Remove the front cover A x 3 7 Remove the right tandem tray A x 2 Keep these screws ...

Page 73: ...at you removed in Steps 3 and 4 You must use the short silver screws on the left and right rails If you use one of the longer screws it will stop the movement of the tray on the rails 10 Re install the front cover 11 Switch the machine on enter the SP mode and select the paper size for Tray 1 with SP5959 001 Paper Size Tray 1 For details see SP5959 in Service Tables 12 Attach the appropriate decal...

Page 74: ...list Description Q ty 1 Flat head shoulder screw M4 x 6 1 2 Upper docking pins grooved 2 3 Lower docking pin not grooved 1 4 Installation Instructions 1 5 Paper Set Decal 1 2 4 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Removing Tape 1 Remove the filament tape from the body A and top cover B of the LCT 2 Remove the tape under the lid C of the LCT ...

Page 75: ... the machine before starting the following procedure 1 Remove the LCT installation cover A from the right side of the machine x 2 2 Save the screw on the left B You will need it to install the LCT 3 Remove the LCT connector cover C x 1 and the covers over the holes for the docking pins D x 3 Installing the LCT ...

Page 76: ...king pin B into the lower slot 1 Align the holes on the side of the LCT A with the docking pins on the side of the machine B then slowly push the LCT onto the pins The release button C is used to unlock the LCT so it can be disconnected from the machine 1 Connect the plug D of the LCT power cord to the side of the machine ...

Page 77: ...rew A into the hole and fasten it to lock the release lever in place For easier access to the hole for the screw A you can remove the right panel B x 2 2 Switch the machine on and execute SP5959 005 Paper Size Tray 4 LCT to select the paper size For details see SP5959 in Service Tables ...

Page 78: ...IT B474 2 5 1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Q ty 1 Cover 1 2 B4 LG frame 1 3 Bottom plate extension 1 4 Rear bracket 1 5 Front bracket 1 6 Harness clamp 1 7 Tapping hex screws M4 x 8 6 8 Tapping screws M4 x 8 4 ...

Page 79: ... the machine 1 Open the cover and remove the paper 2 Lower the LCT tray Cover the near end sensor A then press the tray down button B to lower the tray bottom plate Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure 3 Disconnect the LCT from the machine 4 Remove the LCT upper cover A ...

Page 80: ...attach it below at x 2 7 Remove the right cover C x 2 8 Attach the front bracket A with the beveled corner down x 2 If the brackets are difficult to install raise the bottom plate with your hand 9 Attach the rear bracket B with the beveled corner down x 2 10 Attach the bottom plate extension C with the hex nuts x 4 ...

Page 81: ...itioning pin A 12 Attach the B4 LG frame B with the hex nuts x 2 The kit is set for B4 If you need to change the paper size to LG do the following steps 13 Move the front side fence A to the LG position and fasten x 1 14 Move the rear side fence B to the LG position and fasten x 1 ...

Page 82: ...back of the plate and secure the sensor connector wire 17 Attach the LCT cover A provided with the kit x 1 18 Re attach the right cover B x 2 19 Connect the LCT to the machine p 2 26 LCT B473 20 Switch the machine on enter the SP mode then use SP5959 005 Paper Size Tray 4 LCT to select the new paper size For details see SP5959 in Service Tables ...

Page 83: ...y and condition of the accessories in the box against the following illustration and list No Description Q ty 1 Joint Bracket 1 2 Paper Guide Long 1 3 Paper Guide Short Not used 1 4 Proof Tray Auxiliary Plate 1 5 Ground Plate 1 6 Screws M3x6 2 7 Screws M3x6 2 8 Screws M4x14 4 9 Leveling Shoes 5 10 Power Cord 1 11 Sponge Strip 1 ...

Page 84: ...cted to a power source that is close to the unit and easily accessible Make sure that the main machine is switched off and that its power cord is disconnected before doing the following procedure Tapes 1 Remove tape from front A and rear B 2 Open the front door A 3 Remove all tape from inside B ...

Page 85: ...t the short paper guide for this installation The long paper guide is not used 2 Attach the short paper guide A x2 M3x6 3 Peel the tape from the sponge strip B and attach the strip to the top right edge of the unit Ground Plate 1 Attach the ground plate A to the lower right edge of the unit x2 M3x6 ...

Page 86: ...unit C against the left side of the upstream unit or main machine so that the lock bar is directly and squarely under the arms of the joint bracket 6 Push the lock bar in completely so that it slides up into the notches in the arms on both ends of the joint bracket D 7 Fasten the lock bar by re attaching the screw removed in Step 3 x1 8 Connect the I F cable E to the upstream unit or main machine ...

Page 87: ...2 D063 D065 D066 Installation 9 Remove A Rear upper cover x4 B Rear lower cover x3 10 Use a short screwdriver to loosen bracket A x2 11 Fasten the bracket to the upstream unit at B x1 12 Tighten the screws x3 13 Re attach the rear covers ...

Page 88: ... 1 Set the leveling shoes A 2 Adjust the height of the unit and make sure that it is level Power Cord Breaker Switch Test 1 Insert the power cord socket A into the power connection point 2 Connect the power supply cord plug into a power outlet 3 Test the breaker switch B ...

Page 89: ...e in the center aligned with the diagonal groove The back should be flat against the end fence 2 When the plate is not being used open the front door and store it at B inside the inner cover The plate should be used when Z folded paper all sizes is output to the proof tray If the plate is not used with Z folded output the pages could mix and overlap ...

Page 90: ...scription Q ty 1 Cushion 1 2 Table Extension 1 3 Leveling Shoes 1 4 Rear Joint Bracket 1 5 Front Joint Bracket 1 6 Entrance Guide Plate 1 7 Grounding Plate 1 8 Auxiliary Tray Holder 2 9 Auxiliary Tray Proof 2 10 Auxiliary Tray Shift 2 11 Tapping Screws M4 x 8 2 12 Tapping Screws M3 x 6 4 13 Tapping Screws M3 x 8 4 14 Phillips Screws w washer M4 x 14 4 15 Shift Tray 4 ...

Page 91: ...t Finisher D460 SM 2 43 D062 D063 D065 D066 Installation 2 7 2 INSTALLATION Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure 1 Unpack the finisher and remove all tapes and shipping retainers ...

Page 92: ...066 2 44 SM 2 Open the front door and remove the shipping retainers Remove brackets A B and C x 2 each 3 Install the front rear bracket A and front joint bracket B x 2 each M4 x 14 on the left side of the copier 4 Remove the connector cover C ...

Page 93: ...ding plate A x 2 M3 x 6 Set the grounding plate so that there is no gap between the grounding plate and the bottom frame of the finisher as shown 6 Install the table extension A as shown x 2 M4 x 8 The edge of the table extension should be aligned with the edge of the finisher as shown ...

Page 94: ...ide of the upper cover If you are installing the cover interposer tray do not attach the cushion here Attach it to the cover interposer tray The cover interposer tray must be installed before you dock the finisher and tray with the main machine 8 Install the entrance guide plate B x 2 M3 x 6 ...

Page 95: ...ever B 11 Align the finisher on the joint brackets and lock it in place by pushing in the locking lever B Before securing the locking lever make sure that the top edges of the finisher and the copier are parallel from front to rear as shown C 12 Secure the locking lever B x 1 and close the front door 13 Connect the finisher cable D to the copier 14 Set the leveling shoes x 4 under the feet and lev...

Page 96: ...ntities against this list Description Q ty 1 Punch unit 1 2 Harness Connector Cable PCB 1 3 Harness Connector Cable HP Sensor 2 1 4 Harness Connector Cable HP Sensor 1 Hopper Full 1 5 Sensor Arm and Sensor 1 6 Spacer 2 mm 1 7 Spacer 1 mm 2 8 Spring 1 9 Step Screw large M4 x 11 1 10 Tapping Screw M4 x 10 2 11 Step Screw small M3 x 4 1 12 Machine Screw Washer M4 x 6 1 13 Knob 1 14 Punch Waste Hopper...

Page 97: ... unplug the machine before starting the following procedure 1 If the finisher is connected to the machine disconnect it 2 Open the front door and remove the rear cover x 2 3 Unpack the punch unit and remove the motor protector plate A x 4 and the cam lock plate B x 1 4 Reattach the cover bracket C D x 2 ...

Page 98: ...63 D065 D066 2 50 SM 5 Remove the inner cover A x 3 6 Behind the inner cover at B and C press the lock tab to the right to release the inner cover from the frame 7 Remove the plastic knockouts D 8 Remove the paper guide A x 4 ...

Page 99: ...eely on the step screw 10 Attach the spring B 11 At the rear position the 2 mm spacer A and attach the punch unit B x 2 M4 x 10 At the hole just above the lock lever use one of the screws from the paper guide removed above to fasten the remaining two spacers to the frame These extra spacers are used to adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes ...

Page 100: ... harness connector A to CN129 of the finisher PCB and to CN600 of the punch unit PCB 15 Connect the HP Sensor 2 harness connector B to CN130 of the finisher PCB and to HP Sensor 2 16 Connect the single end of the hopper full sensor connector cable C to the hopper full sensor on the arm x 1 x 1 then connect the other two connectors to HP Sensor 1 D and CN620 E of the punch PCB ...

Page 101: ...equired for this punch unit The punch unit sends an identification signal to the machine so it knows what type of punch unit has been installed 17 Slide the hopper A into the finisher 18 Re attach the inner cover and rear cover 19 Close the front door and re connect the finisher to the machine ...

Page 102: ...heck the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Q ty 1 Jogger Unit B513 1 2 Tapping Screws M3 x 6 2 3 Installation Procedure 1 2 9 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE 1 Turn the main machine switch off and disconnect the finisher from the main frame 2 Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover A from the finisher and discard it ...

Page 103: ...ft side hook the frame of the jogger unit A into the holes on the left and right side of the finisher frame 5 On the left side fasten the connector B to the socket x 1 6 On the left and right side attach the jogger unit frame to the side of the finisher with the screws C provided x 2 7 Re attach the jogger unit cover to its frame with the screws removed in step 2 x 2 ...

Page 104: ...ided tape 1 2 Ground plate 1 3 Tapping screws M4 x14 4 4 Tapping screws M3 x 8 1 5 Leveling Shoes 3 6 Upper output tray 1 7 Lower output tray D373 Only 1 8 Auxiliary Tray 1 9 Gasket 1 10 Front joint bracket 1 11 Rear joint bracket 1 Auxiliary Tray for Shift Tray D373 Only Not Shown 1 Auxiliary Tray for Proof Tray D373 Only Not Shown 1 Auxiliary Tray Storage Pocket D373 Only Not Shown 1 3 screws M3...

Page 105: ...es D373 Booklet Finisher Does punching shifting corner stapling and booklet saddle stitch stapling D374 Finisher Does punching shifting and corner stapling but no booklet saddle stitch stapling unit Differences in the installation procedures are noted as D373 or D374 Removing Tapes and Retainers Always turn the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following procedures ...

Page 106: ...D374 D062 D063 D065 D066 2 58 SM 1 Unpack the machine and remove all the wrapping 2 Remove all filament tape and shipping retainers from the finisher 3 Open the front door 4 Remove all tapes and shipping retainers inside the finisher ...

Page 107: ... D065 D066 Installation 5 Pull out the jogger unit A 6 Remove the tapes and retainers Docking the Finisher If you are not installing the Cover Interposer B704 Peel the strip from the sponge cushion A and attach it to the finisher then go to the next step ...

Page 108: ...d to the cover interposer Do not attach the grounding plate B to the finisher It must be attached to the cover interposer Install the interposer now The cover interposer must be installed before you dock the finisher to the copier 1 Use a short screwdriver to attach the grounding plate B x 2 M3 x 6 2 Attach the rear bracket A x 2 M4 x 14 3 Attach the front bracket B x 2 M4 x 14 ...

Page 109: ... 1 5 To avoid bending and damaging the paper entrance guide plates C slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets D enter their slots 6 Connect connector E to the main frame 7 Attach the gasket seal F as shown 8 Push the finisher against the machine 9 Push in lock lever B then reattach the screw A ...

Page 110: ... the metal plate B overlaps the tray 2 Attach the lower output tray C 3 Use the round head rivet provided accessory to fasten the auxiliary tray storage pocket to rear cover of the finisher 4 Place the auxiliary trays for the shift tray and proof tray in the pocket D374 1 Attach the output tray A Make sure the metal plate B overlaps the tray ...

Page 111: ...ar when the user prints the Inquiry List Press the Counter key then press Print Inquiry List Press the Inquiry button on the initial User Tools screen 013 Staple Std Enter the name of the staples in use for normal stapling not booklet stapling This setting should be done for both the D373 and D374 022 Staple Bind Enter the name of the staples in use for booklet stapling saddle stitching This setti...

Page 112: ... auxiliary trays The trailing edges of excessively curled or Z folded paper can activate the tray full sensors before the tray is actually full Once the Exit Tray Full message displays the job cannot continue until some sheets are removed from the tray which is only partially full The trays are designed to prevent this problem The auxiliary tray for the shift tray should be installed for Z folding...

Page 113: ...initializes the finisher and moves the shift tray to the standby position 2 Open the front door again and leave it open 3 Set the shift auxiliary tray A on the shift tray as shown 4 Close the front door This initializes the finisher again and moves the shift tray to the new standby position with the auxiliary tray installed 5 After the Z folding job is finished remove the tray and store it in the ...

Page 114: ...CCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list Description Q ty 1 Punchout Waste Unit 1 2 Slide Drive Unit 1 3 Punch Waste Hopper 1 4 Screws M3 x 6 5 5 Side to Side Detection Unit 1 6 Punching Unit 1 2 11 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Always turn the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following procedures ...

Page 115: ...ear cover B x 2 and open the front door At the base of the back cover be sure to disconnect the tabs that fasten the cover to the frame 3 Remove the guide plate C x 2 4 Slide the punch unit A along its rails into the finisher Make sure that pin engages correctly at the front and rear 5 Connect and fasten the punch unit B x 2 x 1 The connectors are coiled and tied above the PCB on the right ...

Page 116: ...ocked by the screws 8 Insert the side to side detection unit A Make sure that the two pins are engaged correctly at the front 9 Confirm that the side to side detection slides smoothly on its rails If it does not make sure that the rails are aligned with their grooves 10 Fasten the side to side detection unit and connect it at the rear x 2 x 1 x 1 11 Pull the short connector out of the connector B ...

Page 117: ... unit B into the finisher Make sure that the punch waste transport unit slides smoothly on its rails If it does not make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves 14 Remove the short connector from the connector C This is the 4 pin connector 15 Connect connector and fasten the punch waste transport unit x 1 x 1 x 1 16 Set the hopper A in its holder ...

Page 118: ...sion top 1 2 Rear cover extension bottom 1 3 Shoulder screws 3 4 Tapping screws M4 x 8 9 5 Tapping screws M3 x 8 2 6 Tapping screws M3 x 6 5 7 Adjuster plates 2 8 Hinge Bracket 1 9 Plate Extension bottom 1 10 Gasket Seals 2 11 Right Rear Cover Plate D460 only 1 12 Spacer 1 13 Anti Static Brush 1 14 Spacer D460 only 1 15 Spacer Not used 1 16 Right front corner plate D460 only 2 17 Front door extens...

Page 119: ... of the following finishers 2000 Sheet Booklet Finisher D373 3000 Sheet Finisher D374 3000 Sheet Finisher D460 Removing Tapes and Retainers Make sure that the finisher is disconnected from the main machine and that the copier is switched off and unplugged before starting the following procedure 1 If the finisher is connected to the machine disconnect it ...

Page 120: ...discard it If you are installing the cover interposer tray with a previously installed finisher D373 D374 D460 remove the sponge strip from the finisher and save it for re attachment to the interposer tray 4 Either If you are installing the D373 D374 attach the extensions to the finisher without modification Go to Attaching the Extensions for the D373 D374 If you are installing the D460 modify the...

Page 121: ... Attachments for the D460 Front Door Extension 1 Attach spacer A to the front door extension top x 2 2 Remove the lower hinge B and replace it with C x 2 Rear Cover Extension Bottom 1 Remove D and replace it with E x 1 2 Remove F and replace it with G x 1 Plate Extension Bottom 1 Remove bracket H from and attach it to at the end of the bottom plate extension x 2 ...

Page 122: ...onnector case in the direction of the arrow until the second set of holes is aligned with the holes below then attach the screws Attach the Extensions to the D460 1 Attach the three shoulder screws A x 3 2 If the finisher has been previously installed remove the ground plate B from the finisher and keep the screws 3 Attach the bottom plate C x 2 M3 x 6 4 Attach the ground plate to the bottom plate...

Page 123: ...s 9 Press up on the bottom of the rear cover extension to close the gap at the top of the cover then tighten the screws Attaching the Extensions for the D373 D374 1 Attach the three shoulder screws A x 3 2 If the finisher has been previously installed remove the ground plate B from the finisher and save the screws 3 Attach the bottom plate C x 2 M3 x 6 then attach the ground plate to the bottom pl...

Page 124: ... x 1 M3 x 6 3 Either If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the D373 D374 skip the next section and go directly to Docking the Finisher and Interposer to the Machine If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the D460 go to the next section install the corner plates on the D460 then go to Docking the Finisher and Interposer to the Machine Attaching the Corner Plates for the D46...

Page 125: ...iver inserted through the cutouts in the right rear corner plate D tighten the screws to fasten the right rear corner plate to the table extension B 4 Temporarily attach the screw A M4 x 8 with about two turns to fasten to the panel at the right front corner The hole is not visible because it is covered with tape Just punch the screw through the hole 5 With the clamp B under the edge of the corner...

Page 126: ... bracket A x 2 M4 x14 2 Attach the front bracket B x 2 M4 x14 3 Attach the gasket seals C and D 4 Attach the sponge strip A that is supplied with the finisher 5 Attach the guide plate removed from the finisher to the cover interposer Attach the front end B of the plate x 1 Attach the rear end of the plate with the anti static brush C x 1 ...

Page 127: ...7 Attach the pad E This pad is provided with the finisher 8 Slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets F go into the slots Move the finisher carefully or you will bend the entrance guide plates 9 Attach the lock lever D x 1 10 Connect the connector G to the copier Check the duct A on the left side of the machine Make sure that the sponge does not prevent air flow t...

Page 128: ... list Description Q ty 1 Jogger Unit 1 2 Tapping Screws M3 x 6 2 2 13 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE The Output Jogger Unit B703 can be installed only on the 2000 3000 Sheet Finisher D373 D374 Always switch the machine off and unplug the machine before doing any of the following procedures 1 Turn the main machine switch off 2 Disconnect the finisher from the main frame ...

Page 129: ...iver to remove the left upper cover A 4 Remove the cover plate A x 2 Keep the screws 5 While you hold the jogger unit with the connector on the left put the hooks of the frame of the jogger unit A into the holes in the left and right side of the finisher frame 6 Fasten connector B to the socket x 1 ...

Page 130: ...t Jogger Unit B703 D062 D063 D065 D066 2 82 SM 7 Attach the jogger unit to the finisher x 2 8 Reattach the jogger unit cover C to the jogger unit x 2 9 Set SP 6118 to 1 after you install the B703 jogger unit ...

Page 131: ...ir quantities against the following list Description Q ty 1 Trays 9 2 Guide plate 1 3 Tapping screws M3x8 6 4 Decals bin display 1 2 14 2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE The Mail Box B762 can be installed only in the 2000 3000 Sheet Finisher D373 D374 Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure ...

Page 132: ...Mail Box B762 D062 D063 D065 D066 2 84 SM 1 Remove the filament tape A Handle the mailbox carefully The corner leaf B can be damaged easily ...

Page 133: ...allation 2 If the Cover Interposer Tray B704 is installed on the D373 D374 remove it The cover interposer tray and mailbox cannot be installed on the finisher at the same time 3 Remove the top cover A of the finisher x 1 4 Remove the bracket B x 1 ...

Page 134: ... Attach the guide plate A to the top of the finisher x 2 M3x8 6 Attach the mailbox B to the top of the finisher x 4 M3x8 7 Attach the 9 trays C to the mailbox 8 Give the decals D to the customer for notation and attaching at the correct location ...

Page 135: ...essories and their quantities against the following list Description Q ty 1 Copy Tray 1 2 Actuator Arm and Bracket not used 1 3 Tapping Screw not used 2 4 Large Cap 1 5 Small Cap 4 6 Tapping Screw M4 x 8 1 7 Harness Clamp 1 8 Paper Height Sensor 1 9 Actuator Arm Bracket 1 10 Sensor Bracket 1 11 Actuator Arm 1 ...

Page 136: ... left upper cover A x 2 2 Attach the paper height sensor A and harness clamp B to the sensor bracket C 3 Attach the sensor bracket and actuator arm bracket D to the copier x 3 4 Attach the sensor harness E x 1 x 4 5 Attach the actuator F to the arms of the actuator arm bracket ...

Page 137: ...B756 SM 2 89 D062 D063 D065 D066 Installation 6 Reattach the left upper cover A x 2 7 Attach the tray B 8 Attach the small caps C to the holes 9 Attach the large cap D to cover the finisher power connection point ...

Page 138: ...BRACKET B498 KEY COUNTER BRACKET B452 2 16 1 KEY CARD BRACKET B498 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Qty 1 Key Card Table 1 2 Harness Clamp 1 3 Tapping Screws M3 x 8 4 4 Tapping Screws M4 x 14 2 5 Stud 1 6 Decal 1 7 Key Card Table Support 1 ...

Page 139: ...KET B452 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Qty 1 Plate nuts 2 2 Rear Bracket 1 3 Front Bracket 1 4 Tapping Screws M3 x 6 2 5 Tapping Screws M4 x 8 3 6 Tapping Screws M4 x 16 2 7 Harness 1 8 Shoulder Screw 1 9 Key Counter Bracket Cover 1 10 Key Counter Bracket 1 ...

Page 140: ...the key counter plate nuts A on the inner surface of the key counter bracket B 2 Attach the key counter holder C to the key counter bracket x2 3 Attach the key counter bracket cover D x2 Install the Key Card Bracket and Assembled Key Counter Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure ...

Page 141: ...66 Installation 1 Remove the cover A x2 2 Remove the right upper cover B x2 3 Remove the three caps C 4 Attach the stud D 5 Put the keyholes A of the key card table B over the heads of the shoulder screws as shown above Then tighten the screws to attach the table M4 x 14 x2 ...

Page 142: ... Key Counter Bracket B452 D062 D063 D065 D066 2 94 SM 6 Attach the key counter bracket A x 2 7 Attach the harness B to the key counter bracket and the machine x 1 8 Attach the bracket support C to the side of the copier x 2 ...

Page 143: ...66 Installation 2 17 KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A B870 2 17 1 INSTALLATION 1 Attach the connection board A rocking support B x 4 2 Connect the harness C to CN003 3 Connect the harness D to CN004 4 Connect the harness C to CN218 on the BCU A B D C Rev 08 03 2009 ...

Page 144: ...KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A B870 D062 D063 D065 D066 2 96 SM 5 Clamp the harness at two points E 6 Pass the harness through the edge saddle F D E F C Rev 08 03 2009 ...

Page 145: ...KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A B870 SM 2 97 D062 D063 D065 D066 Installation 7 Clamp the harness at two points G G Rev 08 03 2009 ...

Page 146: ...KEY COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A B870 D062 D063 D065 D066 2 98 SM 8 Pass the harness through the opening H H Rev 08 03 2009 ...

Page 147: ...er Repeater Cable 2 3 Coupling Interface Cable 1394 3 4 Repeater Hub 1394 2 5 Ferrite Core 2 6 Keytop for B234 Not used 4 7 Keytop 4 8 Keytop for B132 Not used 8 2 18 2 PREPARATION Before you begin the installation procedure Measure the distance between the machines to be connected Confirm that the printer scanner option is installed on the machines Rev 08 03 2009 ...

Page 148: ... 2 3 Install the key labeled Printer Other Function Scanner or its equivalent symbol key top for EU on a machine with the printer scanner option installed Install the key labeled Other Function or its equivalent symbol key top for EU on a machine without the printer scanner option 2 18 3 INSTALLATION 1 Remove these parts Rear upper cover x2 Replacement and Adjustment Operation Panel and External C...

Page 149: ...he copy connector board 7 Attach the ferrite cores E to both ends of the interface cable 8 If additional cable is required connect the cables G with repeater hubs F 9 On the operation panel of each machine remove the third cover H from the bottom Printer 10 Install the appropriate key on each machine 11 Attach the Printer Other Function key I or its equivalent symbol for EU if the printer scanner ...

Page 150: ... C D464 2 19 1 ACCESSORIES Description Q ty 1 USB2 0 SD Slot Type C 1 2 USB Cable 1 3 Tapping Screw 2 4 Screw 1 5 Decal 1 2 19 2 INSTALLATION 1 Rear upper cover p 4 8 Rear Covers 2 Right upper cover p 4 7 Right Covers 3 Left upper cover p 4 8 4 Operation Panel p 4 6 Rev 08 03 2009 ...

Page 151: ...allation 5 Turn the operation panel over and put it on the machine Put some cloths or sheets of paper between the machine and the operation panel so as not to scratch the exposure glass 6 Clip tray A x 3 7 Pass the USB cable A under the bracket B Rev 08 03 2009 ...

Page 152: ...Slot Type C 9 Install the USB2 0 SD Slot Type C on the operation panel x 3 Use three screws provided with this kit Tapping screws must be used to attach the USB2 0 SD Slot Type C to bracket A of the operation panel The other screw must be installed on the right side B 10 Put the ground wires A and the USB Cable B into the machine as shown in the Rev 08 03 2009 ...

Page 153: ...rams 11 Secure the USB Cable to the bracket x 3 12 Pass the USB Cable to the rear side of the machine 13 Pass the USB Cable through the rear upper cover A 14 Install the rear upper cover p 4 8 Rear Covers 15 Insert the USB Cable in the USB slot on the controller box Rev 08 03 2009 ...

Page 154: ... the machine 18 Re install the right upper cover p 4 7 Right Covers 19 Re install the operation panel p 4 6 20 Plug in and power on the machine 21 Enter Scanner SP Mode and change SP1013 001 from 0 to 1 If SP1013 001 is not set to 1 Incompatible USB device connected will be displayed 22 Perform SD Card USB Slot test p 2 126 Testing the SD Card USB Slot Rev 08 03 2009 ...

Page 155: ...SC card must be inserted into its assigned slot The slot assignment of each item is listed in the table below If the customer wants to use more than one application on SD cards applications must be merged on the same SD card The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the application program to the target SD card Do not use an SD card if it was used with a computer before this time C...

Page 156: ... removing an SD card Merging Applications Do this procedure to put more than one application on one SD card 1 Turn off the main machine 2 Remove the SD card slot cover x 1 3 Put the Source SD card in Slot 2 service slot This card contains the application that you want to copy The PS3 SD card cannot be the source card it cannot be copied 4 Check the target SD card and confirm that its write protect...

Page 157: ... Turn the main switch OFF 2 Put the SD card holding the merged applications in SD Card Slot 1 3 Put the original destination SD card the one removed from storage into Slot 2 The SD card in Slot 2 must be the original SD card of the application you want to move from Slot 1 to Slot 2 You cannot use a blank SD card in Slot 1 4 Turn the main switch ON 5 Do SP5873 002 Undo Exec 6 Follow the instruction...

Page 158: ...e 2 20 3 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT D462 Accessories No Description Q ty 1 Caution Decal 1 2 Printer Scanner SD Card 1 3 Printer Keytops English Symbol 2 4 Scanner Keytops English Symbol 2 5 EULA Sheet 1 6 FCC Decal 1 7 Memory DIMM 1GB 1 Only one Slot 1 is available for applications on SD cards If more than one application is will be used the applications must be moved onto one SD card with SP5873 1 Ins...

Page 159: ... Push the SD Card in to release it for removal Make sure the SD Card is inserted and locked in place If it is partially out of the slot push it in gently until it locks in place 6 On the operation panel remove the dummy keytops A second and third from the bottom and discard them 7 Install the Printer keytop B then the Scanner keytop C Select either the English set or Symbol set for installation Th...

Page 160: ...tion for the printer scanner option 2 20 4 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT D462 20 22 23 Accessories Description Q ty 1 PostScript3 Emulation SD Card 1 2 Decal 1 Only Slot 1 is available for applications on SD cards If more than one application will be used the applications must be merged onto one SD card with SP5873 1 Installation 1 Switch the machine off 2 Remove the SD card slot cover A x 1 3 Insert the PS3 S...

Page 161: ...e Wireless LAN board B in Slot A 4 Confirm that the board is inserted completely then fasten it x 2 5 Pull the antennas away from machine and make sure that they are not tangled 6 Look at the markings on the antenna bracket ANT1 Antenna 1 transmits and receives The ferrite core on the Antenna 1 cable is black It must be installed on the left rear corner of the main machine where it will not be obs...

Page 162: ... 11a g 1 Go into the SP mode 2 Touch Copy SP on the touch panel to open the SP command selection screen 3 Do SP5840 11 SP No Name Function 5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key Default 00 2 20 6 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE C B826 Accessories Check the quantity and condition of the accessories No Description Q ty 1 Bluetooth card 1 2 Bluetooth card cover 1 3 Bluetooth board 1 4 Bluet...

Page 163: ...e Bluetooth board D 6 Insert the interface board with card and adapter inserted into Slot B2 7 Attach the card cover E used to prevent static electricity 8 Confirm that Bluetooth is installed correctly User Tools Printer Features List Test Print Configuration Page 2 20 7 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE E D377 Accessory Check Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Q ty ...

Page 164: ...Note Files backed up to Palm2 in J2K format cannot be edited by other software applications SP5 836 94 0 Selects the TIFF file format for documents copied from the document server to Palm2 Note Select this so the backed up files can be used with other software applications editing OCR etc with only slight loss in image quality 1 Applies dot correction and eliminates ghost images transferred from t...

Page 165: ...Make sure that the following settings are not at the factory default settings Supervisor login password Administrator login name Administrator login password These settings must be set up by the customer before the encryption option can be installed 2 Confirm that Admin Authentication is on User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Admin Authentication ...

Page 166: ...each corner The surfaces of the tapes must be blank If you see VOID on the tapes do not install the components in the box 2 If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 You can see the VOID marks B when you remove each seal In this condition they cannot be attached to the box again Installation Procedure 1 Make sure Admin Authentication is on and the auth...

Page 167: ...ch is initialized 2 Make the restore_key folder in the SD card 3 Make an nvram_key txt file in the restore_key folder in the SD card 4 Ask an administrator to input the encryption key this has been printed out earlier by the user into the nvram_key txt file 5 Remove only the HDD unit 6 Turn on the main power switch 7 Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card storing the e...

Page 168: ...off the main power switch 8 Insert the SD card that contains nvclear into slot 2 9 Turn on the main power switch and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the flash memory on the controller board 10 Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status 11 Remove the SD card from slot 2 12 Turn on the main power switch 13 Initialize the NVRAM SP5801 1 and...

Page 169: ...hat this setting must be On before you can do the installation procedure 4 Confirm that Administrator Tools is selected and enabled User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Administrator Authentication Management Available Settings Available Settings is not displayed until Step 2 is done If this setting is not selected tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can do th...

Page 170: ...power switch off 5 Remove the SD card slot cover x1 6 Insert the SD card into SD card Slot 1 7 Reconnect the network cable 8 Turn the main power switch on 9 Do SP5878 001 and push EXECUTE 10 Go out of the SP mode 11 Turn the operation switch off then turn the main power switch off 12 Do SP5990 5 to print an SMC report 13 Make sure the ROM number and firmware version in area a of the diagnostic rep...

Page 171: ...ystem Settings Administrator Tools Auto Erase Memory Setting On 15 Exit User Tools 16 Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon A is displayed 17 Make a Sample Copy 18 Check the overwrite erase icon A The icon B This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten and blinks during overwriting The icon C This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwrit...

Page 172: ... for SD cards A Remove the SD card VM JAVA from SD slot 2 B 2 Turn off the machine and unplug the main machine power cord Remove the slot cover for SD cards A 3 Turn the Browser SD card label face to the rear of the machine Then push it slowly into slot 2 until you hear a click 4 Plug in and turn on the main power switch 5 Push the User Tools key If an administrator setting is registered for the m...

Page 173: ...function key for Browser Unit to the place you chose in step 18 23 Turn on the main power switch 24 When the reaches the Ready condition press the key that you installed in step 22 Note A message will be displayed confirming that the Browser Option was successfully installed 25 Turn off the main power switch 26 Remove the SD card from slot 2 27 Reinstall the JAVA card in slot 2 28 Attach the slot ...

Page 174: ...ar lower cover x2 p 4 8 Remove Screws and swing open the controller box x 3 IPU left cover A x1 Install Copy Data Security Unit Type F B x 3 After Replacing the Copy Data Security Unit 1 Switch the machine on 2 Login in as the System Administrator 3 Push User Tools 4 Touch System Settings 5 Touch Administrator Tools 6 Touch next 2 or 3 times until you see Data Security for Copying 7 Touch ON 8 Tou...

Page 175: ...re than one application is will be used the applications must be merged onto one SD card with SP5873 001 Installation 1 Switch the machine off 2 Remove the SD card slot cover A x1 3 Insert the SD card B into SD slot 2 4 Switch the machine on The installation will start automatically The installation will take 5 to 10 minutes 1 Replace the sixth key slot cover with the Other function key Rev 06 15 ...

Page 176: ...lowing screen will appear 3 Set the heap size and stack size for the application 4 Install the application using the installation procedure provided with the application 2 20 13IEEE1284 B679 Accessories Description Q ty 1 IEEE 1284 Centronics Board 1 Only one PCI slot A is available for one of these options Centronics 1284 IEEE 801 11a g g Wireless LAN D377 Bluetooth Interface Unit B826 File Forma...

Page 177: ...ns SM 2 129 D062 D063 D065 D066 Installation Installation 1 Switch the machine off 2 Remove the cover A of Slot A x 2 3 Insert the 1284 Centronics board B into Slot A and fasten it with the screws Rev 06 15 2011 ...

Page 178: ...377 Accessories Description Q ty 1 Gigabit Ethernet 1 2 Ferrite Core 1 3 Screw 2 4 Cap for Network Slot 1 Installation 1 Switch the machine off 2 Remove the controller box cover p 4 105 CNT Board Controller Board 3 Remove the Gigabit Ethernet slot cover A x 1 Rev 06 15 2011 ...

Page 179: ...ith the screws A 6 Reassemble the machine 7 Attach the ferrite core A to the network cable B 30 mm or more 8 Connect the network cable to the slot for Gigabit Ethernet 9 Print a configuration page to confirm that the machine recognizes the installed board for USB2 0 User Tools Printer Features List Test Print Configuration Page Rev 06 15 2011 ...

Page 180: ...nducted through an inserted SD card could cause the machine to malfunction 3 Make sure that no previous settings remain If a previous setting remains press the Clear Modes key 4 Place an original on the exposure glass 5 Press Store File 6 Press Store to Memory Device 7 Press OK 8 Press the Start key When writing is complete a confirmation message appears 9 Press Exit 10 Remove the memory device fr...

Page 181: ......

Page 182: ...PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 183: ......

Page 184: ...PM Tables SM 3 1 D062 D063 D065 D066 Preventive Maintenance 3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3 1 PM TABLES See Appendices for the following information PM Tables ...

Page 185: ......

Page 186: ...REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 60 2 22 2011 Delete unnecessary step 112 5 21 2010 Replace the BCU ...

Page 187: ......

Page 188: ...wet cotton 4 Never use alcohol to clean the drum alcohol dissolves the drum surface 5 Store the drum in a cool dry place away from heat 6 Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily damaged 7 Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas 8 Always keep the drum in the protective sheet when keeping the drum unit or the drum itself out of the machine Doing...

Page 189: ...ill throw the lens and the copy image out of focus 6 Do not turn any of the CCD positioning screws Doing so will throw the CCD out of position 4 1 5 LASER UNIT 1 Do not loosen the screws that secure the LD drive board to the laser diode casing Doing so would throw the LD unit out of adjustment 2 Do not adjust the variable resistors on the LD unit as they are adjusted in the factory 3 The polygon m...

Page 190: ... proper gap between the doctor blade and the development roller 4 Clean the drive gears after removing used developer 5 Dispose of used developer in accordance with local regulations 6 Never load types of developer and toner into the development unit other than specified for this model Doing so will cause poor copy quality and toner scattering 7 Immediately after installing new developer the TD se...

Page 191: ...e that the fusing lamp is positioned correctly and that it does not touch the inner surface of the hot roller 4 1 10 PAPER FEED 1 Do not touch the surface of the pick up feed and separation rollers 2 To avoid paper misfeeds the side fences and end fence of the paper tray must be positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size 4 1 11 USED TONER 1 We recommend checking the amount of used to...

Page 192: ...ion A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin 4 pcs set A2929500 Test Chart S5S 10 pcs set A0299387 Digital Multimeter FLUKE 87 VSST9500 Test Chart S5S DF 10 Sheets Set G0219350 Loop Back Connector B6455010 SD Secure Digital Card 64 MB 4 2 2 LUBRICANTS Part No Description A2579300 Grease Barrierta JFE 5 5 2 52039502 Silicon Grease G 501 54429101 Setting Powder ...

Page 193: ... 4 3 OPERATION PANEL AND EXTERNAL COVERS 4 3 1 OPERATION PANEL 1 Open the ADF 2 Operation panel A x 3 x 1 ground cable x 1 4 3 2 FRONT DOOR While supporting the front door A with one hand press down on the hinge bracket B then raise the door slightly to remove it ...

Page 194: ...lide the right upper cover down to remove it Before tightening the screws when re attaching make sure that 1 the tabs C on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine and 2 the catches on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws 3 Right lower cover D x 2 After removing the screws slide the cover down to remove it When re attaching before tightening the screws make sure that the tab...

Page 195: ...ure that 1 the tabs on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine and 2 the catches on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws 2 Left lower cover B x 2 Slide down to remove When re attaching before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the grooves on the machine 4 3 5 REAR COVERS 1 Rear upper cover A x 2 Slide down to remove ...

Page 196: ...d Adjustment When re attaching before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws 2 Rear lower cover B x 2 When re attaching before tightening the screws make sure that the tabs on the cover are engaged with the shoulder screws ...

Page 197: ...owing parts 1 Rear upper cover and rear lower cover p 4 8 Rear Covers 2 Cable brackets A each x 1 3 Nylon clamps B each x 1 4 Connectors C x 4 5 ADF base left and right plates D x 2 While holding the ADF firmly slide the ADF back and lift the large end of the keyholes over the shoulder screws ...

Page 198: ... D065 D066 Replacement and Adjustment Top Covers Remove the following parts 1 ADF p 4 10 2 Top inside cover A x 2 3 Top left cover B x 1 4 Top right cover C x 1 5 Operation panel D x 3 x 1 ground cable x 1 4 4 2 EXPOSURE GLASS ...

Page 199: ...to the exposure glass with double sided tape Do not remove the left scale from the exposure glass When re installing the exposure glass Position the exposure glass first Make sure that the arrow mark is in the upper left corner When re installing the left cover make sure it is seated correctly 4 4 3 SCANNER ORIGINAL SIZE SENSORS 1 Exposure glass p 4 11 2 Original width sensor A x 1 x 1 3 Lens bloc...

Page 200: ...posure glass p 4 11 2 Lens cover C x 9 3 Lens block D x 4 x 4 To avoid damaging the lens block never set it down on the side with the PCB turn it over with the PCB up 4 Re assemble the machine then perform the scanner and printer adjustments p 4 133 4 4 5 EXPOSURE LAMP 1 Exposure glass p 4 11 2 Operation panel p 4 6 3 Push the 1st scanner B to the cutout A in the scanner frame ...

Page 201: ...ure lamp C x 1 x 1 x 1 Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare fingers 4 4 6 SIOB 1 Lens block p 4 13 2 Top right cover p 4 10 ADF and Top Covers 3 Top right bracket A x 4 4 Right upper cover p 4 7 Right Covers 5 SIOB cover B x 6 ...

Page 202: ...5 D066 Replacement and Adjustment 6 SIOB C x 4 all s 4 4 7 SCANNER MOTOR 1 SIOB cover p 4 14 2 Remove three screws 3 Release a screw move down the bracket A release the timing belt B and then remove the scanner motor bracket C x 1 ...

Page 203: ...canner D062 D063 D065 D066 4 16 SM 4 Scanner motor D x 2 4 4 8 SCANNER HP SENSOR 1 ADF p 4 10 2 Top inside cover p 4 11 Top Covers 3 Top right cover p 4 11 Top Covers 4 Scanner HP Sensor A x 1 all hooks ...

Page 204: ...al 1 Disconnect ground wire 1 x1 2 Disconnect the head of the wire 2 from tension bracket 1 3 Remove spring 3 4 Loosen the screw 4 of tension bracket 1 5 Disconnect the end of the wire at A 6 Remove lock bracket B of the 1st scanner x1 7 Disconnect the wire from the pulley C x1 8 Remove the wire from the scanner ...

Page 205: ...f the wire C 5 times 4 Attach tape D across the pulley to temporarily hold the wires in place 5 Position the 1st scanner A so that the holes are aligned and insert the positioning pins B x4 6 Position the 2nd scanner C so that its holes are aligned and insert the positioning pins D 7 Attach the lock bracket E to fasten the wire to the 1st scanner 8 Tighten the screw of the tension bracket 9 Attach...

Page 206: ...66 Replacement and Adjustment 10 Remove the positioning pins x4 11 Remove the tape from the pulley 12 Slowly push the scanner left and right to confirm that the wires are engaged correctly The 1st and 2nd scanners should move smoothly ...

Page 207: ...ng any replacement or adjustment of the laser unit push the machine power switch to switch the machine off Then unplug the machine from the power source Do not touch the machine for 10 minutes This allows enough time for the fusing unit to cool and for the polygon motor to stop rotating Never power on the machine with any of these components removed 1 LD unit 2 polygon motor cover 3 synchronizatio...

Page 208: ...tes at extremely high speed and continues to rotate after switching the machine off To avoid damaging the motor never remove the polygon motor within three minutes of switching off the machine and disconnecting its power plug 3 Remove LD unit B x 2 x 3 Polygon motor C x 3 x 1 Polygon motor drive board D x 3 x 3 Before fastening the polygon motor in place x 3 x 1 make sure that the glass panel of t...

Page 209: ... is the machine number The second line on the label includes three numbers separated by slashes Reading from left to right these are the correct settings for SP2115 Main Scan Beam Pitch Adjustment 001 to 005 Do not remove this label and make sure it is flat against the side of the LD unit 3 Perform the printer adjustments See Print Image Adjustment 4 5 3 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR REPLACEMENT ...

Page 210: ...pattern to the desired rectangular pattern for printing it does not correct the skew of scanned images 1 Execute SP2902 003 Test Pattern Printing Test Pattern 018 to print the A4 LEF pattern Check the printed patterns and estimate the angle of adjustment required 2 Remove the exposure glass p 4 11 3 Remove the polygon motor cover p 4 20 LD Unit Polygon Motor and Polygon Motor Drive Board 4 Remove ...

Page 211: ...ard the back If the pattern is skewed at the lower left corner of the trailing edge D move the unit so it moves the pointer on the scale toward the front The scale is set for increments of 1 mm 8 After adjustment tighten the screws on the laser exposure unit re assemble the machine and print the pattern again with SP2902 003 No 18 9 Check the pattern Repeat the procedure if more adjustment is requ...

Page 212: ...d Adjustment 4 6 DRUM UNIT 4 6 1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL Drum Removal 1 Open the front door 2 Shutter cover A x 1 3 Lock screw B 4 Toner bottle C Pull the toner bottle holder out and swing the toner bottle holder to the right 5 PCU inner cover D x 2 x 1 ...

Page 213: ...behind the stay and its pin below should be in the open track below 7 Close the supply pipe shutter G 8 Development unit H x 2 I Allow the unit to slip to the right then slowly pull it out of the machine If the LCT is installed you may need to disconnect it so the front door can open far enough to allow removal of the development unit ...

Page 214: ... then push it to the left 5 Make sure you can see the horizontal pin in front of the plate as shown below If you cannot move the development unit plate behind the horizontal pin turn the front gear of the unit to the left and try again Make sure the pipeline shutter is rotated down to the open position 6 Reattach all removed parts Replacement with a Used Development Unit When using a development u...

Page 215: ...ent unit then input the VREF for this unit into SP2220 3 After the test reinstall the old development unit and change SP2220 back to the original value 4 6 2 CHARGE CORONA UNIT Remove the development unit p 4 25 1 Charge corona unit A x 1 x 1 4 6 3 CHARGE CORONA WIRE AND GRID Remove the charge corona unit p 4 28 1 Grid A x 1 ...

Page 216: ...ver bend or knot the wire Charge will not distribute evenly on a bent wire Make sure that the wire seam G is as close as possible to the wire hook at the rear At the front and back make sure that the wire is threaded correctly into the grooves in the end blocks After replacing the charge corona wire make sure that the wire cleaner pads are engaged correctly with the wires After replacing the wire ...

Page 217: ...LEANING PADS Remove Charge corona unit p 4 28 Charge corona wire and grid p 4 28 1 Cleaning pad A x 1 4 6 5 OPC DRUM REMOVAL Remove Development unit p 4 25 Charge corona unit p 4 28 1 Drum unit A x 1 x 2 Grasp the drum unit by the knob to remove it from the machine ...

Page 218: ...t setting SP2962 Adjustment of Drum Conditions only if SP3901 Auto Process Control is on To avoid fingerprints on the surface of the OPC drum never touch the surface of the drum with bare fingers Never use alcohol to clean the surface of the OPC drum Blow dry the OPC drum then wipe clean with a clean slightly damp cloth Before installing a new drum dust the surface of the OPC drum carefully with s...

Page 219: ...on could damage the drum cleaning blade or scour the drum surface 1 Apply the setting powder by tapping the powder bag A across the surface of the drum B 2 Cover the entire length of the drum over a 45 90 degree portion C about 1 4 of the total drum surface Apply enough powder so the area turns white If setting powder is not available use waste toner instead of drum setting powder However this cou...

Page 220: ...owdered surface D faces the cleaning blade E 4 Rotate the drum once clockwise F until it stops again at the same position Never rotate the drum anti clockwise 4 6 6 PTL Remove these parts OPC drum p 4 30 1 PTL bracket A x 2 2 PTL B x 1 Reinstallation The shoulder screw C must be attached again at its initial location ...

Page 221: ...nter push back the hook to release the quenching lamp Use only a blower brush to clean the quenching lamp 4 6 8 DRUM POTENTIAL SENSOR Remove OPC drum p 4 30 1 Drum potential sensor A x 2 x 1 2 After replacing the drum potential sensor do SP2962 Adjustment of Drum Conditions only if SP3901 Auto Process Control is on ...

Page 222: ... drum p 4 30 1 Drum cleaning blade A x 2 Clean the blade edge carefully with only a soft clean cloth Handle the blade carefully to avoid nicking its edge New blades are treated with special setting powder so avoid touching the edge of a new cleaning blade If the edge of a new blade is accidentally wiped clean dust it lightly with some toner before installing it ...

Page 223: ... Drum cleaning blade p 4 35 1 Coupling A x 1 2 Inner bushing B x 1 3 Cleaning brush C Pull the shaft toward the rear to disengage the front of the shaft then pull out After replacing the cleaning brush clean the ID sensor to make sure that it is clean and free of toner Avoid touching the cleaning brush with bare hands Check the entrance seals and confirm that they are not bent ...

Page 224: ...63 D065 D066 Replacement and Adjustment 4 6 12 PICK OFF PAWLS Remove OPC drum p 4 30 1 Pick off pawl bracket A x 2 2 Pick off pawl B spring x 1 4 6 13 ID SENSOR Remove OPC drum p 4 25 Pick off pawls p 4 37 1 ID sensor A x 2 x 1 ...

Page 225: ...ol is on SP3001 002 ID Sensor Initialization Setting 4 6 14 DRUM MOTOR Remove Rear covers p 4 8 Controller IPU panel x 2 not shown The panel swings open like a door You do not need to remove it Flywheel x 3 not shown 1 Three gears A B x 1 x 2 Timing belt x 1 Gears A are different in each model D062 and D063 have black gears but D065 and D066 have white ones ...

Page 226: ...5 TONER COLLECTION BOTTLE 1 Open the front door A 2 Remove the lock pin B then pull out the toner collection bottle C and its base D 3 Detach the bottle from the base clamp E and replace it 4 6 16 TONER SEPARATION UNIT Remove Development unit p 4 43 Removal Pressure release tube only for D066 p 4 43 Developer Replacement ...

Page 227: ... Unit D062 D063 D065 D066 4 40 SM 1 Toner separation unit A x 3 tube x 1 4 6 17 OZONE FILTERS 1 Filter cover A x 1 The filter cover is on the back of the machine 2 Ozone filter right B 3 Ozone filter left C ...

Page 228: ...ER 1 Filter cover A 2 Optics dust filter B 4 6 19 INTERNAL DUST FILTER 1 Open the front door 2 Pull the toner bottle holder out and swing the toner bottle holder to the right 3 Remove the PCU inner cover 4 Pull out the internal dust filter A 4 6 20 TONER COOLING FAN 1 Operation panel p 4 6 ...

Page 229: ...Drum Unit D062 D063 D065 D066 4 42 SM 2 Toner cooling fan unit A x 2 x 1 3 Toner cooling fan B x 2 Make sure the decal is facing down when reinstalled ...

Page 230: ...nly the pressure release tube A should be removed before removing the development unit 1 Development unit p 4 25 Development Unit Removal 2 Pressure release tube A Removal 1 Remove the toner hopper A x 2 2 Rotate the toner hopper very slightly 10 to 20 as you slide it up to remove it To avoid toner spill hold the hopper level as you remove it ...

Page 231: ... Note the developer lot number printed on the top edge of the bag You will need the lot number when you input SP2801 2 8 Clean the development roller shaft with a clean cloth and blower brush 9 While turning the knob D slowly pour in one pack of developer E from one end of the development unit to the other 10 Make sure that the developer is evenly distributed 11 Continue to turn the knob several t...

Page 232: ...tart SP2801 must be done before auto process control starts Push Clear Modes Enter the SP mode Close the front door Push System SP on the touch panel Push to select SP2801 002 On the soft keys enter the lot number from the pack of developer then push Do SP2801 1 4 7 2 DEVELOPMENT FILTER Remove Development unit p 4 25 Drum Removal Pressure release tube only for D066 p 4 43 Developer Replacement 1 T...

Page 233: ...7 3 ENTRANCE SEAL AND SIDE SEALS Removal Development unit p 4 25 Development Unit Removal 1 Entrance seal bracket A x 2 2 After removing the screws press in the catches on either end B to release the entrance seal bracket then remove it Clean the entrance seal bracket before re installing it When re installing make sure the tabs C and notches are engaged at four locations 3 Side seals D Remove the...

Page 234: ...lacement and Adjustment seals Reinstalling 1 Attach the seals A as shown in the above diagrams 2 Reinstall the entrance seal bracket B is incorrect C is correct 4 7 4 TD SENSOR Remove Development unit p 4 25 Development Unit Removal 1 TD sensor x 1 A ...

Page 235: ... only if SP3901 Auto Process Control is on 4 7 5 TONER END SENSOR Remove Development unit p 4 43 Removal 1 Toner hopper A x 2 2 Toner end sensor B x 2 Remove the screws carefully to avoid stripping the holes Before installing a new toner end sensor clean the toner end sensor port C 4 7 6 TONER SUPPLY MOTOR 1 Open the front door 2 Swing the toner unit out of the machine and remove the toner bottle ...

Page 236: ...elow 1 Toner bottle unit A x 1 harness x 1 x 1 The c clamp is under the toner unit Lift the toner bottle unit off the pegs and lay it on a piece of newspaper to avoid toner spill 2 Bottom plate B x 3 harnesses x 2 2 screws on the bottom 1 screw on the side 3 Toner supply motor bracket C x 2 4 Toner supply motor D x 2 Cleaning Requirement The toner pan E must be cleaned at every PM interval 300 K ...

Page 237: ... 7 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR 1 Flywheel A x 3 2 Waste toner pump tube B x 1 x 1 3 Drive rod C Lift the toner pump tube to disengage the drive rod pull out the rod and push the rubber tube aside 4 Development motor bracket D x 3 x 1 5 Development motor E x 4 ...

Page 238: ...p 4 30 1 Disconnect the transfer belt unit A x 1 2 Remove the transfer belt unit stay B x 1 3 While supporting the transfer belt unit with your hand turn the release lever C counter clockwise to release it then pull the transfer belt unit out of the machine The transfer belt unit can be removed without removing the OPC drum unit However the transfer belt unit must be removed carefully to avoid scr...

Page 239: ...transfer current terminal B x 2 While doing this hold the transfer belt unit C by its knobs D 2 Raise and stand the belt perpendicular to the unit and remove it To avoid scratching the belt on the guide never rotate the belt unit farther than 90 degrees 3 Release the drive roller E x 2 4 Press in on the drive roller to collapse the unit into a U shape F 5 Remove the belt and replace it ...

Page 240: ...f the transfer belt and clean with the blower brush When re assembling the transfer belt unit make sure that the transfer belt is centered between the triangular marks A on either side of the unit After re assembly make sure that the transfer belt is inside the transfer current terminal The belt could be cut if it is not positioned correctly Confirm that both the ground and transfer current termin...

Page 241: ...ransfer roller cleaning blade should always be replaced when the transfer belt is replaced Never touch the edge of a new transfer roller cleaning blade The edge of the blade is dusted with setting powder If the setting powder is removed accidentally dust the edge of the blade with toner This is especially important when only the transfer roller cleaning blade must be replaced without replacing the...

Page 242: ... the discharge unit up then lift it straight up to remove it 4 Disconnect the three large tabs B 5 Remove the bracket C x 1 6 Disconnect the 6 small seal case tabs D 7 Remove the discharge plate E Reinstallation 1 Set the discharge plate and make sure that it is perfectly flat before re connecting the tabs 2 Before re attaching the bracket C make sure that all the tabs are connected ...

Page 243: ...round terminal wire 3 Transfer current terminal wire E wire guides x 2 4 Transfer power pack F x 1 Disconnect the two standoffs on the right edge of the power pack and remove Re installation Confirm that the left edge of the power pack is below the tabs on the left Confirm that the transfer current terminal wire is below the wire guides on the right Pass the ground terminal wire under the top conn...

Page 244: ...an paper on the floor where you intend to set the fusing unit 1 Open the front door 2 Pull out the transfer unit 3 Knob A x 1 Open D3 and D4 until you can see the hole in the shaft Insert the tip of a screwdriver into the hole of the shaft to hold it in position as the knob is turned to remove or install it 4 Inner cover B x 3 Pull the fusing unit release lever then pull the unit out on the rail s...

Page 245: ...nit E x 2 x 2 Support the bottom of the fusing unit with your hand as you remove it 4 9 2 FUSING UNIT THERMISTORS AND THERMOSTATS Remove the fusing unit p 4 57 1 Upper cover A x 1 2 Press in on the internal pawls B to release them then remove them Make sure that the pawls B engage correctly when you reinstall the unit ...

Page 246: ...nd of the thermostat harness that has the round lead A in between the two ribs in the bracket Tighten the screw for the round lead A as tight as possible without damaging the screw or screw hole If the harness is not positioned between the between the bracket ribs as shown under Incorrect below this could cause an error SC542 or SC545 4 9 3 WEB CLEANING ROLLER Web Unit Disassembly 1 Open the front...

Page 247: ...y to remove 4 Web shafts C x 2 5 Remove the web cleaning rollers from the shaft driver pins D 6 Web bushing E spring x 1 7 Cleaning roller F Reinstallation After replacing the web with a new one you must execute SP1902 001 Fusing Web Used Area Display Setting to reset the web consumption count to zero This SP code must be executed to release SC550 Unnecessary step deleted Rev 02 22 2011 ...

Page 248: ... Insert the end of the web into the slot 2 Insert the drive pins B into the web shaft 3 After installing bushing C rotate the shaft right to lock it then attach the lock screw 4 Set the web D under the feeler E of the web end sensor 5 Attach bushing 2 F 6 Attach the new web roll G and wind it tight so no slack remains ...

Page 249: ...he feeler of the web end sensor 7 Attach the upper cover 8 After installing a new web roll reset SP1902 001 to zero 4 9 4 WEB MOTOR AND WEB END SENSOR Remove Web unit and end cover p 4 59 Web Unit Disassembly 1 Bracket A x 1 2 Web motor positioning bracket B x 1 3 Web motor C 4 Web motor sensor mount D x 3 5 Web end sensor E x 1 harness x 1 ...

Page 250: ...hen attaching the lower cover of the pressure roller cleaning roller make sure that the tab D engages with the groove E If the bushings are noisy after replacement lubricate them on both ends and the holes where the bushings are attached with Barietta Grease L553R 4 9 6 FUSING LAMPS HOT ROLLER AND PRESSURE ROLLER If you wish to remove the pressure roller only without removing the hot roller and fu...

Page 251: ...Fusing Unit D062 D063 D065 D066 4 64 SM 2 Rear terminal connector bracket A x 2 metal clamp x 3 B x 6 3 Rear fusing lamp holder C x 1 ...

Page 252: ...Fusing Unit SM 4 65 D062 D063 D065 D066 Replacement and Adjustment 4 Plate D x 1 5 Disconnect two harnesses E 6 Front fusing holder F x 1 ...

Page 253: ...en you move the fusing lamps Do not break them Do not touch them with bare hands Hot Roller and Pressure Roller Use this procedure when you want to remove both rollers 1 Remove the web unit p 4 59 2 Pressure arm A Insert the tips of two screwdrivers and press down to release ...

Page 254: ...cement and Adjustment 3 C clamps both ends B 4 Drive gear C 5 Bushings both ends D 6 Bearings E 7 Hot roller F 8 Entrance guide plate A x 2 9 Pressure roller B x 2 The pressure roller and pressure roller bearing should always be replaced together ...

Page 255: ...grease If the bushings are warm allow them to cool before applying the Barrierta grease Applying the grease while the bushings are hot could generate gas 4 9 7 PRESSURE ROLLER Use this procedure if you need to remove only the pressure roller Remove Fusing unit p 4 57 1 Turn the fusing unit upside down 2 Lower cover A x 1 ...

Page 256: ...bly handle the roller carefully to avoid scratching it on the bracket Make sure the tabs and grooves of the lower cover are engaged correctly before tightening the screw Spring Adjustment Two holes F are provided on each pressure arm for the springs Normally the springs should be attached to the lower holes Attaching the springs to the upper holes exerts less pressure on the hot roller Attach the ...

Page 257: ... paper is still in the fusing unit by switching it off This is easier with an OHP sheet Use an OHP sheet if you have one available 2 Open the front door then turn the fusing knob to feed out the copy 3 Measure the width of the band on the part of the image where it is particularly black The band called the nip band A should be 9 0 0 7 mm at the center When the fusing is incorrect wrinkles offset c...

Page 258: ...ither end of the pressure roller The fusing temperature can also be adjusted with SP1105 Fusing Temperature Adjustment for Normal OHP and Thick Paper 4 9 10 FUSING UNIT EXIT SENSOR Remove Fusing unit p 4 57 1 Open the hot roller stripper pawl unit A 2 Exit guide plate B x 2 3 Fusing exit sensor holder C x 2 4 Plate spring D 5 Fusing exit sensor E x 1 x 3 ...

Page 259: ...066 4 72 SM 4 9 11 FUSING EXIT MOTOR Remove Rear upper cover p 4 8 Rear Covers 1 Open the BCU x 4 2 CNB bracket A x 4 x1 x all 3 Timing belt B 4 Fusing exit motor bracket C x 3 5 Fusing exit motor x 2 inside the bracket not shown ...

Page 260: ...ustment 4 9 12 FUSING EXIT SENSOR AND EXIT UNIT ENTRANCE SENSORS 1 Open the front door and pull out the exit inverter unit 2 Fusing exit sensor bracket A x 2 3 Fusing exit sensor B x 1 4 Exit unit entrance sensor bracket C x 2 5 Exit unit entrance sensor D x 1 ...

Page 261: ... roller on the left A and on the right B x 1 3 Lift out the duplex unit C Reinstallation To re install the duplex unit insert the duplex unit partially only until it enters the black guide rail then re attach each slide rail roller Next push the duplex unit into the machine completely This method prevents interference from the guide plate during installation ...

Page 262: ...he left lock screw C then adjust the position of the duplex unit 4 10 3 JOGGER FENCE ADJUSTMENT SP1008 Duplex Fence Adjustment Execute this SP to adjust the distance between the jogger fences if required A smaller value shortens the distance If the fences are too far apart skewing may occur in the duplex tray If the fences are too close the paper may be creased in the duplex unit For details see S...

Page 263: ...Duplex Unit D062 D063 D065 D066 4 76 SM 4 10 4 DUPLEX MOTORS Duplex Inverter Motor 1 Remove the cover A x 3 2 Inverter motor bracket B x 3 3 Inverter motor C x 1 x 1 x 2 timing belt x 1 ...

Page 264: ...plex Unit SM 4 77 D062 D063 D065 D066 Replacement and Adjustment Duplex Jogger and Transport Motors 1 Jogger motor A x 1 x 2 2 Transport motor bracket B x 1 x 1 x 3 timing belt x 1 3 Transport motor C x 2 ...

Page 265: ...Unit D062 D063 D065 D066 4 78 SM 4 10 5 DUPLEX SENSORS Jogger HP Sensor 1 Duplex unit release lever A x 2 2 Jogger HP sensor B x 1 x 2 x 1 Duplex Entrance Sensor 1 Bracket A x 2 2 Duplex entrance sensor B x 1 ...

Page 266: ...ght half of table A x 2 x 1 The front screw is a shoulder screw Insert the screws in the correct holes when re attaching 2 Remove the screw B to release the sensor bracket below 3 Transport sensor 3 C x 1 Inverter Exit Sensor Transport Sensors 1 2 1 Cross stay A x 4 2 Reverse trigger roller shaft B ...

Page 267: ...breaking the tabs under the left edge of the table pull the table to the right to disengage the tabs and then remove 5 Inverter exit sensor E x 1 x 1 x 1 6 Transport sensor 1 F x 1 x 1 7 Transport sensor 2 G x 1 x 1 4 10 6 DUPLEX JOGGER BELT ADJUSTMENT Remove Cross stay p 4 79 Inverter Exit Sensor Transport Sensors 1 2 Reverse trigger roller shaft p 4 79 Inverter Exit Sensor Transport Sensors 1 ...

Page 268: ...otor Slip the other end of the belt around the gear at the other side of the duplex unit 1 If you are replacing the belt set both jogger fence brackets at the center of the belt and tighten the screw A 2 If you are adjusting the belt loosen the screw and slide the plastic piece B on the belt to the left or right to adjust the position of the front fence then tighten the screw ...

Page 269: ...5 D066 4 82 SM 4 11 PAPER FEED 4 11 1 PAPER TRAY Tandem Tray 1 Open the front door 2 Pull out the tandem tray drawer A completely to separate the left B and right C sides of the tandem tray 3 Remove the left tandem tray D x 5 ...

Page 270: ...ment 4 Right tandem tray E x 2 Reinstallation When re installing the right tandem tray make sure that the wheels A ride on the slide rail B When re installing the right tandem tray make sure that the tandem tray stopper C is set behind the stopper D on the frame ...

Page 271: ... 4 84 SM Universal Tray 1 Pull tray 2 or tray 3 A 2 Lift the tray B out of the drawer 4 11 2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Turn off the machine 2 Pull out the tandem feed tray 3 Rear bottom plate A x 1 4 Return sensor B x 1 ...

Page 272: ...the machine 2 Pull out the tandem feed tray 3 Rear bottom plate A x 1 4 Back fence transport gear B x 1 5 Move the back fence C to the right 6 Rear HP sensor D x 1 4 11 4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT 1 Turn off the machine 2 Remove the right tandem tray p 4 82 3 Inner cover A x 2 4 Side fences B x 1 each ...

Page 273: ...or E x 1 4 11 5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT Before replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire remove the front bottom plate lift wire The shaft must be removed to replace the lift wire of the bottom plate Remove Right tandem tray p 4 82 Tandem Tray 1 Remove the inner cover A x 2 ...

Page 274: ... stoppers C Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook 4 Wire covers D x 1 each 5 Bracket E x 1 x 1 bushing x 1 6 Gear F 7 Bottom plate lift wire G Reinstallation Set the positioning pin A in the hole B and set the projection C in the hole D Position the wire as shown E Do not cross the wires ...

Page 275: ...T LEF paper can be used for tandem feed 1 Open the front cover 2 Completely pull out the tandem feed tray A to separate the right tandem tray B from the left tandem tray 3 Remove the right tandem inner cover C x 2 4 Re position the side fences D x 1 each A4 Outer slot position LT Inner slot position 5 Re install the right tandem inner cover ...

Page 276: ...lacement and Adjustment 6 Remove the tray cover E x 3 7 Remove the DC motor cover F x 5 8 Remove the rear side fence G x 4 and re position the rear cover H x 2 9 Re position the side fences I J x 4 A4 Outer slot position LT Inner slot position ...

Page 277: ...he return position sensor bracket L x 1 To use the paper tray for A4 size set the screw in the left hole as shown For LT size the screw should be placed on the right 13 Reinstall the rear bottom plate 14 Input the new paper size into SP5959 001 Paper Size Tray 1 15 Do the printer adjustments See Print Image Adjustment at the end of this section ...

Page 278: ...manually adjust the side registration by changing the tray cover position for that tray and then adjust the side registration of the image p 4 133 Copy Image Adjustments Printing Scanning 1 Pull out the tray and remove the right inner cover A x 2 2 Loosen the screws and adjust the position of the plate B Adjustment range 0 2 0 mm adjustment step 1 0 mm step 4 11 8 PICK UP FEED SEPARATION ROLLER RE...

Page 279: ...The operation of the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray Tray 1 and universal trays Tray 2 Tray 3 are similar These rollers are interchangeable Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement 4 11 9 FEED UNIT Remove Front door p 4 6 LCT entrance guide cover and right lower cover p 4 97 Relay Sensor ...

Page 280: ...pull it away from the machine Pull out all three trays do not remove 1 Nylon peg A 2 Toner collection bottle B 3 Vertical transport guide C 4 Inner cover D x 2 Reinstallation When re installing the vertical transport guide remove the lower right cover then insert from E 5 Guide plate F x 1 1st feed unit only ...

Page 281: ...ht and pull the feed unit forward To avoid hitting the unit on the sides of the machine remove it carefully and slowly 4 11 10PAPER FEED MOTORS D062 D063 have the paper feed motor in each feed unit However D065 D066 have the feed motors at the rear of the machine For D062 D063 1 Feed unit A p 4 92 Feed Unit Paper feed motor B ...

Page 282: ...crews and the connector bracket C When removing bracket C no connectors need to be disconnected 3 Remove two screws and the bracket D 4 Remove two screws and a spring and then remove the paper feed motor E x 1 For D065 D066 1 Right lower cover p 4 7 Right Covers 2 Feed unit p 4 92 ...

Page 283: ... D x 2 x 1 The positions of the two screws which fasten the paper feed motor are different for each motor Paper feed motor 1 Left upper and right lower Paper feed motor 2 and 3 Right upper and left lower 4 11 11SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT The position of the drive gear for the separation roller can be changed in order to change the amount of pressure exerted by the separation roller This...

Page 284: ... 92 1 Loosen the hex screw A 2 The separation roller gear B is positioned at the groove before shipping 3 Do one of the following To adjust for thick paper move the separation roller gear B to the left to decrease the pressure To correct misfeeds move the separation roller gear to the right to increase the pressure 4 11 12RELAY SENSOR ...

Page 285: ...lay sensor bracket B x 1 3 Relay sensor C x 1 4 11 13BY PASS PAPER SIZE DETECTION BOARD 1 Registration inner cover x 2 Not shown This cover is directly below the by pass tray 2 Connector A x 1 3 Ground wire B x 1 4 By pass tray C Disconnect the by pass tray from the pins on both sides ...

Page 286: ...on After installation execute SP1904 to calibrate the maximum and minimum paper sizes for the side fences SP1904 001 By pass Tray Paper Size Detection Minimum Size Move the side fences to the minimum size then execute this SP SP1904 002 By pass Tray Paper Size Detection Maximum Size Move the side fences to the maximum size then execute this SP ...

Page 287: ...ass cover A x 2 4 Feed roller B x 1 5 Pick up roller C x 1 6 Separation roller D x 1 Even though the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray Tray 1 universal trays Tray 2 Tray 3 by pass tray and ADF are similar the only rollers that are interchangeable are the tandem and universal trays Trays 1 2 3 Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement ...

Page 288: ...or the separation roller can be changed in order to change the amount of pressure exerted by the separation roller This adjustment can be done When feeding special paper especially thick paper When the customer experiences feed problems The separation roller gear is positioned at the groove before shipping 2 Move the separation roller gear right to increase the pressure to correct misfeeds ...

Page 289: ...5 D066 4 102 SM 4 11 16REGISTRATION SENSOR 1 Inner cover A x 4 Remove Development unit p 4 43 Removal Charge corona unit p 4 28 OPC drum unit p 4 30 OPC Drum Removal 2 Paper dust removal unit B x 1 x 1 3 Registration sensor C ...

Page 290: ...the toner bottle holder connector A and counter connector B 4 Pull out the duplex unit about 10 cm Confirm that the registration roller is separated from the positioning pin 5 Remove the right upper cover p 4 7 Right Covers 6 Rear upper cover p 4 8 Rear Covers 7 Disconnect the following connectors Relay clutch connector C Guide plate solenoid connector D Guide plate sensor connector E By pass tray...

Page 291: ...ove the screw to put more tension on the belt then tighten the screw at the new position 9 Remove the by pass unit D x 4 When removing and installing the by pass unit Make sure that the unit does not catch on any harnesses On re installation make sure that no harnesses are pinched between the unit and the machine frame You must re install the by pass unit with the duplex unit open ...

Page 292: ...SM 4 105 D062 D063 D065 D066 Replacement and Adjustment 4 12 PCBS AND HDD 4 12 1 CNT BOARD CONTROLLER BOARD 1 Rear upper cover and rear lower cover p 4 8 2 Controller box cover A x 13 3 Open the controller box B x 6 ...

Page 293: ...ctronic counting device that uses software to monitor the number of copies In addition to the electronic counter of the NVRAM on the CNT board the machine is also equipped with a mechanical counter NVRAM on the BCU 1 Make sure that you have the SMC report factory settings This report comes with the machine 2 Output the SMC data SP5 990 001 if possible 3 Turn the main switch off 4 Install an SD car...

Page 294: ... whenever you perform an NVRAM upload download make sure to print out the SP Data List before you perform SP5801 001 Memory Clear All Clear or SP5801 002 Memory Clear Engine NVRAM Upload Download Procedure 1 Print out the SP Data List from SP5990 002 2 Perform the NVRAM data upload to the SD card according to the procedure in the Service Manual 3 Perform the memory clear SP5801 001 or 002 4 Perfor...

Page 295: ...l displays Copy Screen turn the machine off and on 8 Do the process control self check 4 12 3 IPU 1 Controller box cover p 4 105 2 Open the controller box x 3 then remove the bracket A x 2 3 Remove all harnesses B 4 IPU C x 4 x 3 D 5 After removing screws and harnesses pull the IPU to the left 4 12 4 HDD 1 Controller box cover p 4 105 CNT Board Controller Board ...

Page 296: ...66 Replacement and Adjustment 2 HDD assembly A x 2 x 2 B 3 Remove the bracket A x 2 from the HDD assembly B 4 HDD B x 4 Reinstallation Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the HDD is replaced ...

Page 297: ...curity feature the DOS function must be set up again For more see Installation The browser unit must also be installed again 1 HDD B x 4 2 After reinstalling a HDD execute SP5832 001 HDD Format All to format the hard disk 3 Download the browser unit see Installation of Browser Unit Type E 4 12 5 CTL PSU 1 Controller box cover p 4 105 CNT Board Controller Board 2 CTL PSU A x 7 x 5 B 4 12 6 BCU 1 Re...

Page 298: ...HDD SM 4 111 D062 D063 D065 D066 Replacement and Adjustment 2 Open the controller box A x 3 3 Open the BCU bracket A x 4 all s all s 4 Do not forget to release the clamp B 5 Lift up the BCU bracket and remove it ...

Page 299: ...chine so that SC995 01 occurs 4 Enter the SP mode SP5 811 004 and then enter the BCU Serial Number 5 Exit the SP mode and then reboot the machine 4 12 7 CNB 1 Open the BCU bracket p 4 110 BCU It is not necessary to release all the clamps and harnesses 2 CNB A x 4 all harnesses 4 12 8 PFB 1 Open the controller box p 4 105 CNT Board Controller Board Rev 05 21 2010 ...

Page 300: ... 113 D062 D063 D065 D066 Replacement and Adjustment 2 PFB bracket A x 4 all s 4 12 9 DRB 1 Open the controller box p 4 105 CNT Board Controller Board 2 Move the stay A slightly to the right x 2 3 DRB bracket A x 3 all s ...

Page 301: ...065 D066 4 114 SM 4 12 10PSU 1 Open the controller box p 4 105 CNT Board Controller Board 2 Power cord bracket A x 2 3 PSU assembly B x 5 Reinstallation of PSU Make sure the white cable and black cables are connected correctly ...

Page 302: ...62 D063 D065 D066 Replacement and Adjustment 4 13 ADF 4 13 1 ADF COVERS 1 Feed cover A x 2 all s ground wire x 1 2 Front cover B x 2 Press down on the tabs to remove 3 Rear cover C x 2 Press down on the tabs to remove ...

Page 303: ...T 1 Open the feed cover A 2 Remove the snap fitting B 3 Push the feed unit slowly to the left to disengage the shaft C on the right then lift it out 4 13 3 FEED BELT AND PICK UP ROLLER 1 Remove the feed unit p 4 116 2 Remove the pick up roller unit A ...

Page 304: ...mbly make sure that the tab on the front guide plate is above the pick up roller 5 Hold the feed belt holder A by the left and right sides then carefully pull it off the bushing Do not let the springs B fall 6 Remove the feed belt C When re assembling set the pick up roller springs first then follow this procedure in reverse ...

Page 305: ... the feed cover 2 Remove the feed unit p 4 116 3 Separation roller cover A Use the tip of a screwdriver to push up the cover 4 Clip B x 1 5 Separation roller C 6 Torque limiter clutch D 4 13 5 REGISTRATION SENSOR 1 Open the feed cover 2 Remove the feed unit p 4 116 ...

Page 306: ...ADF SM 4 119 D062 D063 D065 D066 Replacement and Adjustment 3 Remove the screw indicated above by a red arrow 4 Guide plate A x 3 5 Registration sensor bracket B x 1 6 Registration sensor C x 1 ...

Page 307: ...D063 D065 D066 4 120 SM 4 13 6 ADF CONTROL BOARD 1 ADF rear cover p 4 115 2 ADF board A x 4 all s 4 13 7 ORIGINAL WIDTH INTERVAL SEPARATION AND SKEW CORRECTION SENSORS 1 Open the feed cover A 2 Guide plate B x 3 ...

Page 308: ... Replacement and Adjustment 3 Width sensor guide plate A x 2 4 Original width sensors B x 5 x 5 5 Separation sensor C x 1 6 Skew correction sensor D x 1 7 Interval sensor E x 1 4 13 8 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS 1 Open the original tray A ...

Page 309: ... x 4 3 Original length sensor 1 B5 C x 1 4 Original length sensor 2 A4 D x 1 5 Original length sensor 3 LG E x 1 4 13 9 DF POSITION AND APS SENSORS 1 Open the ADF 2 ADF rear cover p 4 115 3 Bracket A x 1 4 ADF position sensor B x 1 5 APS sensor C x 1 ...

Page 310: ...nd Adjustment 4 13 10OTHER ADF SENSORS 1 Open the feed cover 2 Open the front door 3 Rear covers x 4 p 4 8 4 Clips A x 1 5 Original tray B x 1 6 Bottom plate C x 1 7 Original set sensor D x 1 8 Feed cover sensor E x 1 9 Bottom plate HP sensor A x 1 ...

Page 311: ...late position sensor C x 1 4 13 11BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR 1 Open the feed cover 2 Rear cover p 4 8 3 Bottom plate lift motor bracket A harness x 1 x 1 x 3 timing belt x 1 4 Bottom plate lift motor B x 2 4 13 12FEED MOTOR 1 Rear cover p 4 8 2 Feed motor bracket A x 4 x 1 belt x 1 ...

Page 312: ... Adjustment 3 Feed motor x 2 B x 1 4 13 13EXIT MOTOR AND TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Open the feed cover 2 ADF rear cover p 4 115 3 Bottom plate lift motor p 4 124 4 Timing belt A 5 Exit transport motor unit B x 3 x 2 6 Transport motor C x 2 7 Exit motor D x 2 ...

Page 313: ...en the feed cover 2 ADF rear cover p 4 115 3 Pick up roller lift motor A x 2 x 1 4 Pick up roller HP sensor B x 1 4 13 15CIS UNIT Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing this procedure 1 Open the feed cover 2 Feed unit p 4 116 3 Guide plate p 4 118 ...

Page 314: ...ADF SM 4 127 D062 D063 D065 D066 Replacement and Adjustment 4 Guide plate mylar A x 1 5 CIS unit B x 2 x 3 Pull out the CIS unit carefully to avoid scratching the glass 4 13 16ADF EXIT SENSOR ...

Page 315: ...ply Board 2 Exit sensor bracket A x 1 3 Exit sensor B x 1 4 13 17ADF TRANSPORT BELT ASSEMBLY 1 Open the ADF 2 Raise the ADF A to the vertical position 3 Pull off the white cover B Velcro fasteners 4 Release the stopper pin C of the transport guide D ...

Page 316: ...k screw D Do not remove This releases the spring loaded tension on the belt 5 Grip the roller in the center E then squeeze the belt to bring the rollers together 6 While squeezing the belt and rollers together in the center tighten screws C and D This compresses the spring and releases tension on the belt Important To avoid stripping the threads of the screws do not apply excessive torque to these...

Page 317: ...t 12 Push the rear end of the shaft E over the top of the bracket 13 Pull the shaft F out of the belt 14 Pull the belt G toward the front to remove it 15 Slide the new belt over the assembly 16 Insert the shaft F into the new belt snap the shaft into its brackets and push in the shaft bearings 17 Make sure that studs on the underside of the belt H are aligned with the grooves in the Teflon rollers...

Page 318: ...on both ends of the shaft 3 Fit the special tool onto the front see FRONT in the above diagram 4 Slowly loosen the front lock screw C until you see the tip of the shaft aligned with the hole then tighten the screw To avoid stripping the threads of the screws do not apply excessive torque 5 Remove the special tool and fit it onto the rear see REAR in the above diagram If the Teflon sleeve has been ...

Page 319: ...tip of the shaft aligned with the hole then tighten the screw 7 Re install the Teflon sleeve 8 Re install the front and rear plastic cover 9 Reinstall the transport belt assembly in the ADF Reattaching the White Cover 1 With its white side down set the cover A on the exposure glass 2 Make sure the upper left corner is aligned with the arrow at the corner of the exposure glass 3 Close the ADF B on ...

Page 320: ...STMENTS PRINTING Preparation 1 Make sure paper is installed correctly in each paper tray before you start these adjustments 2 Use the Trimming Area Pattern SP2 902 3 No 18 to print the test pattern for the following procedures 3 After completing these printing adjustments be sure to set SP 2 902 3 to 0 again Registration Leading Edge Side to Side 1 Check the leading edge registration and adjust it...

Page 321: ...y 3 Universal Tray SP1002 003 0 1 5 Tray 4 SP1002 004 Japan Only LCT SP1002 006 0 1 5 Duplex Tray SP1002 007 0 1 5 Blank Margin If the leading edge side to side registration cannot be adjusted within specifications adjust the leading left side edge blank margin 1 Check the trailing edge and right edge blank margins and adjust them with the following SP modes ...

Page 322: ...tment Letter What It Means A Trailing edge blank margin B Right edge blank margin C Leading edge blank margin D Left edge blank margin SP2101 Print Erase Margin SP mode Specification Leading Edge SP2101 001 Trailing Edge SP2101 002 2 5 2 mm Left edge SP2101 003 Right edge SP2101 004 2 1 5 mm ...

Page 323: ...mode 2 Open SP1003 To prevent wrinkling creasing or jams set a smaller value To prevent jams at the registration roller or to eliminate skew set a larger value SP1003 001 Registration Buckle Adjustment Tray LCT SP1003 002 Registration Buckle Adjustment Duplex Tray SP1003 003 Registration Buckle Adjustment Bypass Tray Adjustment range 9 mm 9 mm small large buckle Initial value 0 mm Buckle 10 mm 4 1...

Page 324: ...4011 Scanner Side to Side Registration 0 A positive value shifts the image toward the right edge a negative value shifts it toward the left edge Magnification Use an S 5 S test chart to perform the following adjustment Main Scan Magnification 1 Place the test chart on the exposure glass and make a copy from one of the feed stations 2 Check magnification and then SP2909 001 Main Scan Magnification ...

Page 325: ...nt side scan with SP6006 003 4 Make a test copy to check that the problem has been solved DIP Switch Settings ADF Main Board SW 101 Operation Mode 1 2 3 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF I F Operation ON OFF OFF OFF Free run Simplex each sheet stopped for registration OFF ON OFF OFF Free run Simplex continuous scanning ON ON OFF OFF Free run Duplex no registration SP6009 ADF Free Run ON OFF ON OFF Not used OFF ON...

Page 326: ...ation Adjustment 001 ADF Horizontal Registration Front Adjusts the side to side registration for the front in ADF mode 3 to 3 0 1 mm 002 ADF Horizontal Registration Back Adjusts the side to side registration for the back in ADF mode 3 to 3 0 1 mm 003 ADF Vertical Registration Front Adjusts the vertical registration for the front in ADF mode 30 to 24 1 mm 30 5 1 mm 24 4 1 mm 004 ADF Vertical Regist...

Page 327: ...e settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the front 20 to 20 1 mm 20 10 mm 20 10 mm 008 ADF Trailing Edge Erase Margin Back These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the back 20 to 20 1 mm 20 10 mm 20 10 mm Normally the interval sensor detects the leading edge of small originals B6 A5 HLT or originals for duplex copying and delays the start of the scanni...

Page 328: ...ile doing this procedure 1 Press press and then press 5 times to open the Self Diagnostics menu 2 On the touch screen press Touch Screen Adjust or press 3 Use a pointed not sharp tool to press the upper left mark 4 Press the lower right mark after it appears 5 Touch a few spots on the touch screen to confirm that the marker appears exactly where the screen is touched If the mark does not appear wh...

Page 329: ......

Page 330: ...TENANCE REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 5 07 15 2009 Updated Information SP5801 15 16 02 08 2012 Added Disconnect Network Caution 20 21 07 15 2009 Updated Information Uploading Downloading NVRAM Data ...

Page 331: ......

Page 332: ...ys done with the permission of the Administrator 1 If you cannot go into the SP mode ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF After he or she logs in User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Service Mode Lock OFF This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes The CE can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off ...

Page 333: ... the SP code enter the seven numbers and press Execute However if you do not know all the numbers enter only the first four numbers of the seven digit SP and press Enter The display goes immediately to the first SP of that group Then you can use the buttons to browse to the desired selection Button Selection Entry 1 Refer to the SP Mode Tables at the end of this section to find the SP that you wan...

Page 334: ...anel buttons 1 Open All Opens all SP groups and sublevels 2 Close All Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display 3 Copy Window Opens the copy window copy mode so you can make test copies To return to the SP mode screen press SP Mode highlighted in the copy window 4 SP Direct Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number then press SP D...

Page 335: ...on The SMC Report gives a list of the SP commands and their settings SP Print Mode SMC Print 5990 In the SP mode push Copy Window to move to the copy screen select the paper size then push Start Select A4 LT Sideways or larger to make sure that all the information is printed Push SP Window to go back to the SP mode select the necessary SP Print Mode and push Execute 001 All Data List 002 SP Mode D...

Page 336: ...ng Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their default settings except the following SP5811 001 Machine serial number SP5907 Plug Play Brand Name and Production Name Setting 1 Execute SP5990 to print out all SMC Data Lists 2 Open SP mode 5801 3 Press the number for the item that you want to initialize The number you select determines which application is initialized For e...

Page 337: ...s the Job login ID Netfiles Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 011 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface settings IP addresses also the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings WebStatusMonitor settings and the TELNET settings NCS Network Control Service 012 R FAX Initializes the job login ID SmartNetMonitor for Admin job history and local s...

Page 338: ...list 6 Check the copy quality and the paper path and do any necessary adjustments 5 2 2 SOFTWARE AND SETTING RESET Software Reset The software can be rebooted when the machine hangs up Do one of these two steps Turn the main power switch off and on or Push and hold down together for over 10 seconds When the machine beeps once release both buttons After Now loading Please wait is displayed for a fe...

Page 339: ...displayed then press Yes Resetting Scanner Features Only The scanner settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this procedure 1 Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode 2 Push the User Tools key 3 Hold down the key and touch Scanner Features key 4 A message will be displayed then press Yes ...

Page 340: ...and press See the table below 3 When you are prompted to confirm your selection press Yes to select the test pattern for printing 4 Press Copy Window to open the copy window then select the settings for the test print paper size etc 5 Press Start twice ignore the Place Original messages to start the test print 6 After checking the test pattern press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode dis...

Page 341: ...2 dot 12 Vertical Line 2 dot 13 Horizontal Line 1 dot 14 Vertical Line 1 dot 15 Cross Stitch Horizontal 16 Cross Stitch Vertical 17 Argyle Pattern 18 Trimming Area 19 Full Dot Pattern 20 Black Band Vertical 21 Black Band Horizontal 22 Stair 23 Blank Image 24 Grid Pattern 1 dot 0ch with external data 25 Trimming Area with external data 26 Argyle Pattern with external data 27 Outside Data ...

Page 342: ...ers To help trace the causes of poor images For example if the IPU test patterns are normal when the machine is producing poor quality images then the problem must be after the IPU 1 Enter the SP mode select SP2902 2 Select 001 to print a test pattern for the front side or select 002 to print a test pattern for the back side 3 Scroll then select the number of the test pattern that you want to prin...

Page 343: ... 16 level 10 Grayscale Vertical Horizontal 16 level 11 Cross Pattern 12 Argyle Pattern 13 Density Patch 256 level 14 Density Patch 64 level 15 Trimming Area 16 Bandwidth Vertical 17 Bandwidth Horizontal 18 Auto Create Vertical 1 dot Line Main Scan 19 Auto Create Horizontal 1 dot Line Sub Scan 20 Auto Create Vertical 2 dot Line Main Scan 21 Auto Create Horizontal 2 dot Line Sub Scan 22 Auto Create ...

Page 344: ...tern is generated in the application input processing circuit in the IPU The operation path is as follows Application input Memory Printer This test pattern is primarily used for design purposes but it can also be used to trace the source of problems beyond the IPU in the application input which are causing poor print quality 1 Enter the SP mode and select SP2902 004 2 Enter the number for the tes...

Page 345: ...o select the test pattern for printing 2 Press Copy Window to open the copy window then select the settings for the test print paper size etc 3 Press Start twice ignore the Place Original messages to start the test print 4 Press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode display 5 Switch the machine off and on ...

Page 346: ...erver software NFA Net File software Printer application software Scanner application software DESS encryption module software Never connect or remove an IC card or SD card with the machine power turned on Never turn the power off while the machine is downloading data from an IC card or SD card The IC cards and SD card are precision items Use them carefully Never store IC cards or SD cards in a lo...

Page 347: ...of the operation panel The number in parentheses tells you which key to push When you make a selection the Verify and Update buttons come on the screen If you push Exit or the 0 key you go back to the usual operation screen Push the Start key on the operation panel to select and download all the options shown on the screen Push the Clear key on the operation panel if you want to cancel your select...

Page 348: ...nges from red to green to show that the update of the operation panel firmware continues When the update is completed you will see this screen After the firmware update you will see Update Done in the first bar The name of the module in the bottom bar is the name of the last module that was updated only the name of the last module is shown if several modules were been updated 8 Turn the power off ...

Page 349: ...eaning Solution 20 Cannot map logical address Make sure the SD card is installed correctly or use a different SD card 21 Cannot access memory HDD connection not correct or replace hard disk 22 Cannot decompress compressed data The ROM data on the SD card is not correct or data is damaged 23 Error occurred when ROM update program started Controller program defective If the second attempt fails repl...

Page 350: ...he data on the SD card is for a different machine Get the correct data then install again 40 Engine module download failed Replace the data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the BCU board 42 Operation panel module download failed Replace the data for the module on the SD card and try again or replace the LCDC 43 Stamp data module download failed Replace the data for the module...

Page 351: ...n to complete the procedure 5 4 2 UPLOADING DOWNLOADING NVRAM DATA The content of the NVRAM can be uploaded to and downloaded from an SD card IMPORTANT NOTE The following data stored in the NVRAM will not be saved on the SD Card when performing an NVRAM Data Upload SP5824 Total count categories SP7 003 Copy Counter C O P O Counter SP7 006 C O P O Count Display Dupelx A3 DLT Over 420 mm Stapler and...

Page 352: ...ard This is necessary because NVRAM data from more than one machine can be uploaded to the same SD card Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM Do this procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged or if the connection between the controller and BCU is defective the NVRAM data download will not complete correctly If the download doe...

Page 353: ...Service Program Mode Tables D062 D063 D065 D066 5 22 SM 5 5 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES 5 5 1 SP TABLES See Appendices for the following information System SP Tables Printer SP Tables Scanner SP Tables ...

Page 354: ...Input Output Check SM 5 23 D062 D063 D065 D066 System Maintenance 5 6 INPUT OUTPUT CHECK See Appendices for the following information Input Output Check ...

Page 355: ...tion is saved directly to the HDD for later retrieval Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card When a user is experiencing problems with the machine follow the procedures below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD Then attempt to duplicate the problem so the error data will be stored 5 7 1 SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG The debug information c...

Page 356: ...ff ON 7 Push Esc SP5857 001 On Off Do the next procedure to select the target To Select the Target for the Debug Log File You can select either the HDD default or the SD card as the target This procedure shows you how to select the SD card 1 Push SP587 002 Target 2 Push Enter Target 2 HDD 3 Push Target ...

Page 357: ...rd in the debug log file To Select Events 1 Push SP5858 DebugSaveWhen 2 Push Enter SP5858 001 EngineSC Error Here is a list of the events that you can select Any number of events can be selected SP No Name What It Does SP5858 001 EngineSC Error Saves error data when an engine related SC code occurs SP5858 002 SystemSC Error Saves error data when a controller related SC Code occurs ...

Page 358: ...you specify by manually entering the SC code number SP5858 004 Jam Saves error data for jams Example 1 To Select Items 001 002 or 004 1 Push or to select 001 002 or 003 This example shows the selection of 001 SP5858 001 EngineSC Error 2 Push Enter EngineSC Error OFF 3 Push EngineSC Error ON 4 Push Enter EngineSC Error ON 5 Push Esc SP5858 001 EngineSC Error ...

Page 359: ...for SC672 For details about SC code numbers please refer to the SC tables in Section 4 Troubleshooting 1 Select SP5858 003 SP5858 003 Any SC Code 2 Push Enter 0000000 _ 3 Push Enter to toggle the on the number display in the 2nd line 0000000 0 4 Push or to display 2 0000000 2 5 Push Enter to enter the 2 in the line above 0000002 _ 6 Push or to move the cursor to the next digit ...

Page 360: ...2 _ 8 Repeat Steps 2 to 6 to enter the 6 0000672 _ 9 Push Esc twice SP5858 DebugSaveWhen 10 Do the next procedure to select one or more memory modules for the debug error data recording To select one or more memory modules for recording in the debug log file 1 Select SP5859 SP5859 LogSaveKey No 2 Push Enter SP5859 Key 1 ...

Page 361: ...in the line above Enter Enters the number entry mode displays a 0 at the cursor or Selects the number to enter at the digit position in the line above Enter Enters the selected number in the line above and exits the entry mode you can select the next position with or 5 Refer to the table below for the 4 digit numbers to enter for each key The acronyms in parentheses indicate the names of the modul...

Page 362: ...WebSys 10 2224 BCU 2000 NCS Key to Acronyms Acronym Meaning ECS Engine Control Service GPS GW Print Service GSP PM GW Print Service Print Module IMH Image Memory Handler MCS Memory Control Service NCS Network Control Service NFA Net File Application PDL Printer Design Language PTS Print Server SCS System Control Service SRM System Resource Management WebDB Web Document Box Document Server ...

Page 363: ...D card 3 Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email or just send the SD card by mail 5 7 3 MORE ABOUT DEBUG LOG SP5857 015 SD to SD Any This SP copies the log on an SD card the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory to a log specified by key number The copy operation is executed in the log directory of the...

Page 364: ...creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card However this is not a completely empty file The created file will hold the number 2225 as the SCS key number and other non volatile information Even if this SP is not executed a file is created on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card but this operation takes time This creates the possibility that the machine may be switched off an...

Page 365: ...L UNIT BCU Base Board DIP SW101 No Function Default Comments 1 DFU 2 DFU OFF 3 DFU OFF 4 DFU OFF 5 DFU OFF 6 Region Selection Japan 6 7 8 OFF OFF OFF 7 Region Selection NA 115V 6 7 8 ON OFF OFF 8 Region Selection EU 220 240V 6 7 8 OFF ON OFF DFU Design Factory Use only Do not change these settings ...

Page 366: ...TROUBLESHOOTING REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 6 11 17 2011 Recovery methods ...

Page 367: ......

Page 368: ...Service Call Conditions SM 6 1 D062 D063 D065 D066 Trouble shooting 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS For Service Call Conditions information see Appendices ...

Page 369: ...ome SC codes logged SPs are shown only in the SMC Report and do not show on the operation panel display SP7801 ROM Version Display Displays the version number of the main machine and connected peripherals SP7832 Self Diagnostic Result Display Execute this SP to display a list of error codes No errors have occurred if nothing is displayed SP7801 Firmware Version Displays the current numbers of all ...

Page 370: ...quent jams do the procedures described below Symptom 1 Jams when paper is fed from a by pass tray that is not used frequently If the customer does not use the by pass tray frequently the rollers can become worn 1 Visually check the by pass tray pick up feed and separation rollers 2 If these rollers are paler than the rollers in paper trays that are more frequently used replace the rollers in the b...

Page 371: ...ymptom 3 Other If none of the two symptoms 1 or 2 applies do this procedure 1 Use SP7504 to check the jam counts and find which SPs have high counts 2 From the table and illustration below find which gears must be replaced Example For tray 1 if SP7504 012 is high replace gear A or if SP7504 008 is high replace gear B Tray SP7504 12 SP7504 8 SP7504 9 SP7504 10 SP7504 11 Tray 1 Gear A Gear B Tray 2 ...

Page 372: ...sition 5 When you replace Gear A or Gear B be sure to put the metal face on the outer side and the arrow must be in view 6 If a replacement gear is not available do this as a temporary procedure Remove the paper feed unit Remove the gear Clean the gear shaft and inside the gear Attach the gear Install the paper feed unit ...

Page 373: ...oading program If the GW controller software cannot be downloaded software on other SD cards cannot be downloaded as well If such problems occur it may be possible to restart the program without replacing the controller board by setting controller DIP SW 1 to ON and then re starting 6 4 1 RECOVERY METHODS When an error occurs during downloading an error code is displayed on the operation panel If ...

Page 374: ...e write operation does not exist Turn the machine off on Install the missing ROM DIMM Controller ROM update error 4 04 Download Error E04 Power off on GZIP data confirmation fails CRC value check Turn the machine off on Set DIP SW 1 to ON and retry Replace RAM DIMM Replace controller board Controller ROM update error 5 05 Download Error E05 Power off on Error occurs when writing to the device Turn...

Page 375: ...chine off on and re try Replace controller board System error 2 SC991 21 Download Error E21 Power Off On There is not sufficient memory to download Turn the machine off on and re try Replace RAM Replace the controller board System error 3 SC991 Download Error E22 Module ID Card No xx xx Data fails to decompress Card defective Turn the machine off on and re try Replace card Replace controller board...

Page 376: ...econd or later card is not compatible Set the correct cards in the correct order Download dysfunction 3 32 Reboot After Card Insert E32 Module ID Card No xx xx Download interrupted because card is not correct or power failure interrupted download Use the correct card If power failure caused the failure remove the card and insert another Download dysfunction 4 33 No Valid Data E33 Card version erro...

Page 377: ...x xx Engine download failure Turn the machine off on and re try Download result failure 2 41 Download Error E41 Module ID Card No xx xx Fax download failure Turn the machine off on and re try Download result failure 3 42 Download Error E42 Module ID Card No xx xx Operation panel or language download failed For this error sometimes the message may not be displayed Turn the machine off on and re try...

Page 378: ...M update failure 1 51 no display The source data for the ROM update is corrupted because the machine is operating and an SC code has been issued Turn the machine power off on and try again Remote ROM update failure 2 52 no display The source data received for the ROM update is corrupted it failed a SUM check due to its abnormal length Try again with the correct data Download result failure 6 53 no...

Page 379: ...cal transport sensor does not switch ON at the correct time 3 Vertical transport sensor ON Paper feed sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time 4 Vertical transport sensor ON Vertical transport sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time 5 Lower relay motor ON Relay sensor does not switch ON at the correct time 6 Vertical transport sensor OFF Relay sensor does not switch OFF at the correct...

Page 380: ...t unit entrance sensor does not switch ON at the correct time 11 Exit unit entrance sensor ON Paper exit sensor does not switch ON at the correct time 12 Registration motor OFF Paper exit sensor does not switch OFF at the correct time 6 5 2 TRANSPORT INVERTER FEED OUT FACE DOWN 1 From the registration sensor to the fusing unit exit jam detection is the same as face up feed out 2 Exit unit entrance...

Page 381: ...ime Paper remains at the duplex unit exit 6 5 3 DUPLEX TRANSPORT 1 Duplex entrance sensor ON Inverter exit sensor does not switch ON at the correct time 2 Inverter exit sensor ON Duplex transport sensor 1 does not switch on at the correct time 3 Duplex transport sensor 1 ON Duplex transport sensor 2 does not switch on at the correct time 4 Duplex entrance sensor ON Duplex transport sensor 2 does n...

Page 382: ...D063 D065 D066 Trouble shooting the correct time 6 Duplex transport sensor 2 OFF Duplex transport sensor 3 does not switch OFF at the correct time 7 Duplex transport sensor 3 ON Relay sensor does not switch on at the correct time ...

Page 383: ...50V Door Open is displayed FU106 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V ADF does not operate FU107 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V SC121 is displayed FU108 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V Finisher does not work FU109 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V Door Open is displayed FU110 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V SC510 is displayed FU111 6 3A 125V 6 3A 250V Nothing is displayed on LCD 6 6 2 COMMON PROBLEMS Problem Check Inspect Clean Replace Dirty Copies Fusing Unit P...

Page 384: ...et Fusing Unit Hot roller Poor separation Transfer Belt Unit Transfer belt transfer belt cleaning blade SC300 SC306 Around the Drum Charge corona wire charge corona grid charge corona wire cleaner Skew Original ADF Pick up paper feed separation rollers Toner on transfer belt Transfer Belt Unit Transfer belt transfer belt cleaning blade Wrinkling Fusing Unit Pressure roller ...

Page 385: ......

Page 386: ...ENERGY SAVING REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 387: ......

Page 388: ...are at the default settings If the timers are changed then the energy saved will be different For example if the timers are all set to 240 min the grey area will disappear and no energy is saved before 240 min expires Timer Settings The user can set these timers with User Tools System settings Timer setting Panel off timer 10 sec 240 min Panel Off Mode Default setting 10 sec Energy saver timer 1 2...

Page 389: ...Recovery time D062 D063 Max 30 sec D065 Max 60 sec D066 Max 300 sec Recommendation We recommend that the default settings should be kept If the customer requests that these settings should be changed please explain that their energy costs could increase and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use If it is necessary to change the settings please try to make sure...

Page 390: ...d in a controlled environment with a constant power supply To get an exact measurement at the customers site a watt meter must be used to measure the actual energy consumed To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed At the start of the measurement period read the values of SP8941 001 to 005 At the end of the measurement period read the values of SP8941 001 to 005 again Find the amount of time ...

Page 391: ...003 Energy Save Time 71386 0 75111 0 3725 0 797150 0 Low power mode 153 0 004 Low power Time 154084 0 156340 0 2256 0 345168 0 Off Sleep mode 7 0 005 Off mode Time 508776 0 520377 0 11601 0 81207 0 Total Time of Data d min 19762 0 Total Time of Data d 60min Hour 329 37 Total Power Consumption of Data e Wmin 1947781 60 Total Power Consumption of Data e 60min 1000W KWH 32 46 ...

Page 392: ...ing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used This means that less energy overall is used for paper production which improves the environment 1 Duplex Reduce paper volume in half 2 Combine mode Reduce paper volume in half 3 Duplex Combine Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3 4 ...

Page 393: ...s are used D062 Total counter SP 8581 001 Duplex counter SP 8411 001 Single sided with combine mode SP 8421 004 Duplex with combine mode SP 8421 005 The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of single sided and duplex jobs Duplex mode Originals Simplex Sheet used Duplex Sheets used Paper Saved Total counter SP8501 001 Duplex counter SP8411 001 1...

Page 394: ...unter SP8421 004 1 1 1 0 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 2 1 2 2 4 4 2 2 2 2 5 5 3 2 3 2 10 10 5 5 5 5 20 20 10 10 10 10 Duplex 2 in 1 mode Originals Simplex Sheet used Duplex Sheets used Paper Saved Total counter SP8501 001 Duplex counter SP8421 005 1 1 1 0 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 3 3 1 2 2 2 4 4 1 3 2 2 5 5 2 3 3 3 6 6 2 4 3 3 7 7 2 5 4 4 8 8 2 6 4 4 9 9 3 6 5 5 10 10 3 7 5 5 ...

Page 395: ...Paper Save D062 D063 D065 D066 7 8 SM Originals Simplex Sheet used Duplex Sheets used Paper Saved Total counter SP8501 001 Duplex counter SP8421 005 11 11 3 8 6 6 12 12 3 9 6 6 ...

Page 396: ...D062 D063 D065 D066 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 397: ......

Page 398: ...9 Upper Tray 1 9 Shift Tray 1 9 Stapler 1 9 1 2 4 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 1075 B531 1 10 1 2 5 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT TYPE 1075 B513 1 12 1 2 6 LG SIZE TRAY TYPE 1075 B474 1 13 1 2 7 FINISHER SR4030 3K FINISHER D374 1 13 Finisher 1 13 Stapler 1 14 1 2 8 FINISHER SR4040 2K BOOKLET FINISHER D373 1 15 Finisher 1 15 Stapler 1 16 D373 D374 Paper Specifications 1 18 1 2 9 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 3260 B702 1 19 1 2 10 9 BIN...

Page 399: ...B702 for Finisher SR4030 D374 SR4040 D373 2 9 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 2 10 Related SP Codes 2 10 3 APPENDIX SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 3 1 3 1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 3 1 3 1 1 SERVICE MODE LOCK UNLOCK 3 1 3 1 2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 3 1 3 1 3 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS 3 2 SC100 Scanning System 3 2 SC200 Exposure 3 8 SC300 Image Development System 1 3 11 SC400 Image Development 2 3 19 SC500 Feed ...

Page 400: ...SP2xxx Drum 4 12 SP3xxx Processing 4 38 SP4xxx Scanner 4 42 SP5xxx Mode 4 77 SP6xxx Peripherals 4 149 SP7xxx Data Logs 4 174 System SP8 nnn Data Log2 4 193 4 1 3 PRINTER SP TABLES 4 233 4 1 4 SCANNER SP TABLES 4 239 4 2 INPUT OUTPUT CHECK 4 241 4 2 1 COPIER INPUT CHECK SP5803 4 241 4 2 2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK SP5804 4 251 SP5804 Output Check Table 4 252 4 2 3 ADF INPUT CHECK SP6007 4 255 4 2 4 ADF O...

Page 401: ......

Page 402: ...APPENDIX GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX 1 SPECIFICATIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 403: ......

Page 404: ... Paper tray Duplex A3 11 x 17 A5 5 5 x 8 5 Bypass tray A3 11 x 17 A6 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 Copy Paper Size Non standard sizes Width 139 7 297 mm 5 5 x 11 7 Length 139 7 432 mm 5 5 x 17 Paper Tray 52 3 to 127 9 g m2 14 to 34 lb Duplex 64 to 127 9 g m2 17 to 34 lb Copy Paper Weight By pass Standard 52 3 to 157 g m2 14 to 43 lb Thick Paper mode 52 3 to 216 g m2 14 to 58 lb Reproduction Ratios 7 reduction rat...

Page 405: ...t 23o C 73 4o F Warm up Time Less than 30 sec at return from power off mode Continuous Copying 1 to 999 Operation panel entry Tray 1 tandem tray 3100 sheets 1550 x2 Tray 2 550 sheets Tray 3 550 sheets Paper Capacity Bypass tray 100 sheets 80 g m2 20 lb A4 8 5 x 11 and smaller 500 sheets Paper Output B4 and larger 250 sheets North America D062 D063 D065 120V 60Hz 20A D066 208 240 60Hz 12A Europe As...

Page 406: ...n 10 Dimensions W x D x H 690 x 790 x 1165 mm 27 2 x 31 1 x 45 9 in Weight Approx 217 kg 478 4 lb Resolution 1200 dpi printing 600 dpi scanning Gradation 256 levels scanning and printing Toner Replenishment Cartridge exchange 1100 g Total Counter Electric Counter ADF Original Size Simplex A3 11 x 17 B6 5 5 x 8 5 Duplex A3 11 x 17 B5 5 5 x 8 5 Original Weight Simplex 40 to 128 g m2 11 to 34 lb Dupl...

Page 407: ...2 0 x 7 1 Weight 18 kg 39 6 lb Power Consumption NA 120V Model Mainframe Only Full System Warm up D062 D063 Approx 1 41 kW D065 Approx 1 40 kW D066 Approx 1 71 kW D062 D063 Approx 1 43 kW D065 Approx 1 42 kW D066 Approx 1 73 kW Stand by D062 D063 Approx 294 kW D065 Approx 278 kW D066 Approx 310 kW D062 D063 Approx 317 kW D065 Approx 301 kW D066 Approx 333 kW Printing D062 D063 Approx 1 55 kW D065 ...

Page 408: ...pprox 1 75 kW D062 D063 Approx 1 69 kW D065 Approx 1 77 kW D066 Approx 1 85 kW Maximum D062 D063 Approx 1 90 kW D065 Approx 1 95 kW D066 Approx 1 90 kW D062 D063 Approx 1 90 kW D065 Approx 1 95 kW D066 Approx 1 90 kW Noise Emission Noise Emission Sound Power Level NA D062 D063 D065 D066 Mainframe Only Standby Less than 48 3 dB A Less than 48 4 dB A Less than 50 8 dB A Less than 51 2 dB A Printing ...

Page 409: ... A Less than 48 4 dB A Less than 40 1 dB A Printing Less than 60 7 dB A Less than 60 2 dB A Less than 61 0 dB A Less than 61 6 dB A Noise Emission Sound Power Level EU D062 D063 D065 D066 Mainframe Only Standby Less than 48 3 dB A Less than 48 8 dB A Less than 50 8 dB A Less than 51 2 dB A Printing Less than 69 7 dB A Less than 70 0 dB A Less than 71 5 dB A Less than 72 2 dB A Complete System Stan...

Page 410: ...than 38 0 dB A Printing Less than 54 5 dB A Less than 57 6 dB A Less than 58 5 dB A Less than 58 7 dB A Complete System Standby Less than 37 2 dB A Less than 37 3 dB A Less than 48 4 dB A Less than 40 1 dB A Printing Less than 60 7 dB A Less than 60 2 dB A Less than 61 0 dB A Less than 61 6 dB A The above measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 Full system measurements include the Mainf...

Page 411: ... g m2 20lb 1 2 2 RT43 A4 LCT B473 Paper capacity 4 000 sheets Paper Sizes A4 LEF B5 LEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 1 Paper Weight 52 to 128 g m2 14 to 34 lb Pick up and Feed FRR Feed and Reverse Roller Power Consumption Less than 50 W Max Power Supply DC24 V 5V powered by the main unit Rated Voltage of Output Connector Max DC 24 V Dimensions W x D x H 314 x 458 x 659 mm 12 4 x 18 1 x 25 9 Weight 20 0 kg 44 lb 1...

Page 412: ...vided Shift Tray 3000 sheets A4 LEF B5 LEF 8 5 x 11 LEF 1500 sheets A3 A4 SEF B4 and B5 SEF 11 x 17 8 5 x 14 8 5 x 11 SEF 12 x 18 500 sheets A5 LEF 5 5 x 8 5 LEF Paper Capacity 80 g m2 100 sheets A5 SEF 5 5 x 8 5 SEF Paper Size A3 to A5 11 x 17 to 5 5 x 8 5 12 x 18 including tab paper Paper Weight 52 to 216 g m2 14 to 58 lb Shift Tray Full Detection Provided Stapler Stapling Stack Size A4 B5 8 5 x...

Page 413: ...pled Stack Size 2 to 9 150 A3 B4 11 x 17 8 5 x 14 Trim Waste Staple Capacity 30 000 or more Waste Staple Hopper Full Detection Provided Power Consumption Less than 100 W Power Source DC 24 V From Mainframe Size W x D x H 800 x 730 x 980 mm 31 5 x 28 7 x 38 6 Weight Less than 65 kg 143 lb 1 2 4 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 1075 B531 The Punch Unit B531 is installed in the Finisher SR4050 D460 Punch Hole Positio...

Page 414: ...b 4 Hole EUR A 52 g m2 to 128 g m2 14 to 34 lb Punch Waste Hopper Capacity 2 Hole NA 10K 3 Hole NA 15K 4 Hole EUR A 15K Operation Modes All Shift Proof Staple DIP SW Settings The correct DIP SW settings of the Punch Unit 531 are provided in the table below for your reference only The DIP switches of these punch units do not need to be changed at installation or adjusted for operation DIP SW Settin...

Page 415: ...installed above the shift tray of the Finisher SR4050 D460 Paper Size A3 SEF B4 SEF 11 x 17 SEF A4 LEF B5 LEF 8 5 x 11 LEF Paper Weight 52 g m2 to 216 g m2 14 to 58 lb Weight Less than 1 7 kg 3 7 lb Dimensions W x D x H 125 mm x 450 mm x 100 mm 5 x 17 7 x 4 Power Supply DC 24 V DC 5V From Finisher Power Consumption 24 W ...

Page 416: ...tapling only Finisher Dimensions W x D x H 657 x 613 x 960 mm Weight Less than 54 kg Less than 56 kg with Punch Unit Power Consumption Less than 96 W Noise Less than 75 db Configuration Console type attached base unit Power Source From base unit 250 sheets A4 8 5 x11 or smaller Stack Capacity 50 sheets B4 8 5 x14 or larger Paper Size A5 A3 SEF A6 SEF A6 SEF 5 5 x8 5 11 x17 SEF 12 x18 SEF Proof Tra...

Page 417: ...Paper Weight 52 g m 256 g m 14 lb Bond 68 lb Bond 140 lb Index 90 lb Cover Stapler Paper Size B5 A3 8 5 x11 11 x17 12 x18 Paper Weight 64 g m 90 g m 17 lb Bond 28 lb Bond Staple Position Top Bottom 2 Staple Top slant 50 sheets A4 1 2 x11 or smaller Same Paper Size 30 sheets B4 1 2 x14 or larger Stapling Capacity Mixed Paper Size 30 sheets A4 LEF A3 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 81 2 x11 LEF 11 x17 SEF Staple ...

Page 418: ...INISHER SR4040 2K BOOKLET FINISHER D373 This finisher provides booklet as well as corner stapling Equipped with two trays the upper tray holds stapled and shifted copies and the lower tray holds booklet stapled and folded copies Finisher Dimensions W x D x H 657 x 613 x 960 mm 25 9 x 24 1 x 37 8 Weight Less than 63 kg 138 6 lb no punch unit Less than 65 kg 143 lb with punch unit Power Consumption ...

Page 419: ...tack Capacity 100 sheets A5 SEF B6 SEF A6 SEF 51 2 x81 2 SEF Paper Size A5 A3 SEF A6 SEF B6 SEF 51 2 x81 2 to 11 x 17 SEF 12 x 18 SEF Shift Tray Paper Weight 52 g m 256 g m 14 lb Bond 68 lb Bond 140 lb Index 90 lb Cover Stapler Paper Size B5 A3 8 5 x11 11 x17 12 x18 Paper Weight 64 g m 90 g m 17 lb Bond 28 lb Bond Staple Position Top Bottom 2 Staple Top slant 50 sheets A4 81 2 x 11 or smaller Same...

Page 420: ...artridge Staple Replenishment Booklet staple 2 000 staples per cartridge A4 LEF 8 5 x11 LEF 13 50 pages 2 12 pages A4 SEF B5 8 5 x11 SEF 10 50 pages 2 9 pages Same Size Others 10 30 pages 2 9 pages Corner Staple Capacity Mixed Size A4 LEF A3 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 8 5 x11 LEF 11 x17 SEF 2 30 pages Booklet Staple Capacity A4 SEF A3 SEF B5 SEF B4 SEF 8 5 x11 SEF 8 5 x14 SEF 11 x17 SEF 12 x18 SEF 2 5 page...

Page 421: ...ecifications Plain Paper Paper Type Paper Size Copier PPC Used Paper Recycled Paper Colored Paper Translucent Blueprint A3 SEF B4 SEF A4 SEF A4 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF B6 SEF B6 LEF 12 x 18 SEF 11 x 17 SEF 81 2 x 14 81 2 x 11 SEF 81 2 x 11 LEF 51 2 x 81 2 51 2 x 81 2 ...

Page 422: ... EU 2 4 holes switchable Available Punch Units Scandinavia 4 holes NA 2 hole Up to 5 000 sheets NA 3 hole Up to 5 000 sheets EU 2 hole Up to 14 000 sheets EU 4 hole Up to 7 000 sheets Punch Waste Replenishment Scandinavia 4 hole Up to 7 000 sheets Paper Weight 52 g m 163 g m 14 lb Bond to 43 lb Bond 90 lb Index 60 lb Cover SEF A5 to A3 51 2 x81 2 to 11 x17 NA 2 hole LEF A5 A4 51 2 x 81 2 81 2 x 11...

Page 423: ...0 mm 21 3 x 23 6 x 26 in Weight Less than 15 kg 33 lb Power Consumption Less than 48 W Noise Less than 74 dB Number of Bins 9 bins Stack Capacity of each Bin 100 sheets A5 A4 A3 Paper Size 51 2 x 81 2 81 2 x11 81 2 x14 11 x17 52 128g m Paper Weight 14 lb 34 lb Bond 1 2 11 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY TYPE 3260 B704 Dimension W x D x H 500 x 600 x 600 mm 19 7 x 23 6 x 23 6 in Weight Less than 12 Kg 26 4 l...

Page 424: ... 202 9 lb Power Consumption Maximum 270 W A separate power source is required Power Source 220 240 V 50 60 Hz 1 2 A Operating Environment Temperature and humidity ranges Same as main machine Paper Weight Single sheet mode 64 to 103 g m2 17 lb Bond 28 lb Bond Multiple sheets mode 64 to 80 g m2 17 lb Bond 20 lb Bond Folding Methods 6 see below Speed Straight Through 100 to 700 mm s Folding 270 to 70...

Page 425: ...3 B4 DLT LG A4 LT 12x18 8 kai FM2 A3 B4 DLT LG A4 B5 LT 12x18 12 6x18 5 12 6x19 2 13x18 13x19 13x19 2 226x310 mm 310x432 mm SRA3 SRA4 8 kai FM3 FM4 FM5 FM6 A3 B4 DLT LG A4 LT B5 12x18 8 kai Paper Weights Folding FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 FM5 FM6 64 to 105 g m2 Multiple Folding FM1 Not allowed ...

Page 426: ...n machine 2 3 Sheets 454 mm sec 700 mm sec to top tray paper 355 6 mm long 350 mm sec to top tray paper 279 4 355 6 mm long 250 mm sec to top tray paper 279 4 mm long FM3 FM4 1 Sheet Same as main machine 2 3 Sheets 454 mm sec to top tray 350 mm sec to top tray paper 420 mm long 250 mm sec to top tray paper 420 mm long FM5 1 Sheet Same as main machine 350 mm sec to top tray paper 420 mm long 250 mm...

Page 427: ...g 203 lb Noise Level dB A Mode Alone System No Folding 76 dB Folding 78 dB 83 dB Tray Capacity The capacity of the tray on top of the unit for folded paper is determined by these variables Folding Methods FM1 to FM6 Paper size Paper weight Folding Mode FM1 Size Weight Standard 64 to 80 g m2 Weight Heavy 64 to 80 g m2 8 kai 35 20 12x18 35 20 A3 SEF 35 20 DLT 35 20 B4 SEF 35 20 LG SEF 35 20 A4 SEF 3...

Page 428: ...eight Heavy 64 to 80 g m2 LT SEF 30 20 Folding Mode FM2 Size Weight Standard 64 to 80 g m2 Weight Heavy 64 to 80 g m2 13x19 2 40 25 13x19 40 25 12 6x19 2 40 25 12 6x18 5 40 25 13x18 40 25 SRA3 320x450 mm 40 25 SRA4 225x320 mm 40 25 226x310 mm 40 25 310x432 mm 40 25 8 kai 40 25 12x18 40 25 A3 SEF 40 25 DLT 40 25 B4 SEF 40 25 ...

Page 429: ...m2 Weight Heavy 64 to 80 g m2 LG SEF 40 25 A4 SEF 50 50 LT SEF 50 50 B5 SEF 50 50 Folding Mode FM3 Size Weight Standard 64 to 80 g m2 Weight Heavy 64 to 80 g m2 8 kai 30 20 12x18 30 20 A3 SEF 30 20 DLT 30 20 B4 SEF 30 20 LG SEF 30 20 A4 SEF 40 30 LT SEF 40 30 B5 SEF 40 30 Folding Mode FM4 ...

Page 430: ...Size Weight Standard 64 to 80 g m2 Weight Heavy 64 to 80 g m2 8 kai 40 20 12x18 40 20 A3 SEF 40 20 DLT 40 20 B4 SEF 40 20 LG SEF 40 20 A4 SEF 50 40 LT SEF 50 40 B5 SEF 50 40 Folding Mode FM5 Size Weight Standard 64 to 80 g m2 Weight Heavy 64 to 80 g m2 8 kai 30 20 12x18 30 20 A3 SEF 30 20 ...

Page 431: ...d 64 to 80 g m2 Weight Heavy 64 to 80 g m2 DLT 30 20 B4 SEF 30 20 LG SEF 30 20 A4 SEF 30 30 LT SEF 30 30 B5 SEF 30 30 Folding Mode FM6 Size Weight Standard 64 to 80 g m2 Weight Heavy 64 to 80 g m2 8 kai 50 20 12x18 50 20 A3 SEF 50 20 DLT 50 20 B4 SEF 50 20 LG SEF 50 20 A4 SEF 30 30 LT SEF 30 30 B5 SEF 30 30 ...

Page 432: ...APPENDIX PM TABLES APPENDIX 2 PM TABLES REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 433: ......

Page 434: ...e K Turn off the power switch and unplug the power cord before performing any procedure in this section Laser beams can seriously damage the eyes 2 1 1 MAIN MACHINE Scanner Optics 300K 450K 600K AN Exp Note 1st 2nd 3rd Mirror C Optics cloth Exposure Glass C C Damp cloth Scanner Guide Rails C L After cleaning with alcohol lubricate scanner guide rails with Launa Oil Toner Shield Glass C C Optics cl...

Page 435: ...er brush Do SP 3001 002 after cleaning Pick off Pawls I I Replace if necessary Potential Sensor C C Blower brush OPC Drum 1 200 Replace when an image problem occurs Quenching Lamp C C Dry cloth Transfer Entrance Stay C C Dry cloth Ozone Filter Rear 4 500 Ozone Filter Front R Cleaning Filter R Cleaning Side Seal C Dry cloth Cleaning Entrance Seal C Dry cloth PTL C C Dry cloth Toner Collection Bottl...

Page 436: ... cloth Toner Hopper C C Dry cloth Toner Bottle Holder C C Dry cloth Toner Trap C C Dry cloth Drive Gears C C Blower brush Development Roller Drive Shaft C C Clean with blower brush and dry cloth every time the developer is replaced Development Unit C C Dry cloth Paddle Roller Shaft C C Blower brush dry cloth Used Toner Separation Unit I R Paper Feed 300K 600K 1000K AN Exp Note Registration Rollers...

Page 437: ... End Sensors C C Blower brush Feed Rollers R 1000 Pick up Rollers R 1000 Separation Rollers R 1000 See Notes below this table Notes Always replace pick up feed and separation rollers as a set The target service life of the feed pick up and separation rollers is 1000 K However they should be replaced sooner if the machine begins to jam or double feed Transfer Belt Unit 300K 450K 600K AN Exp Note Tr...

Page 438: ...sfer Exit Guide Plate C Dry cloth Discharge Plate R Transfer Belt Unit Casing C Slide Rail Bracket C Dry cloth Fusing Unit and Paper Exit 300K 450K 900K AN Exp Note Fusing Entrance Guide Plate C Dry cloth Fusing Exit Guide Plate C Dry cloth Fusing Lamps I Hot Roller R 450 Hot Roller Bearings R 450 Pressure Roller R 450 Pressure Roller Bearings R 450 Pressure Cleaning Roller R 450 Pressure Cleaning...

Page 439: ...ler and bushings together De Curler Rollers C Alcohol Exit Static Discharge Brush I Exit Rollers Top Bottom C Alcohol Transport Rollers C Alcohol Duplex 300K 450K 600K AN Exp Note Entrance Sensor C C Blower brush Inverter Exit Rollers C Alcohol Reverse Trigger Rollers C Dry cloth Transport Rollers C Dry cloth Inverter Entrance Roller C Dry cloth Entrance Anti Static Brush C Dry cloth Reverse Junct...

Page 440: ...ogether CIS Glass C C C Dry cloth White Guide Plate R C Alcohol or dry cloth Sensors C C C Blower brush Platen Cover Sheet C C C Water or alcohol Drive Gears L L L Grease G501 Transport Belt C C C Water or alcohol Entrance Roller C C C White Platen Roller C C C Pre Scanning Roller C C C Scanning Roller C C C Exit Roller C C C 2 1 2 OPTIONAL PERIPHERAL DEVICES RT43 A4 LCT B473 300K 450K 1000K Exp N...

Page 441: ...050 D460 The interposer tray is installed between the main machine and the finisher Note The PM interval is for the number of sheets that have been fed 60K 120K 180K Exp Note Feed Belt R R R Pick up Roller R R R Separation Roller R R R Replace as a set Driver Rollers C C C Damp clean cloth Idle Rollers C C C Damp clean cloth Discharge Brush C C C Damp clean cloth Sensors C C C Blower brush Finishe...

Page 442: ...r dry cloth Drive Rollers C Damp cloth dry cloth Idle Rollers C Damp cloth dry cloth Anti Static Brush C Dry cloth Sensors C Blower brush Corner Stapler R Print an SMC report with SP5990 Replace the unit if the staple count is 500K Booklet Stapler R Print an SMC report with SP5990 Replace the unit if the staple count is 200K Punch Unit Type 3260 B702 for Finisher SR4030 D374 SR4040 D373 2400K 3000...

Page 443: ...one oil if noisy Sensors I C Blower brush Positioning roller I C Inspect for scratches or nicks Fold rollers 1st 2nd 3rd I C Crease rollers drive idle roller I C Alcohol clean cloth Related SP Codes This is a list of the PM related SP codes For details refer to Service Tables in the Appendices SP7803 PM Counter Display Displays the PM count since the last PM SP7804 PM Counter Reset Resets the PM c...

Page 444: ...TIONS APPENDIX 3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 1 11 18 2011 SC conditions 10 02 03 2011 SC230 31 03 12 2010 Corrected SC 625 72 10 01 2009 Added SC 995 82 09 23 2009 Finisher D460 Jam Codes ...

Page 445: ......

Page 446: ...do servicing on the machine and turn the machine off and on It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on 2 If you must use the printer bit switches go into the SP mode and set SP 5169 to 1 3 After machine servicing is completed Change SP 5169 from 1 to 0 Turn the machine off and on Tell the administrator that you completed servicing the machine Th...

Page 447: ... circuit boards always disconnect then reconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs If a motor lock error occurs first check the mechanical load before replacing motors or sensors When a Level A or B SC occurs while in an SP mode the display does not display the SC number If this occurs check the SC number after leaving the SP mode SC100 Scanning System Exposure Lamp Error D At trigger on th...

Page 448: ...HP sensor and BCU disconnected Scanner wire timing belt pulley or carriage installed incorrectly Scanner home position error 2 D The scanner HP sensor does not detect the ON condition during initialization or copying 121 BCU SIOB defective Scanner motor defective Scanner HP sensor defective Harness between BCU SIOB scanner motor disconnected Harness between scanner HP sensor and BCU disconnected S...

Page 449: ...oard defective Harnesses are disconnected Exposure lamp defective Lamp stabilizer defective Scanner motor defective 142 1 Clean the exposure glass white plate mirrors and lens 2 Check if the exposure lamp is lit during initialization 3 Check the harness connection 4 Replace the exposure lamp 5 Replace the scanner motor 6 Replace the SBU board SIOB IPU board or BCU board SBU auto gain error C The w...

Page 450: ...position SBU transmission error D After the SBU switches on the BCU detects one of the following conditions on the SBU 1 s after power on the SYDO signal does not go high even after 1 retry 1 s after power on the SYDO signal goes high but the SBU ID could not be read after 3 attempts 144 SBU defective SIOB defective BCU defective Harness between the SBU SIOB is disconnected Harness between the SIO...

Page 451: ...ed The board is not installed or the board is defective Inverter Fan Error D When the exposure lamp is triggered on the inverter fan motor does not rotate 181 SIOB defective BCU defective Inverter fan motor defective Harness between the inverter fan motor SIOB is disconnected Harness between the SIOB BCU is disconnected Harness between the SIOB PSU is disconnected Scanner Fan Error Right Side D Th...

Page 452: ... area and rear edge is beyond the permissible level 0 7 1 43 During scanning the shading data peak is under 32 8bit 186 D Harness CN210 and CN220 on ADF are disconnected Otherwise replace CIS CIS BK level error The BK level scanned by CIS is abnormal The BK level average of R G or B is are not from 2 to 62 0 Calibrated BK data level 255 10bit 187 D Turn off the machine Make sure CN210 and CN220 ar...

Page 453: ...mber registered for the machine serial number does not match 1 Confirm the correct serial number of the machine in the specifications Important When SC195 occurs the serial number must be input Contact your technical supervisor SC200 Exposure Polygon mirror motor error 1 Timeout at ON D The polygon mirror motor unit did not enter Ready status within 20 sec after the motor was turned on 202 The pol...

Page 454: ... defective Polygon mirror motor error 4 Unstable timeout D The Ready signal XSCRDY was detected as unstable for more than 20 sec while the polygon mirror motor was operating at normal speed 205 Electrical noise on the line with the motor signals Polygon mirror motor PCB connector loose broken defective Polygon mirror motor PCB defective IPU defective Laser synchronization detection error D The 1st...

Page 455: ...l connections between LD unit LDB IPU LD unit LDB defective IPU defective 230 D FGATE ON error K The FGATE ON signal does not assert within 15 second after the machine is ready for the writing Defective ASIC Poor connection between controller and BCU Defective BCU 1 Check the connection between the controller board and the BCU 2 Replace the BCU 3 Replace the controller board 231 D FGATE OFF error ...

Page 456: ... D The feedback voltage from the charge corona unit is detected too high 9 times 300 Charge corona power pack defective Charge corona harness disconnected Poor charge corona unit connection Charge corona grid leak D When the high voltage is output to the corona grid feedback voltage exceeds the prescribed value 9 times 303 Charge corona power pack defective Charge corona harness disconnected Poor ...

Page 457: ...isconnected The current at the charge corona motor is detected less than 83 mA 306 Charge corona wire cleaner motor connector is defective or disconnected When SC310 to SC317 are logged the machine halts without displaying the SC number These SC codes log an abnormal condition at the potential sensor only when SP3901 Auto Process Control is set to on Potential sensor calibration error 1 C During d...

Page 458: ...n adjusting the drum potential VD the drum potential sensor detects VD higher than VG grid voltage or When adjusting VD drum surface potential of black areas after exposure even after 5 adjustments of VG charge corona grid potential VD could not be set in the target range 800 10 VL 130V 312 Potential sensor defective Potential sensor harness disconnected Potential sensor connector defective or dis...

Page 459: ...f the prescribed range 315 Potential sensor defective Potential sensor harness disconnected Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected IOB defective OPC connector defective Development power pack defective Potential sensor calibration error 6 C During drum potential sensor calibration when 800V is applied to the drum the output value is out of the prescribed range 316 Potential sensor de...

Page 460: ...Potential sensor connector defective or disconnected IOB defective OPC connector defective Charge corona power pack defective Development power pack defective TD sensor output error C TD sensor output voltage Vt measured during each copy cycle is detected 10 times at one of the following levels Vt 0 5 volts or lower Vt 4 0 volts or higher 340 TD sensor defective TD sensor harness disconnected TD s...

Page 461: ...ss disconnected TD sensor connector disconnected or defective IOB defective Toner bottle motor defective Note When the TD sensor is defective the toner supply is controlled using pixel count and the ID sensor TD sensor adjustment error 2 D During the TD sensor auto adjustment the TD sensor output voltage Vt does not enter the target range 3 0 0 1V within 20 s When this error occurs the display of ...

Page 462: ...consecutively when checking the ID sensor pattern Vsp greater than or equals 2 5V Vsg less than 2 5 Vsp 0V Vsg 0 350 ID sensor defective ID sensor harness disconnected ID sensor connector defective IOB defective ID sensor pattern not written correctly Incorrect image density Charge power pack defective ID sensor dirty ID sensor error 2 C The ID sensor output voltage is 5 0V and the PWM signal inpu...

Page 463: ...ttern not written correctly Incorrect image density Charge power pack defective ID sensor dirty ID sensor error 4 C One of the following ID sensor output voltages is detected at ID sensor initialization Vsg less than 4 0V when the maximum PWM input 255 is applied to the ID sensor Vsg greater than or equal to 4 0V when the minimum PWM input 0 is applied to the ID sensor 353 ID sensor defective ID s...

Page 464: ... dirty ID sensor error 6 C The Vp value which measures the reflectivity of the ID sensor pattern was not in the range of 70V to 400V 355 Potential sensor defective Potential sensor harness defective Potential sensor disconnected IOB defective OPC unit connector defective Charge corona power pack defective Charge corona wire dirty broken SC400 Image Development 2 Transfer output abnormal D When the...

Page 465: ...value Quenching lamp defective Quenching lamp harness disconnected Quenching lamp connector loose defective Main motor lock 440 D The main motor lock signal remains low for 2 seconds while the main motor is on Drive mechanism overloaded Motor driver board defective Development motor lock The development motor lock signal remains high for 2 seconds while the development motor is on Drive mechanism ...

Page 466: ...et switch remains off when the front door is closed No toner collection bottle set Poor connection of the switch connector Toner collection motor error 497 D The toner collection motor connector set signal remains off for 1 s Toner pump motor defective Motor connector loose disconnected SC500 Feed Transport Duplexing and Fusing Systems Tray 1 lift malfunction 501 B The lift sensor is not activated...

Page 467: ... 502 B The lift sensor is not activated within 10 s after the tray lift motor starts lifting the bottom plate When the tray lowers the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1 5 s Tray overload detected when the tray is set Tray lift motor defective or disconnected Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor Pick up solenoid disconnected or blocked by an obstacle Too much paper loaded ...

Page 468: ...t the tray This SC will not display until the operator has pulled the tray out and pushed it in 3 times If the operator turns the machine off on before the 3rd opening and closing of the tray the 3 count is reset Tray 4 lift malfunction 504 B The lift sensor is not activated within 10 s after the tray lift motor starts lifting the bottom plate When the tray lowers the tray lift sensor does not go ...

Page 469: ...ive Feed motor connector disconnected Obstacle interfering with mechanical movement of motor LCT tray malfunction 510 B One of the following conditions is detected When the bottom plate is lifted the upper limit sensor does not come on for 18 s When the bottom plate is lowered the lower limit sensor does not come on for 18 s After lift begins the upper limit sensor does not switch on before the pi...

Page 470: ...aper or other obstacle interfering with operation of the sensors Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor Motor mechanical overload due to obstruction Return sensor or HP sensor defective or dirty Note This problem will not issue the SC code on the operation panel The machine will prompt the operator to reset tray by opening and closing it If the problem persists the machine will dis...

Page 471: ...k caused by physical overload Motor drive PCB defective Fusing thermistor open 541 A The fusing temperature detected by the center thermistor was below 0 C for 7 s Thermistor open Thermistor connector defective Thermistor damaged or out of position Fusing temperature 15 less than the standard input voltage Fusing temperature warm up error 542 A One of the following occurred After power on or after...

Page 472: ...ive BICU defective Fusing lamp overheat error 1 hardware 544 A The center thermistor or an end thermistor detected a temperature of 250 C on the hot roller PSU defective IOB defective BICU defective Fusing lamp overheat error 2 545 A After hot roller reaches warmup temperature the fusing lamps remained on at full capacity for 11 samplings 1 8 s duration while the hot roller was not rotating Thermi...

Page 473: ...e than 7 seconds Thermistor disconnected Thermistor connector defective Fusing thermistor error 2 552 A The end thermistor contact type could not detect 100 C 25 seconds after the start of the warmup cycle A change in temperature more than than 16 degrees for 5 seconds The reload temperature with 56 seconds after the start of the fusing temperature control cycle Fusing lamp disconnected Thermistor...

Page 474: ...tected on the power line No action required The SC code is logged and the operation of the machine is not affected Fusing jam 3 counts 559 A At the fusing exit sensor the paper was detected late for three pulse counts lag error and SP1159 was on If this SC occurs the machine cannot be used until the service technician cancels the SC code This SC occurs only if SP1159 has been set to 1 On Default 0...

Page 475: ...t does not change within 300 ms after the motor switches on Motor overload Motor driver defective SC600 Data Communication BICU ADF communication timeout error 620 D After 1 data frame is sent to the finisher MBX an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms and is not received after 3 retries Serial line connection unstable External noise on the line BICU Finisher communication break error 621 D Du...

Page 476: ...s not received after 3 retries Serial line connection unstable Finisher interface cable External noise on the line Finisher main board BCU 626 D BICU LCT communication timeout error After 1 data frame is sent to the LCT an ACK signal is not received within 100 ms and is not received after 3 retries Serial line connection unstable External noise on the line 627 D BICU LCT communication break recept...

Page 477: ...er failed to notify the main machine that the folded document has exited the fan folder 628 B Fan folder not connected to main machine Fan folder main control unit connector loose broken defective Fan folder main control unit defective Fan folder communication error 2 Cross Folder There was no answer from the fan folder within 100 ms in response to data sent from the main machine 629 B Fan folder ...

Page 478: ...d authentication module 2 Install the SD card 3 Install the DESS module Version error The version of the expanded authentication module is not correct Incorrect module version 02 D 1 Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module Engine to controller communication error GW The controller sent a frame to the main machine engine but there was no response as demanded by RAPI protocol ...

Page 479: ...u can read the error code The error code is not displayed on the operation panel Here is a list of error codes Error Problem Solution 1 Failure to certify dial up In the User Tools check the dial up user and dial up password settings 4 Illegal modem setting Check the setting of SP5816 160 to determine whether the setting for the AT command is correct If this SP setting is correct then the problem ...

Page 480: ... assert After power on and the prescribed time has elapsed No EC response from the engine No PC response from the engine No SC response from the engine During machine operation mode Write to Rapi drive failure could not locate destination on the PCI After the ENGRDY signal asserts with no effect 670 B BICU Ö Controller Board disconnected BICU board defective Controller board defective Mother board...

Page 481: ...ler board defective Controller board installed incorrectly Operation panel harness connection loose or incorrect SC700 Peripherals ADF bottom plate motor error 701 D Bottom plate position sensor does not detect the plate after the bottom plate lift motor switches on to lift the plate Bottom plate HP sensor does not detect the plate after the bottom plate motor reverses to lower the plate Bottom pl...

Page 482: ...her jogger motor error 721 B The finisher jogger HP sensor remains de activated for more 1 000 pulses when returning to home position The finisher jogger HP sensor remains activated for more than 1 000 pulses when moving away from home position Jogger HP sensor defective Jogger mechanism overload Jogger motor defective not rotating Finisher main board defective Harness disconnected or defective Fi...

Page 483: ...r disconnected defective Shift jogger motor overloaded due to obstruction Shift jogger HP sensor disconnected defective Rear shift jogger motor B703 727 B The side fences do not retract within the prescribed time after the shift jogger motor switches on The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Motor harness disconnected loose defective Motor defective Mo...

Page 484: ...s this SC code Stapler rotation motor disconnected defective Stapler rotation motor overloaded due to obstruction Stapler rotation HP sensor disconnected defective Finisher stapler movement motor error 742 B The stapler HP sensor is not activated within the specified time after the stapler motor turned on The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Stapler ...

Page 485: ...is SC code If the motor is operating 1 Stack feed out HP sensor harness loose broken defective 2 Stack feed out HP sensor defective If the motor is not operating 1 Feed out motor blocked by an obstruction 2 Feed out motor harness loose broken defective 3 Feed out motor defective 4 Booklet finisher main board defective Stack Plate Motor Error 1 Front Motor B830 746 D The stack plate HP sensor front...

Page 486: ... defective If the motor is not operating 1 Motor blocked by an obstruction 2 Motor harness loose broken defective 3 Motor defective 4 Booklet finisher main board defective Stack Plate Motor Error 3 Rear Motor B830 748 D The stack plate HP sensor rear does not activate within 500 ms after the motor turns on The 1st detection failure causes a jam error and the 2nd failure causes this SC code If the ...

Page 487: ...3 B Occurs during the operation of the lower tray pressure motor Motor harness disconnected loose defective Motor overloaded Home position sensor harness disconnected loose defective Home position defective Shift Motor Error 3K Finisher B830 755 D The shift tray half turn sensors Failed twice to detect the shift tray at the home position at the specified time or Failed twice to detect that the shi...

Page 488: ...home position within the specified time The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Folder plate HP sensor disconnected defective Folder plate motor disconnected defective Folder plate motor overloaded due to obstruction Punch movement motor error 763 D Occurs during operation of the punch unit The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failur...

Page 489: ...e Stack junction gate motor error 767 B Occurs during operation of the punch unit The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Motor harness disconnected loose defective Motor overload Motor defective Cover interposer tray bottom plate motor error 770 B After the motor starts to raise the bottom plate the bottom plate position sensor does not detect the plat...

Page 490: ...r top fence motor is not operating 1 Motor blocked by an obstruction 2 Motor harness loose broken defective 3 Motor defective 4 Finisher main board defective Jogger Bottom Fence Motor B830 776 B The bottom fence HP sensor detected that The bottom fence did not arrive at the home position at the specified time or The bottom fence failed to leave the home position at the specified time If the jogger...

Page 491: ...on gate at or out of its home position The 1st occurrence causes a jam and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code 778 3 D Top tray JG HP sensor dirty Sensor harness or connector loose broken defective Top tray JG motor harness or connector loose broken defective Sensor defective Motor or motor drive board defective Entrance JG Motor Multi Folder D454 The entrance junction gate HP sensor did not de...

Page 492: ...ibed speed within the specified time Feed motor disconnected defective Feed motor overloaded due to obstruction Feed motor lock Z Fold lower stopper motor 781 B The lower stopper motor does not attain the prescribed speed within the specified time Lower stopper motor disconnected defective Lower stopper motor overloaded due to obstruction Lower stopper HP sensor disconnected defective Z Fold upper...

Page 493: ...e 3rd Stopper Motor Error Multi Folder D454 The 3rd stopper HP sensor did not detect the 3rd stopper in or out of its home position within the prescribed time The 1st occurrence causes a jam and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code 783 2 B 3rd stopper HP sensor dirty Sensor harness or connector loose broken defective 3rd stopper motor harness or connector loose broken defective Sensor defective ...

Page 494: ... broken defective Motor or motor drive board defective Reg Roller Transport Motor Error Multi Folder D454 The motor drive PCB detected an error at the motor 783 7 B Motor harness or connector loose broken defective Motor or motor drive board defective Dynamic Roller Lift Motor Error Multi Folder D454 The dynamic roller HP sensor did not detect the dynamic roller in or out of its home position with...

Page 495: ...HP sensor did not detect the fold plate in or out of its home position within the prescribed time The 1st occurrence causes a jam and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code 783 10 B Fold plate HP sensor dirty Sensor harness or connector loose broken defective Fold plate motor harness or connector loose broken defective Sensor defective Motor or motor drive board defective Jogger Fence Motor Multi ...

Page 496: ...end JG Motor Multi Folder D454 The direct send JG HP sensor did not detect the direct send JG in or out of its home position within the prescribed time The 1st occurrence causes a jam and the 2nd occurrence causes this SC code 783 13 B FM2 direct send JG HP sensor dirty Sensor harness or connector loose broken defective FM2 direct send JG motor harness or connector loose broken defective Sensor de...

Page 497: ...old timing sensor mylar covered with paper dust Mylar disconnected Z fold leading edge sensor adjustment error 785 B The A D input value did not change even after the D A output value changed Leading edge sensor connector loose broken defective Leading edge sensor defective Leading edge sensor mylar covered with paper dust Mylar disconnected Z fold EEPROM error 786 B The write operation to the Z f...

Page 498: ...s defective or this system detects the controller board error Reboot the machine Replace the controller board Monitor Error 817 D This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot loader attempts to read the self diagnostic module system kernel or root system files from the OS Flash ROM or the items on the SD card in the controller slot are false or corrupted OS Flas...

Page 499: ...oot file system on the SD card have been falsified or altered Before discarding the SD card try to update the data on the card If the error occurs again the card may be defective Be sure to use an SD card that contains the correct electronic signature Fatal kernel error Due to a control error a RAM overflow occurred during system processing One of the following messages was displayed on the operat...

Page 500: ...ror code is not displayed on the operation panel For more details about this SC code error execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read the error code The error code is not displayed on the operation panel Self diagnostic error ASIC The Write Verify check of the ASIC returned an error Note The main ASIC module on the controller board controls the bus of the ROM device Replace the controll...

Page 501: ...ss disconnected defective Controller board defective 3004 No response to the self diagnostic command from the ASIC to the HDDs HDD defective 3013 Mandolin does not respond the HDD device remains BUSY for more than 31 s or the BUSY signal does not drop within 6 s after the diagnostic command is issued to the HDDs HDD defective HDD connector loose or defective Controller defective 822 B 3014 Error r...

Page 502: ...stic error 4 NVRAM 824 D One or more of the following conditions exist NVRAM not present NVRAM damaged NVRAM socket damaged NVRAM defective Controller board defective NVRAM backup battery exhausted NVRAM socket damaged Note In every case the controller board must be replaced Self diagnostic Error Optional RAM 829 D The optional RAM returned an error during the self diagnostic test Replace the opti...

Page 503: ... correctly Memory device defective Replace the mother board 50B1 Could not initialize or read the bus connection Bus connection defective loose SSCG defective Replace the mother board 50B2 Value of the SSCG register is incorrect Bus connection loose defective SSCG defective Replace the mother board 834 D Self diagnostic error 9 Optional Memory RAM DIMM 5101 The write verify check for the optional ...

Page 504: ... Bluetooth Wireless LAN card missing was removed Wireless LAN Error 2 GW The board that holds the wireless LAN card can be accessed but the wireless LAN card 802 11b Bluetooth itself could not be accessed while the machine was operating 854 D Wireless LAN card has been removed Wireless LAN Error 3 GW An error is detected for the wireless LAN card 802 11b or Bluetooth 855 D Wireless LAN card defect...

Page 505: ... set Turn the machine power off on several times Replace the controller board 2 NVRAM Read Error NVRAM data conversion failed mismatch with nvram conf Replace the NVRAM 30 NVRAM Before Replace Error DFU May occur during development Turn the machine power off on several times Replace the controller board 31 Other Error An unexpected error occurred while data was being converted This error is the sa...

Page 506: ...up error at power on 860 B HDD is connected but a driver error is detected The driver does not respond with the status of the HDD within 30 s HDD is not initialized Level data is corrupted HDD is defective HDD Error 2 HDD Startup GW The hard disks were detected at power on but the disks were not detected within 30s after recovery from the energy conservation mode 861 B Cable between the hard disks...

Page 507: ...on the bad sector information is written to NVRAM and the next time the HDD is accessed these bad sectors will not be accessed for read write operation HDD data CRC error 864 D During HDD operation the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD HDD defective HDD access error 865 D HDD responded to an error during operation...

Page 508: ...t the license data in the program on the SD card is incorrect then the checked program cannot execute and this SC code is displayed Program missing from the SD card Download the correct program for the machine to the SD card SD card error 2 SD card removed 867 D The SD card in the boot slot when the machine was turned on was removed while the machine was on Insert the SD card then turn the machine...

Page 509: ...ze all Directory Info to initialize all address book data Initialize the user information with SP5832 006 HDD Formatting User Information 1 and SP5832 007 HDD Formatting User Information 2 Replace the HDDs Boot the machine from the SD card HDD mail RX data error GW An HDD error was detected immediately after power on The HDD may be defective or the machine was accidentally powered off while the HD...

Page 510: ...HDD Note The source of this error is the Data Overwrite Security Unit running from an SD card 875 D Turn the main switch off on and try the operation again Log data abnormal 876 D An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating Software error Update the firmware NVRAM defective HDD d...

Page 511: ...ng The system module was updated through the prescribed update root so the controller board became defective USB flash memory did not work correctly Media Link Board Error GW 880 D A request for access to the Media Link Board was not answered within the specified time Media Link Board defective SC900 Miscellaneous Electrical Total Counter Error 900 C The total counter contains data that is not a n...

Page 512: ...es not exist 13 Device file does not exist Recovery Procedure 1 If the machine returns SC codes for HDD errors SC860 SC865 please follow the recovery procedures described for these SC codes Recovery Procedure 2 If the machine does not return one of the five HDD errors SC860 SC865 turn the machine off and on If this does not solve the problem then initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with SP...

Page 513: ...disks Be sure to consult with the customer before executing this SP code Recovery Procedure 4 If Recovery Procedures 1 to 3 fail to correct the problem replace the HDD 910 D External Controller Error 1 911 D External Controller Error 2 912 D External Controller Error 3 913 D External Controller Error 4 914 D External Controller Error 5 The external controller alerted the machine about an error Ple...

Page 514: ...arted the font to use could not be found on the SD card 921 D The font is not on the SD card 925 D Net File Function Error Scanner image setting error 953 D The settings required for image processing using the scanner are not sent from the IPU Software defective Printer image setting error 954 D The settings required for image processing using the printer controller are not sent from the IPU Softw...

Page 515: ...r 985 D After a data transfer begins from the engine to the controller via the PCI bus the transfer does not end within 3 s Controller SIMAC board defective BICU defective BICU controller disconnected Software error 1 986 D The write parameter received by the write module at the beginning of the setting table is NULL Controller SIMAC board defective BICU defective BICU controller disconnected Soft...

Page 516: ... displayed you will see detailed information about the recently logged SC991 including the software file name line number and so on Of these two methods 1 is the recommended method because another SC could write over the information for the previous SC Undefined Error No SC Code GW An error not controlled by the system occurred the error does not come under any other SC code 992 C Software defecti...

Page 517: ...0 seconds after the power is turned on Loose connection of RAM DIMM ROM DIMM Defective controller Software problem 998 CTL D 1 Check the setting of SP5875 001 If the setting is set to 1 OFF change it to 0 OFF 2 Check if the RAM DIMM and ROM DIMM are correctly connected 3 Reinstall the controller system firmware 4 Replace the controller 3 1 4 ADDITIONAL SC CODES PRINTED IN SMC REPORT These codes ar...

Page 518: ...error 820 0011 Allocation 1 error 820 0012 Allocation 2 error 820 0013 Allocation 3 error 820 0014 Allocation 4 error 820 0015 Allocation 5 error 820 00FF Non initialization allocation error CPU defective Local bus defective Controller board defective 820 0601 Read address exception error 820 0602 Write address exception error 820 0605 System call exception error 820 0606 Break point exception err...

Page 519: ...rror CPU device error Error in CPU initialization data ASIC error Controller board defective 820 0702 Command cache error CPU cache defective Controller board defective Memory error insufficient speed 820 0709 Data cache error 820 070A Data cache clear error CPU device error Boot mode setting for CPU error Controller defective Insufficient memory 820 0801 TLB virtual address error 820 0804 TLB glo...

Page 520: ...6104 PHY chip ID illegal 823 6105 PHY loopback error NIB PHY board defective Controller board defective 824 1401 NVRAM verify error NVRAM defective 826 1501 Clock error Optional NVRAM defective 826 15FF RTC non detection error Incompatible NVRAM installed NVRAM battery defective 826 0201 Resident memory verify error Memory on controller board defective RAM DIMM defective 828 0101 Boost trap code C...

Page 521: ...or error 835 110 C DMA verify error Controller board defective Loopback connector not set Loopback connector error 835 1120 Loopback connector non detection Controller board defective 836 1601 Font ROM 0 error 837 1602 Font ROM 1 error 838 2701 Verify error 853 D IEEE802 11b card startup error Not used 854 D IEEE802 11b card access error Not used 855 D IEEE802 11b card error Not used 856 D IEEE802...

Page 522: ...in switch is turned on Replace the hard disk the user codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned on Data corruption Defective hard disk Defective software Electrical Total Counter Error The total counter contains data that is not a number 900 C NVRAM disturbed unexpectedly NVRAM defective NVRAM data corrupted Printer error 920 D The printer program cannot be continued Defectiv...

Page 523: ...e GW controller 3 1 5 JAM CODES Here are lists of SC codes that are printed in the SMC report they do not appear on the operation panel display ADF Paper Jam Errors No Location Position Code 003 Separation Sensor On P1 004 Skew Correction Sensor On P1 005 Interval Sensor On P2 006 Registration Sensor On P2 007 Exit Sensor On P2 053 Separation Sensor Off P1 054 Skew Correction Sensor Off P1 055 Int...

Page 524: ...e Japan Only A1 7 LCT Feed SN Late U 8 1st Vertical Transport SN Late A1 9 2nd Vertical Transport SN Late A1 10 3rd Vertical Transport SN Late A1 11 4th Vertical Transport SN Late Japan Only A1 12 Relay SN Late B 13 Registration SN Late B C 14 Fusing Exit SN Late D 15 Exit Unit Entrance SN Late E 16 Paper Exit SN Late E 19 Duplex Entrance SN Late E 20 Duplex Transport SN 1 Late F 21 Duplex Transpo...

Page 525: ...N Lag A1 54 2nd Paper Feed SN Lag A1 55 3rd Paper Feed SN Lag A1 56 4th Paper Feed SN Lag Japan Only A1 57 LCT Feed SN Lag U 58 1st Vertical Transport SN Lag A1 59 2nd Vertical Transport SN Lag A1 60 3rd Vertical Transport SN Lag A1 61 4th Vertical Transport SN Lag Japan Only A1 62 Relay SN Lag B 63 Registration SN Lag B C 66 Paper Exit SN Lag E 69 Duplex Entrance SN Lag E 71 Duplex Transport SN 2...

Page 526: ...R4 102 Proof Tray Exit Sensor R1 to R4 103 Exit Sensor R1 to R4 104 Staple Entrance Sensor R5 to R8 105 Exit After Jogging R5 to R8 106 Corner Stapling S1 109 Shift Tray Motor R1 to R4 110 Jogger Fence Motor R5 to R8 111 Shift Roller Motor R1 to R4 112 Stapler Shift Motor R5 to R8 113 Stapler Motor R5 to R8 115 Feed Out Belt Motor R5 to R8 116 Paper Punch Motor R1 to R4 Finisher D373 Jam Codes No ...

Page 527: ...per Folding R8 to R12 129 Shift Tray Motor R1 to R4 130 Jogger Fence Motor R8 to R12 131 Shift Roller Motor R1 to R4 132 Stapler Shift Motor R8 to R12 133 Stapler Motor R8 to R12 134 Folder Plate Motor R8 to R12 135 Feed Out Belt Motor R8 to R12 136 Paper Punch Motor R1 to R4 Finisher D460 Jam Codes No Location Position Code 151 Entrance Sensor R1 to R3 152 Proof Tray Exit Sensor R1 to R3 153 Shif...

Page 528: ...er R4 to R7 163 Stack Plate Motor Front R4 to R7 164 Stack Plate Motor Rear R4 to R7 165 Shift Motor R1 to R3 166 Drag Drive Motor R1 to R3 167 Shift Tray Jogger Motor R1 to R3 168 Shift Tray Jogger Retraction Motor R1 to R3 169 Exit Guide Motor R4 to R7 170 Staple Hammer Motor 171 Stapler Movement Motor R4 to R7 172 Stapler Rotation Motor R4 to R7 173 Stack Feed Out Belt Motor R4 to R7 174 Punch ...

Page 529: ...ical Transport Sensor 5 W Cover Interposer Tray B470 Jam Codes No Location Position Code 251 Paper Feed Sensor Q 252 Vertical Transport Path Q1 to Q3 253 Bottom Plate Position Sensor Q Multi Folding Unit D454 Jam Codes No Location Position Code 351 Entrance SN Late N1 to N5 352 Entrance SN Lag N1 to N5 353 Top Tray Exit SN Late N1 to N5 354 Top Tray Exit SN Lag N1 to N5 355 Horizontal Path Exit SN...

Page 530: ...n Jam N6 to N22 364 Folded Paper Path Jam N1 to N5 366 Entrance JG Motor Jam N1 to N5 367 Fold JG Motor Jam N1 to N5 368 1st Stopper Motor Jam N6 to N22 369 2nd Stopper Motor Jam N6 to N22 370 3rd Stopper Motor Jam N6 to N22 371 Dynamic Roller Trans Motor Jam N6 to N22 372 Registration Roller Release Motor Jam N6 to N22 373 Fold Plate Motor Jam N6 to N22 374 Jogger Fence Motor Jam N6 to N22 375 Po...

Page 531: ...72 Fold Timing Sensor Paper Remains 173 Leading Edge Exit Sensor Paper Late 174 Leading Edge Exit Sensor Paper Remains 175 Upper Stopper Path Sensor Paper Late 176 Upper Stopper Path Sensor Paper Remains 177 Lower Exit Sensor Paper Late 178 Lower Exit Sensor Paper Remains 181 Upper Exit Sensor Paper Late 182 Upper Exit Sensor Paper Remains 183 Paper Fold Motor Lock 184 Lower Stopper Motor Lock 185...

Page 532: ...cted SP2507 default from 1 to 0 90 11 20 2009 SP5227 91 05 09 11 SP5227 202 106 10 01 2009 SP5811 148 149 09 16 2009 SP5985 150 03 11 2010 SP6016 Added refer to SP6016 description 173 10 01 2009 SP6890 176 01 04 2012 SP 7504 Deleted 18 added 24 179 180 05 21 2010 Jam Code 197 269 03 11 2010 Added SP6016 Original Size Determination Priority ...

Page 533: ......

Page 534: ...mments added for reference An asterisk marks the SP s that are reset to their factory default settings after an NVRAM reset DFU Denotes Design or Factory Use Do not change this value Japan Only The feature or item is for Japan only Do not change this value SEF Short Edge Feed LEF Long Edge Feed NIA No Information Available May 2009 4 1 2 SYSTEM SP TABLES SP1xxx Feed 1001 Leading Edge Registration ...

Page 535: ...02 Tray 2 003 Tray 3 004 Tray 4 Japan Only 005 By pass Tray 006 LCT 007 Duplex Tray 9 to 9 0 0 1 mm 1003 Registration Buckle Adjustment Adjusts the registration motor timing This timing determines the amount of paper buckle at registration A higher setting causes more buckling 9 to 9 0 1 mm 001 Tray LCT 002 Duplex Tray 003 By pass Tray 1007 By pass Feed Paper Size Display 001 Use this SP to confir...

Page 536: ...001 Duplex Actual Temperature 0 to 1 0 1 002 Duplex Balance Temp Center Thermistor 30 to 0 15 1 003 Duplex Balance Temp End Thermistor 30 to 0 15 1 1103 Fusing Idling 001 IdlingTime Normal D062 D063 0 to 300 0 1sec For only TWN 0 to300 8 1sec D065 0 to 300 26 1sec For only TWN 0 to300 28 1sec D066 0 to 300 160 1sec 002 IdlingTime Low D062 D063 0 to 300 66 1sec For only TWN 0 to300 68 1sec D065 0 t...

Page 537: ...enter Thermistor Fusing temperature during printing D062 D063 D065 150 to 205 190 1 degree C D066 150 to 200 170 1 degree C 004 OHP End Thermistor Fusing temperature during printing D062 D063 D065 150 to 205 190 1 degree C D066 150 to 200 170 1 degree C 005 Thick Paper Center Thermistor Fusing temperature during printing D062 D063 D065 180 to 205 200 1 degree C D066 150 to 200 195 1 degree C 006 T...

Page 538: ...f the hot roller detected by the thermistor at the center of the hot roller 002 End Temperature Shows the temperature of the hot roller detected by the thermistors at the ends of the hot roller 003 Pressure Roller Temperature Shows the temperature of the hot roller detected by the thermistors at the pressure roller 1107 Start Fusing Adjustment This SP allows you to set when to start the fusing tem...

Page 539: ...c 009 Japan only Capacitator for Check Start Fusing Temperature C4c 170 to 205 200 1 deg C 010 Japan only Capacitator for Check Start Fusing Lamp ON Time C4c 0 to 120 0 1 sec 1109 Measure Nip Width 001 Execute 0 or 1 002 Adjust Value 200 to 400 300 10mm 1112 Hot Roller Temperature for Auto Process Control 001 Sets the temperature of the hot roller for auto process control to start 70 to 150 140 1 ...

Page 540: ...062 D063 D065 0 to 4 2 1 step D066 0 to 4 3 1 step 0 25 cpm 1 35 cpm 2 40 cpm 3 45 cpm 4 55 cpm 002 Tab Sheet 0 to 4 0 1 step 0 25 cpm 1 35 cpm 2 40 cpm 3 45 cpm 4 55 cpm 1902 Fusing Web Motor Control 001 Fusing Web Used Area Display Setting Displays the percentage of the web consumption in 1 steps 0 to 100 This setting must be reset to zero after the web is replaced 0 to 120 0 1 002 Fusing Web Mo...

Page 541: ... 20 9 1 006 Web Length 0 20m 1 22 7m 2 28 5m 3 32m Set the length of web 0 to 3 x 1 D062 D063 D065 x 3 D066 x 2 1903 Web Job End 001 Yes No This determines whether the web motor is driven at the end of a job 0 to 1 1 0 Off 1 On Enable when too much paper dust is causing copies to blacken 002 Job End Condition Continuous PPC Time At the end of a job the web motor is driven if the job lasted longer ...

Page 542: ...1 1 On 30 ms 0 Off 1905 This setting switches the by pass feed clutch on for 30 ms when the registration motor turns on It only happens when thick paper is selected to help this paper pass through the registration rollers 1906 Temperature Humidity Sensor 001 Temperature Sensor 1907 Pre Fusing Idling On Off Pre fusing idling The hot roller turns freely to increase its temperature before thick paper...

Page 543: ...mall Paper Size 1 ON 0 OFF Normal Paper Small Size 005 Middle Thick 1 ON 0 OFF Middle Thick Paper Normal Size 006 Middle Thick Small Paper Size 1 ON 0 OFF Middle Thick Paper Small Size 1908 Pre Fusing Idling 001 1 ON 0 OFF 002 This SP is for only D066 Low Temp Standby Pre Idling 0 to 180 0 1sec 003 This SP is for only D066 Low Temp Sleep Mode Pre Idling 0 to 180 60 1sec 1909 LowSpeedMode 001 LowSp...

Page 544: ... Discharge S Size Japan only 1927 Capacitator Discharge Setting Japan only 1921 Idling Control Japan only 001 After Job Interval C4c 0 to 30 0 1sec 002 After Job Target Temperature C4c 190 to 205 200 1deg 1922 Heater Full Power Setting Japan only 001 0 OFF 1 ON 1923 HV Fusing Temp Cont 001 0 OFF 1 ON 1924 10 Sec Recovery Temperature Japan only 001 Temperature Sensor C4c 15 to 25 20 1 1925 Idling S...

Page 545: ...Pattern Adjustment of Applied Voltage Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate when the ID sensor pattern is created 600 to 1500 800 10 V 003 Setting for Total Bias Current Adjusts the total current applied to the charge corona wire DFU 900 to 1500 1300 10 A 004 Setting for Total Bias Current of Grid Adjusts the voltage applied to the grid plate during copying when auto process control is on ...

Page 546: ...dge 0 to 9 2 5 0 1 mm Specification 3 2 mm 002 Trailing Edge 0 to 9 2 0 1 mm Specification 3 2 mm 003 Left Edge 004 Right Edge 0 to 9 2 0 1 mm Specification 2 1 5 mm 2103 LD Power Adjustment DFU Note This is an SSP mode To enter SSP mode push Reset enter 107 then hold down Clear for at least 3 sec When you see Copy SP on the touch panel press and hold down then touch Copy SP 001 LD0 Power Adjustme...

Page 547: ...ated during 1200 dpi printing 0 to 1 1 1 On 0 Off Unevenness may appear in dot patterns or narrowly spaced horizontal lines i e some areas may appear lighter or darker than others 002 Reduction Mode On 1200 dpi Printing Adjusts the amount of correction for uneven images generated during 1200 dpi printing 20 to 10 8 1 003 Reduction Mode On Off 1200 dpi Copying Switches on off the setting that corre...

Page 548: ...or binary edge processing for the printer application with FCI switched off The value for this SP is enabled only when the printer is initialized In all other cases the data registered in the software are enabled This SP allows adjustment of image quality if the desired effect cannot be achieved with the default settings for edge processing However some settings could cause defective images on whi...

Page 549: ...100 0 1 m 2201 Development Bias Adjustment 001 Dev Bias Image Adjusts the development bias for copying when process control is off 100 to 800 550 10 V Adjust as a temporary measure to compensate for an aging drum until the old drum can be replaced 002 Dev Bias ID Sensor Pattern Adjusts the development bias used to create the ID sensor pattern DFU 100 to 800 360 10 V This SP and SP2201 004 must be ...

Page 550: ...Toner Supply Mode 001 Selects the toner supply mode Sensor Control or Image Pixel Count 0 to 1 1 0 Sensor Control 1 Pixel Count Select Image Pixel Count only if the TD sensor has failed and cannot be replaced immediately so that the customer can use the machine Return the setting to Sensor Control after replacing the sensor 2209 Toner Supply Rate 001 Adjusts the toner supply rate 50 to 2000 850 5 ...

Page 551: ...achine that you are going to move it to Install the test development unit then input the VREF for this unit into SP2220 After the test put back the old development unit and change SP2220 back to the original value 2223 Vt Display Displays the current TD sensor output voltage 0 to 5 4 0 02 V 2301 Transfer Current Adjustment Adjusts the current applied to the transfer belt during copying Note If thi...

Page 552: ... A D066 10 to 200 80 1 A 014 Bypass Image Leading Edge 015 Bypass Image Trailing Edge D062 D063 D065 10 to 200 75 1 A D066 10 to 200 80 1 A 016 Image Leading Edge Postcard 017 Image Trailing Edge Psotcard 10 to 200 165 1 A 018 Image Leading Edge Tab Paper 019 Image Trailing Edge Tab Paper D062 D063 D065 10 to 200 75 1 A D066 10 to 200 80 1 A 020 Image Leading Edge Thick Paper 021 Image Trailing Ed...

Page 553: ...erval at which multi copy jobs are stopped 1 to 100 15 1 min 2507 ID Sensor Patterning During Job 001 Operation Setting Determines whether an ID sensor pattern is created during copy jobs 0 to 1 0 0 Off 1 On 002 No of Copies Selects the interval number of copies between ID sensor patterns when 1 is selected for SP2507 001 0 to 10 000 100 1 2602 PTL Setting 1st 2nd Copy Side Turns the PTL off and o...

Page 554: ...eed For example if you select 3 then quenching will be done 3 mm from the leading edge on the front side 10 to 20 3 1 mm 003 ON OFF Setting 2nd Side Turns the PTL lamp on off during transfer to the front side of the paper at normal speed 0 to 1 1 0 Off 1 On 004 OFF Timing 2nd Side Adjusts the length of the space from the leading edge where PTL quenching is applied to the back side at normal speed ...

Page 555: ... cleaned at regular intervals 0 to 1 1 0 No 1 Yes The time interval between cleaning is set with SP2804 002 002 Number of Sheets Sets the interval number of sheets printed between charge corona wire cleanings 100 to 10 000 5000 100 2813 Exposure Gamma Table DFU Is the gamma table is used when the printing test pattern is done with SP2902 003 0 to 1 1 0 Gamma table used in the printing test pattern...

Page 556: ...6 0 1 2906 TD Sensor Control Voltage and Check 001 TD Sensor Control Voltage Adjustment mode for production DFU 4 0 to 12 0 9 7 0 1 V 002 Auto Adjust Set Displays the TD sensor data stored when SP2801 TD Sensor Initial Settings is executed 4 0 to 12 0 9 7 0 1 V 2909 Main Scan Magnification 001 Copy Adjusts magnification in the main scan direction for copying 2 0 to 2 0 0 0 1 2910 Writing Sub Scan ...

Page 557: ... to 6 0 1 min 2913 Temperature Humidity Display 001 Ambient Temperature Shows the internal temperature of the machine 128 to 127 0 1 C 2920 LD Off Check Checks if the LD turns off or on when the front door is opened DFU 0 to 1 1 0 On 1 Off 2930 Transfer Idle Cleaning When resolution changes from 400 to 600 dpi the LD writes a pattern on the drum Toner is applied and this must be cleaned off the be...

Page 558: ...or back side copying 30 to 30 0 1 mm 006 Leading Edge La2f Back Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge during back side copying 0 to 20 0 1 mm 007 Trailing Edge Lc2r Back Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during back side copying 0 to 20 0 1 mm 008 On Timing Lc2 Back Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for back side...

Page 559: ...urrent is applied for the trailing edge during copying with M thick paper from the LCT 0 to 20 0 1 mm 016 Off Timing M Thick Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with M thick paper from the LCT 30 to 30 15 1 mm 017 On Timing After Punch Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with punch from the LCT 30 to 30 20 1 mm 018 Leading Edge After Punch Adjusts the area where tran...

Page 560: ... current ON timing for back side copying 30 to 30 0 1 mm 006 Leading Edge La2f Back Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge during back side copying 0 to 20 0 1 mm 007 Trailing Edge Lc2r Back Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during back side copying 0 to 20 0 1 mm 008 On Timing Lc2 Back Adjusts the transfer current ON ...

Page 561: ...ed for the trailing edge during copying with M thick paper 0 to 20 0 1 mm 016 Off Timing M Thick Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with M thick paper 30 to 30 15 1 mm 017 On Timing After Punch Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with punch 30 to 30 20 1 mm 018 Leading Edge After Punch Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during co...

Page 562: ...ide copying 30 to 30 0 1 mm 006 Leading Edge La2f Back Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge during back side copying 0 to 20 0 1 mm 007 Trailing Edge Lc2r Back Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during back side copying 0 to 20 0 1 mm 008 On Timing Lc2 Back Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for back side copying ...

Page 563: ...M thick paper 0 to 20 0 1 mm 016 Off Timing M Thick Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with M thick paper 30 to 30 15 1 mm 017 On Timing After Punch Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with punch 30 to 30 20 1 mm 018 Leading Edge After Punch Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during copying with punch 0 to 20 0 1 mm 019 Trailing ...

Page 564: ...g Edge La2f Back Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge during back side copying 0 to 20 0 1 mm 007 Trailing Edge Lc2r Back Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during back side copying 0 to 20 0 1 mm 008 On Timing Lc2 Back Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for back side copying 30 to 30 20 1 mm 009 On Timing Thick ...

Page 565: ... edge during copying with M thick paper 0 to 20 0 1 mm 016 Off Timing M Thick Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with M thick paper 30 to 30 15 1 mm 017 On Timing After Punch Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with punch 30 to 30 20 1 mm 018 Leading Edge After Punch Adjusts the area where transfer current is applied for the leading edge during copying with punch 0 ...

Page 566: ...n Timing La2 Back Adjusts on transfer current ON timing for back side copying 30 to 30 0 1 mm 006 Leading Edge La2f Back Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge during back side copying 0 to 20 0 1 mm 007 Trailing Edge Lc2r Back Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the trailing edge during back side copying 0 to 20 0 1 mm 008 On Timing Lc2 ...

Page 567: ...he trailing edge during copying with OHP 0 to 20 0 1 mm 016 Off Timing OHP Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with OHP 30 to 30 20 1 mm 017 On Timing M Thick Adjusts the transfer current ON timing for copying with M thick paper 30 to 30 0 1 mm 018 Leading Edge M Thick Adjusts the area where the transfer current is applied for the leading edge during copying with M thick paper 0 to...

Page 568: ...g After Punch Adjusts the transfer current OFF timing for copying with punch 30 to 30 16 1 mm 2940 Reface Mode Determines if a blade bend prevention pattern is made when the ID sensor pattern is made This setting controls the pattern count DFU 0 to 100 0 1 Increase the setting if the rotation of the drum is not smooth that is when drum rotation is making noise 2950 Vh Pattern Create Vh Pattern Cre...

Page 569: ...nsor Initial Setting to initialize the TD sensor 001 Execute 002 Developer Lot Number Input 2964 Transfer Cleaning Blade Forming 001 Pattern Interval Setting Selects the interval for application of a strip of toner across drum and transfer belt to prevent the drum cleaning blade and belt cleaning blade from sticking and bending against the drum or belt 0 to 200 0 1 DFU If set to zero then no patte...

Page 570: ...h is turned on the toner amount in the development unit is normally checked and adjusted using the ID sensor However in some environments such as where there could be traces ammonia in the air copies could appear dirty or too dark because the ID sensor reading is not reliable 2968 Toner Exit Mode Press Execute to force used toner into the toner collection bottle The moving components of the cleani...

Page 571: ...Off 0 to 1 1 0 Off The toner bottle fan switches off when the machine s operation switch is turned off and when the machine enters the night mode 1 On Toner bottle fan remains on Switch on in an extremely hot environment to prevent the toner from overheating and clumping SP3xxx Processing 3001 ID Sensor Initial Setting 001 ID Sensor PWM Setting Recovers the machine when an SC is logged because the...

Page 572: ...um surface 0 to 5 0 0 01 V 002 Vsp Displays the current value of the ID sensor output after checking the ID sensor pattern image 0 to 5 0 0 01 V 003 Vpdp Displays the current value of the ID sensor output immediately after Vsp is output when the charge potential drops This reading is used to test and determine characteristics for design 0 to 5 0 0 01 V Note If the ID sensor output is abnormal an S...

Page 573: ...Off 1 On When auto processing control is turned on displays only when the potential sensor is calibrated correctly Auto process control is not executed when this SP is switched off 0 to 1 1 1 0 Off 1 On 002 Vd Displays drum dark potential the standard potential electrical potential of the black areas after exposure 100 to 970 800 1 003 Vh Displays standard halftone drum potential used for laser po...

Page 574: ...e drum turns freely after the machine is turned on After this function is turned on with this SP it will be enabled only when SP3904 001 is set to 2 If SP3904 001 is set to 0 or 1 the extra drum rotation mode will not be enabled 0 to 1 1 0 Extra drum rotation mode is off 1 After auto process control the drum continues to turn until the fusing unit gets to its operation temperature Use this setting...

Page 575: ...d to adjust development bias grid voltage laser diode ID sensor calibrated not done during Short Process Control TD sensor calibrated not done during Short Process Control SP4xxx Scanner Sub Scan Magnification Adj 4008 Fine adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction for scanning by changing the speed of the scanner motor 1 0 to 1 0 0 1 Setting a lower value reduces the speed of the motor ...

Page 576: ...image toward the right edge Set Scale Mask 4012 These settings adjust the margins erase margins of the scanned area on the sheet The leading trailing right and left margins can be set independently 001 Book Sub Scan Leading Edge 002 Book Sub Scan Trailing Edge 003 Book Main Scan Leading Edge Rear 004 Book Main Scan Trailing Edge Front 005 ADF Sub Scan Leading Edge 007 ADF Main Scan Leading Edge Re...

Page 577: ...1 On Dust warning This warning does not stop the job Note Before switching this setting on clean the ADF scanning glass and the white plate above the scanning glass Detect Level Front 002 Adjusts the sensitivity for dust detection on the ADF scanning glass This SP is available only after SP4020 001 is switched on 0 to 8 1 If you see black streaks in copies when no warning has been issued raise the...

Page 578: ... when you see no black streaks in copies lower the setting Dust that triggers a warning could move be removed from the glass by the originals in the feed path If the dust is removed by passing originals this is not detected and the warning remains on 012 Correction Level Rear Sets the level for vertical line correction the black vertical lines caused by dust on the ADF exposure glass 0 to 8 1 0 No...

Page 579: ... 0 to 3 0 1 0 Normal 1 A4 LEF LT SEF If the paper is LEF detects A4 if SEF detects LT 2 LT LEF A4 SEF If paper is LEF detects LT if SEF detects A4 3 8 kai 16 kai A3 B4 8 kai SEF A4 SEF B5 SEF A5 SEF 16 kai SEF A4 LEF B5 LEF A5 LEF 16 kai LEF Original Edge Mask Setting 4400 This SP sets the mask area to remove shadows when scanning originals from the exposure glass in Book mode Note LE denotes lead...

Page 580: ...anner Data 1 256 Gradation Main Scan A 2 256 Gradation Main Scan B 3 256 Gradation Main Scan C 4 256 Gradation Main Scan D 5 256 Gradation Sub Scan 6 Small Grid Pattern 7 Slanted Grid Pattern 8 256 Gradations K 9 16 Step Check Pattern 10 Gray Patch 1 16 Step 11 Gray Patch 2 16 Step 12 Gray Patch 64 Step 13 Large Grid 14 Uneven Density Check 15 Banding Check 1 16 Banding Check 2 17 Overall Coverage...

Page 581: ...Grayscale Photo 27 256 Level Grayscale Text 28 256 Level Grayscale Photo 4429 Select Copy Data Security 001 Copying 0 to 3 3 1 002 Scanning 0 to 3 3 1 003 Fax Operation 0 to 3 3 1 Digital AE 4460 This SP sets the lower limit and level for background removal when background removal is selected with a scanner application 001 Low Limit Value 0 to 1023 392 1 002 Background level 0 to 1023 972 1 4540 P...

Page 582: ...se G 0 to 255 0 1 004 RY Phase B 0 to 255 0 1 005 YR Phase Option 0 to 255 0 1 006 YR Phase R 0 to 255 0 1 007 YR Phase G 0 to 255 0 1 008 YR Phase B 0 to 255 0 1 009 YG Phase Option 0 to 255 0 1 010 YG Phase R 0 to 255 0 1 011 YG Phase G 0 to 255 0 1 012 YG Phase B 0 to 255 0 1 013 GY Phase Option 0 to 255 0 1 014 GY Phase R 0 to 255 0 1 015 GY Phase G ...

Page 583: ...1 018 GC Phase R 0 to 255 0 1 019 GC Phase G 0 to 255 0 1 020 GC Phase B 0 to 255 0 1 021 CG Phase Option 0 to 255 0 1 022 CG Phase R 0 to 255 0 1 023 CG Phase G 0 to 255 0 1 024 CG Phase B 0 to 255 0 1 025 CB Phase Option 0 to 255 0 1 026 CB Phase R 0 to 255 0 1 027 CB Phase G 0 to 255 0 1 028 CB Phase B 0 to 255 0 1 029 BC Phase Option ...

Page 584: ...se G 0 to 255 0 1 032 BC Phase B 0CBo 255 0 1 033 BM Phase Option 0 to 255 0 1 034 BM Phase R 0 to 255 0 1 035 BM Phase G 0 to 255 0 1 036 BM Phase B 0 to 255 0 1 037 MB Phase Option 0 to 255 0 1 038 MB Phase R 0 to 255 0 1 039 MB Phase G 0 to 255 0 1 040 MB Phase B 0 to 255 0 1 041 MR Phase Option 0 to 255 0 1 042 MR Phase R 0 to 255 0 1 043 MR Phase G ...

Page 585: ...ext Drawing 4551 Scanning Text 4552 Scanning Test Dropout Color 4553 Scanning Text Photo 4554 Scanning Photo 4565 Scanning Grayscale 4570 Scanning Color Text Photo 4571 Scanning Color Gloss Photo 4572 Scanning Auto Color 005 MTF Level 0 15 0 OFF 15 High Sets the MTF level Modulation Transfer Function designed to improve image contrast Set higher for stronger effect lower for weaker effect 0 to 15 ...

Page 586: ...en a color original is scanned with a scanner software application The higher the setting the greater the effect applied for removing background dots 0 to 7 0 1 4580 FAX Application Text Chart 4581 FAX Application Text 4582 FAX Application Text Photo 4583 FAX Application Photo 4584 FAX Application Original 1 4585 FAX Application Original 2 005 MTF Level 0 15 0 OFF 15 High Sets the MTF level Modula...

Page 587: ...the effect applied for removing background dots 0 to 7 0 1 010 Texture Erase 0 2 0 to 2 0 1 4600 Display the ID of ASIC 001 Displays the VSBCNT ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after the SBU adjusts automatically at power on 0 to FFh 1 002 Displays the DAGL_L ID code confirmed by reading the SBU after the SBU adjusts automatically at power on 0 to FFh 1 003 Displays the DAGL_F ID code confirme...

Page 588: ...R Factory Setting DFU 001 Displays the reference voltage for Red adjusted at factory 4616 Gray Balance Adj Value G Factory Setting DFU 001 Displays the reference voltage for Green adjusted at factory 4617 Gray Balance Adj Value B Factory Setting DFU 001 Displays the reference voltage for Blue adjusted at factory 4628 Gain Range Adj Value R DFU 001 R FC F R 003 R FC L R 005 R BK F R 007 R BK L R 46...

Page 589: ...B 007 R BK L B 4631 Gain Adj Value R DFU 001 R FC F RE 002 R FC F RO 003 R FC L RE 004 R FC L RO 005 R BK F RE 006 R BK F RO 007 R BK L RE 008 R BK L RO 4632 Gain Adj Value G DFU 001 R FC F GE 002 R FC F GO 003 R FC L GE 004 R FC L GO 005 R BK F GE 006 R BK F GO 007 R BK L GE 008 R BK L GO ...

Page 590: ...BO 007 R BK L BE 008 R BK L BO 4641 Loop Number White Level DFU 001 FC 002 BK 4646 Error Flag Auto Adj Scanner 001 Gain1 First Displays the eroor flag for the gain 1 first data 0 No error 1 Error b11 GAIN_ERR1_BK_F_BO b10 GAIN_ERR1_BK_F_BE b 9 GAIN_ERR1_FC_F_BO b 8 GAIN_ERR1_FC_F_BE b 7 GAIN_ERR1_BK_F_GO b 6 GAIN_ERR1_BK_F_GE 002 Gain1 Last Displays the eroor flag for the gain 1 last data 0 No err...

Page 591: ...ERR2_FC_F_BO b 8 GAIN_ERR2_FC_F_BE b 7 GAIN_ERR2_BK_F_GO b 6 GAIN_ERR2_BK_F_GE 004 Gain2 Last Displays the eroor flag for the gain 1 last data 0 No error 1 Error b11 GAIN_ERR2_BK_L_BO b10 GAIN_ERR2_BK_ L _BE b 9 GAIN_ERR2_FC_ L _BO b 8 GAIN_ERR2_FC_ L _BE b 7 GAIN_ERR2_BK_ L _GO b 6 GAIN_ERR2_BK_ L _GE 005 Black Level First FC Displays the eroor flag for the first full color data at the black leve...

Page 592: ... b 6 BLACK_ERR_FC_ L _GEO 007 Black Level First BK Displays the eroor flag for first B W data at the black level adjustment 0 No error 1 Error b11 BLACK_ERR_BK_F_BOO b10 BLACK_ERR_BK_F_BEO b 9 BLACK_ERR_BK_F_BOE b 8 BLACK_ERR_BK_F_BEE b 7 BLACK_ERR_BK_F_GOO b 6 BLACK_ERR_BK_F_GEO 008 Black Level Last BK Displays the eroor flag for last B W data at the black level adjustment 0 No error 1 Error b11 ...

Page 593: ... F R Factory Setting 003 FC L R Factory Setting 005 BK F R Factory Setting 007 BK L R Factory Setting 4678 Gain Range Adj Value DFU 001 FC F G Factory Setting 003 FC L G Factory Setting 005 BK F G Factory Setting 007 BK L G Factory Setting 4679 Gain Range Adj Value DFU 001 FC F B Factory Setting 003 FC L B Factory Setting 005 BK F B Factory Setting 007 BK L B Factory Setting 4680 Gain Range Adj Va...

Page 594: ...y Setting 4681 Gain Range Adj Value DFU 001 FC F GE Factory Setting 002 FC F GO Factory Setting 003 FC L GE Factory Setting 004 FC L GO Factory Setting 005 BK F GE Factory Setting 006 BK F GO Factory Setting 007 BK L GE Factory Setting 008 BK L GO Factory Setting 4682 Gain Range Adj Value DFU 001 FC F BE Factory Setting 002 FC F BO Factory Setting 003 FC L BE Factory Setting 004 FC L BO Factory Se...

Page 595: ...BO Factory Setting 4690 White Level Peak Data DFU 001 FC F RE 002 FC F RO 003 FC L RE 004 FC L RO 005 BK F RE 006 BK F RO 007 BK L RE 008 BK L RO 4691 White Level Peak Data DFU 001 FC F GE 002 FC F GO 003 FC L GE 004 FC L GO 005 BK F GE 006 BK F GO 007 BK L GE 008 BK L GO 4692 White Level Peak Data DFU ...

Page 596: ...001 FC F BE 002 FC F BO 003 FC L BE 004 FC L BO 005 BK F BE 006 BK F BO 007 BK L BE 008 BK L BO 4693 Black Level Data DFU 001 FC F REE 002 FC F ROE 003 FC F REO 004 FC F ROO 005 FC L REE 006 FC L ROE 007 FC L REO 008 FC L ROO 009 BK F REE 010 BK F ROE 011 BK F REO 012 BK F ROO 013 BK L REE 014 BK L ROE ...

Page 597: ...ROO 4694 Black Level Data DFU 001 FC F GEE 002 FC F GOE 003 FC F GEO 004 FC F GOO 005 FC L GEE 006 FC L GOE 007 FC L GEO 008 FC L GOO 009 BK F GEE 010 BK F GOE 011 BK F GEO 012 BK F GOO 013 BK L GEE 014 BK L GOE 015 BK L GEO 016 BK L GOO 4695 Black Level Data DFU 001 FC F BEE 002 FC F BOE ...

Page 598: ...FC L BEO 008 FC L BOO 009 BK F BEE 010 BK F BOE 011 BK F BEO 012 BK F BOO 013 BK L BEE 014 BK L BOE 015 BK L BEO 016 BK L BOO Display CIS ID 4700 Reads and displays the ID of the CIS board at power 4705 GB Operation 001 Displays whether density adjustment was executed for the CIS using the white roller 0 to 1 1 0 Not executed 1 Executed 002 Result Operation ...

Page 599: ... R DFU 001 0 to 1023 689 1 digit 4707 GB Target G DFU 001 0 to 1023 684 1 digit 4708 GB Target B DFU 001 0 to 1023 669 1 digit 4709 GB Chart Level R 001 Displays the GB chart level for Red signal 0 to 1023 1 digit 4710 GB Chart Level G 001 Displays the GB chart level for Green signal 0 to 1023 1 digit 4711 GB Chart Level B 001 Displays the GB chart level for Blue signal 0 to 1023 1 digit 4712 GB A...

Page 600: ...ding Edge 001 Displays the average level of the main scan white for the leading edge of Red signal 0 to 255 1 digit Trailing Edge 002 Displays the average level of the main scan white for the trailing edge of Red signal 0 to 255 1 digit 4749 Main Scan White Level AVG G Leading Edge 001 Displays the average level of the main scan white for the leading edge of Green signal 0 to 255 1 digit Trailing ...

Page 601: ... White Level Peak Range R Min FC 001 Adjusts the lower limit threshold for the white level peak range of Red signal in the full color mode 0 to 255 64 1 digit Max FC 002 Adjusts the upper limit threshold for the white level peak range of Red signal in the full color mode 0 to 255 245 1 digit Min BK 003 Adjusts the lower limit threshold for the white level peak range of Red signal in the B W mode 0...

Page 602: ...to 255 245 1 digit Min BK 003 Adjusts the lower limit threshold for the white level peak range of Green signal in the B W mode 0 to 255 64 1 digit Max BK 004 Adjusts the upper limit threshold for the white level peak range of Green signal in the B W mode 0 to 255 245 1 digit 4786 White Level Peak Range G Min FC 001 Adjusts the lower limit threshold for the white level peak range of Blue signal in ...

Page 603: ...evel Peak Data R Factory FC 001 Displays the factory setting data of white level peak data for Red in the full color mode 0 to 255 1 digit Factory BK 002 Displays the factory setting data of white level peak data for Red in the B W mode 0 to 255 1 digit 4788 White Level Peak Data G Factory FC 001 Displays the factory setting data of white level peak data for Green in the full color mode 0 to 255 1...

Page 604: ...for Green in the B W mode 0 to 255 1 digit 4790 White Level Peak Data R FC 001 Displays the current red data of white level peak data for Red in the full color mode 0 to 255 1 digit BK 002 Displays the current red data of white level peak data for Red in the B W mode 0 to 255 1 digit 4791 White Level Peak Data G FC 001 Displays the current red data of white level peak data for Green in the full co...

Page 605: ...data of white level peak data for Green in the B W mode 0 to 255 1 digit 4793 Black Level Data R 4794 Black Level Data G 4795 Black Level Data B 001 to 024 Displays the current red data of black level for each color signal and chip 0 to 255 1 digit 4796 Chip Color Stripe Correct DFU 4797 Digital AE Back DFU 001 Low Limit Value 0 to 1023 392 1 digit 002 Background level 0 to 1023 972 1 digit 4798 L...

Page 606: ... 91 1 digit 003 BLUE 0 to 255 85 1 digit 4802 Scanner Free run 001 DF mode Lamp Off Execute the scanner free run with the lamp off 002 DF mode Lamp On Execute the scanner free run with the lamp on 4803 Home Position Adj Value 001 Adjusts the caridge HP position 3 to 3 0 0 1 mm value The home position of the caridge unit is moved away from the leading edge value The home position of the caridge uni...

Page 607: ...FL Correction ON OFF 4806 Turns on or off the FL correction for each color 0 or 1 0 1 0 OFF 1 ON 001 RED 002 GREEN 003 BLUE Result FL Detection 4808 Displays the each data of the FL correction 0 to 1023 1 001 to 020 FR1 to FR20 021 to 040 LR1 to LR20 041 to 060 FG1 to FG20 061 to 080 LG1 to LG20 081 to 100 FB1 to FB20 ...

Page 608: ...9 Displays the each confirmation data of the FL correction 0 to 1023 1 001 to 020 FR1 to FR20 021 to 040 LR1 to LR20 041 to 060 FG1 to FG20 061 to 080 LG1 to LG20 081 to 100 FB1 to FB20 101 to 120 LB1 to LB20 4903 Image Quality Adjustment These SP codes adjust the sharpness and granularity of printed images 001 Independent Dot Erase Text 0 to 7 0 1 ...

Page 609: ...DFU 4907 SBU Test Pattern 001 Select Test Pattern 0 Normal 1 Fixed Value 2 Main Scan Grayscale 3 Sub Scan Grayscale 4 Checked Pattern 002 Set Output Level Output level in case of setting SP4 907 1 to 1 0 to 1023 512 1 Manual Gamma Adjustment DFU 4918 009 IPU Image Pass Selection RGB Frame Memory DFU 4991 0 to 11 2 1 High Light Correction DFU 4993 0 to 9 4 1 001 Sensitivity Selection 002 Range Sele...

Page 610: ... model 0 mm 1 inch American model 0 mm 1 inch 5037 Status Lamp Mode 0 OFF 1 ON Not Used Accounting Counter 5045 Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5 930 001 Note You can change the setting only one time 0 to 1 1 0 Development counter Shows the total counts for color Y M C and black K 1 Paper counter Shows the total page counts for Black Total Black Copies Black ...

Page 611: ...and off 0 to 1 0 1 OFF ON Coverage Counter Display 5056 Displays or does not display the coverage counter in the counter list for the machine administorator 0 to 1 0 1 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed Part Replacement Alert Display 5062 Enables disables the appearance of the PM parts in the yield list on the operation panel PM parts can be selected independently for display ON OFF Note SP5066 must be s...

Page 612: ...0 Grid Plate 011 Charge Corona Wire 012 Cleaning Pad 013 Cushion 014 Pre Charge Unit 015 Pre Charge Corona Wire 016 Pre Charge Grid Plate 017 Fusing Unit 018 Hot Roller Strippers 019 Hot Roller 020 Pressure Roller 021 Fusing Cleaning Unit 022 Web Roll 023 Web Cleaning Roll 024 Web Brake Pad 025 Toner Suction Bottle 026 Toner Suction Motor 027 Tray 1 Roller Assembly 028 Feed Roller Tray 1 ...

Page 613: ...ay 2 035 Tray 3 Roller Assembly 036 Feed Roller Tray 3 037 Pick up Roller Tray 3 038 Separation Roller Tray 3 040 Transfer Belt 041 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 042 Toner Filter 043 ADF Transfer Belt 044 ADF Separation Roller 045 ADF Feed Belt 046 ADF Pick up Roller 047 Tray 4 Roller Assembly 048 Feed Roller Tray 4 049 Pick up Roller Tray 4 050 Separation Roller Tray 4 051 Tray 5 Roller Assembly 0...

Page 614: ...61 Pick up Roller Tray 7 062 Separation Roller Tray 7 063 Toner Collection Unit 100 Blade Cradle 101 Blade 102 Glue Vat Unit PM Parts Display 5066 Determines whether the PM parts button is displayed on the initial screen 0 No Display 1 Display Note Individual PM parts can be selected for display or no display with SP5062 Part Replacement Operation Type 5067 Configures the PM parts display for eith...

Page 615: ... 007 Cleaning Brush 008 Drum Cleaning Unit Filter 009 Charge Unit 010 Grid Plate 011 Charge Corona Wire 012 Cleaning Pad 013 Cushion 014 Pre Charge Unit 015 Pre Charge Corona Wire 016 Pre Charge Grid Plate 017 Fusing Unit 018 Hot Roller Strippers 019 Hot Roller 020 Pressure Roller 021 Fusing Cleaning Unit 022 Web Roll 023 Web Cleaning Roll 024 Web Brake Pad ...

Page 616: ...ration Roller Tray 1 031 Tray 2 Roller Assembly 032 Feed Roller Tray 2 033 Pick up Roller Tray 2 034 Separation Roller Tray 2 035 Tray 3 Roller Assembly 036 Feed Roller Tray 3 037 Pick up Roller Tray 3 038 Separation Roller Tray 3 040 Transfer Belt 041 Transfer Belt Cleaning Blade 042 Toner Filter 043 ADF Transfer Belt 044 ADF Separation Roller 045 ADF Feed Belt 046 ADF Pick up Roller 047 Tray 4 R...

Page 617: ...oller Tray 6 057 Pick up Roller Tray 6 058 Separation Roller Tray 6 059 Tray 7 Roller Assembly 060 Feed Roller Tray 7 061 Pick up Roller Tray 7 062 Separation Roller Tray 7 063 Toner Collection Unit 100 Blade Cradle 101 Blade 102 Glue Vat Unit Non Std Paper Sel 5112 Determines whether a non standard paper size can be input for the universal cassette trays Tray 2 Tray 3 0 to 1 1 0 No 1 Yes If 1 is ...

Page 618: ... Card Add 12 Exp Key Card Deduct Note Items 1 2 3 5 5 are for Japan Only External Optional Counter Type 002 Enables the SDK application This lets you select a number for the external device for user access control Note SDK refers to software on an SD card 0 to 3 1 0 None 1 Expansion Device 1 2 Expansion Device 2 3 Expansion Device 3 5114 Optional Counter I F This SP sets the machine for the MF Key...

Page 619: ...lly no reset Counter Up Timing SSP 5121 Determines whether the optional key counter counts up at paper feed in or at paper exit 0 to 1 1 0 Feed count 1 No feed count Set F size Document 5126 Sets the original size that the machine detects for F sizes 0 to 2 1 0 8hf x 13 1 8hf x 13qr 2 8 x 13 Note hf 1 2 qr 1 4 APS OFF Mode 5127 This SP can be used to switch APS Auto Paper Select off when a coin lo...

Page 620: ...aper size type for originals and copy paper Only needs to be adjusted if the optional printer controller is installed 0 to 3 1 0 JP 1 NA 2 EU AA TWN KOR 3 CH China After changing the value turn the power switch off and on 5150 Bypass Length Setting App Switch Method 5162 Controls if the application screen is changed with a hardware switch or a software switch 0 to 1 1 0 Soft Key Set 1 Hard Key Set...

Page 621: ...et together If one is selected that SP is enabled and the other reset to its default value For example if 002 is set to on 1 when 001 is already set to on 1 002 will be set to on 1 and 001 will automatically reset to its default value 0 Normal Release LS Limit 001 Normally LS can handle up to 15 000 pages Use this SP code to select expansion of the page storage area 0 to 1 0 1 0 Normal 1 Allow Exp...

Page 622: ... Selects the paper feed mode priority productivity or tray This is activated only when a customer selects the Auto paper Select Productivity priority Changes the feed station as soon as the machine detects the priority tray even the paper still remains in the current tray Tray priority This changes the feeding tray after the paper in the tray where the machine has been feeding paper has run out of...

Page 623: ...on Horizontally positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing 10 to 10 1 mm 0 is center minus is left is right 004 Duplex Printout High Low Position Vertically positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing 10 to 10 1 mm 0 is center minus is down is up 5227 Page Numbering Bates Stamp Change Page No Display 200 This SP code determines whether the page number a...

Page 624: ...g is GMT expressed in minutes 1440 to 1440 1 min JA 540 Tokyo NA 300 NY EU 6 Paris CH 480 Peking TW 480 Taipei AS 480 Hong Kong 5307 Summer Time Lets you set the machine to adjust its date and time automatically with the change to Daylight Savings time in the spring and back to normal time in the fall This SP lets you set these items Day and time to go forward automatically in April Day and time t...

Page 625: ...rs for example digit 8 should be 3 30 minutes 001 Setting Enables disables the settings for 002 and 003 0 to 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 003 Rule Set Start The start of summer time 004 Rule Set End The end of summer time Access Control DFU 5401 This SP adjusts the settings below when installing and SDK application Note SDK is the Software Development Kit This data can be converted from SAS VAS when ins...

Page 626: ...Clear 5404 Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of the machine Press Execute to clear 5411 LDAP Certification 004 Easy Certification Determines whether easy LDAP certification is done 0 or 1 1 1 1 On 0 Off 005 Password Null Not Permit Enabled only when SP5411 4 is set to 1 On 0 or 1 0 0 Password NULL not permitted 1 Password NULL permitted 5413 Lock...

Page 627: ...cancels lockout if correct user ID and password are entered 004 Cancellation Time Determines the length of time that the system waits for correct input of the user ID and password after a lockout has occurred This setting is used only if SP5413 3 is set to 1 on 1 to 999 60 1 min step 005 Counter Clear Time Not used 5414 Access Mitigation 001 Mitigation On Off Switches on off masking of continuousl...

Page 628: ...p 5416 Access Information 001 Access Use Max Num Limits the number of users used by the access exclusion and password attack detection functions 50 to 200 200 1 users step 002 Access Password Max Num Limits the number of passwords used by the access exclusion and password attack detection functions 50 to 200 200 1 password step 003 Monitor Interval Sets the processing time interval for referencing...

Page 629: ...imit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down the certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected 50 to 200 200 1 attempt step 5420 User Authentication These settings should be done with the System Administrator Note These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled 001 Copy Determines whether certif...

Page 630: ...required before a user can use the printer applications 0 or 1 0 1 0 On 1 Off 051 SDK1 061 SDK2 071 SDK3 Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the SDK application 0 or 1 0 1 0 ON 1 OFF 5430 Auth Dialog Message Change 001 Message Change On Off 002 Message Text Download 003 Message Text ID 0 to 1 0 1 0 OFF 1 ON 5431 External Auth User Preset Allows or does not allow the ...

Page 631: ...ent Acl 040 CertCrypt 5481 Authentication Error Code These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed 001 System Log Disp Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a user authentication failure occurs 0 or 1 0 1 0 Off 1 On 002 Panel Disp Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user authentication failure occurs 0 or 1 0 1...

Page 632: ...utes without a user code but printing is cancelled PM Alarm 5501 Sets the count level for the PM alarm 0 to 9999 0 1 0 Alarm disabled The PM alarm goes off when the print count reaches this value multiplied by 1 000 Jam Alarm Japan Only 5504 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level document misfeeds are not included RSS use only 0 to 3 3 1 step 0 Zero Off 1 Low 2 5K jams 2 Medium 3K jam...

Page 633: ...ff for every 1K of staples used 003 Toner Supply Alarm Switches the control call on off for the toner end DFU 0 Off 1 On If you select 1 the alarm will sound when the copier detects toner end 080 Toner Call Timing Changes the timing of the Toner Supply Call via the NRS when the following conditions occur 0 Toner is replaced default 1 Toner near end or End 128 Interval Others 132 Interval A3 133 In...

Page 634: ... when SP5508 004 is enabled set to 1 012 Jam Detection Continuous Count Sets the number of continuous paper jams required to initiate a call 02 to 10 1 This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is enabled set to 1 013 Door Open Time Length Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine when to initiate a call 03 to 30 1 This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is enabled set to 1 55...

Page 635: ... 0 to 1 1 1 0 Off 1 On 006 Communication Test Call 007 Machine Information Notice 008 Alarm Notice 0 or 1 1 0 Off 1 On 010 Supply Automatic Ordering Call 011 Supply Management Report Call 0 to 1 0 1 012 Jam Door Open Call 0 to 1 1 1 Memory Clear 5801 Resets NVRAM data to the default settings Before executing any of these SP codes print an SMC Report The following data stored in the NVRAM will not ...

Page 636: ...02 4 Perform the NVRAM data download from the SD card according to the procedure in the Service Manual 5 Input the data listed above manually 001 All Clear Initializes items 2 to 15 below 002 Engine Clear Initializes all registration settings for the engine and copy process settings 003 SCS Initializes default system settings SCS System Control Service settings operation display coordinates and RO...

Page 637: ...be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 012 R FAX Initializes the job login ID SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin job history and local storage file numbers 014 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS Delivery Control Service settings 015 Clear UCS Setting Initializes the UCS User Information Control Service settings 016 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS Machine Infor...

Page 638: ... to off 0 after testing is completed Finisher connectors should be disconnected and duplex mode should be off 5803 Input Check See p 4 241 Copier Input Check SP5803 in the Input Output Check section 5804 Output Check See p 4 251 Copier Output Check SP5804 in the Input Output Check section 5807 Option Connection Check This SP displays whether the devices listed below are connected or not 1 Connecte...

Page 639: ...ed when a service call condition occurs 002 Facsimile Use this to input the fax number of the CE printed on the Counter Report UP mode 003 Supply Displayed on the initial SP screen 004 Operation Sales representative telephone number 5816 Remote Service CTL I F Setting 001 Selects the remote service setting 0 to 2 2 1 step 0 Remote service off 1 CSS remote service on 2 Remote service on CE Call 002...

Page 640: ...n by SSL when calling the RCG 0 to 1 0 1 step 0 Uses the RCG certification 1 Does no use the RCG certification RCG Connect Timeout 008 Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling the RCG 1 to 90 10 1 second step RCG Write Timeout 009 Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the RCG 1 to 100 60 1 second step RCG Read Timeout 010 Specifies the read timeout interval when calling the ...

Page 641: ...pe N M 023 This SP displays and selects the Embedded RC Gate connection method 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Internet connection 1 Dial up connection Cert Expire Timing DFU 061 Proximity of the expiration of the certification Use Proxy 062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates with the service center Proxy Host 063 This SP sets the address of the proxy server use...

Page 642: ...imited to 31 characters Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report Proxy Password 066 This SP sets the HTTP proxy certification password The length of the password is limited to 31 characters Any character beyond the 31st character is ignored This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report CERT Up...

Page 643: ... been received from the rescue GW controller and the certification is being stored 15 The certification has been stored and the GW URL is being notified of the successful completion of this event 16 The storing of the certification has failed and the GW URL is being notified of the failure of this event 17 The certification update request has been received from the GW URL the GW URL was notified o...

Page 644: ...firmware can be updated even without the HDD installed 0 Not allowed update 1 Allowed update 085 Firm Up User Check This SP setting determines if the operator can confirm the previous version of the firmware before the firmware update execution If the option to confirm the previous version is selected a notification is sent to the system manager and the firmware update is done with the firmware fi...

Page 645: ...Displays serial number for the Remote certification Asterisks indicate that no Remote certification exists 092 CERT Issuer Displays the common name of the issuer of the Remote certification CN the following 30 bytes Asteriskes indicate that no Remote certification exists 093 CERT Valid Start Displays the start time of the period for which the current Remote certification is enabled 094 CERT Valid ...

Page 646: ...ocal Phone Number 161 Not used Connection Timing Adjustment Incoming 162 Not used Access Point 163 Not used Line Connecting 164 Not used Modem Serial Number 173 Not used Retransmission Limit 174 Not used FAX TX Priority 187 Not used 200 Manual Polling Not used Regist Status 201 Displays a number that indicates the status of the Remote service device 0 Neither the Remote device nor Embedded RCG Gat...

Page 647: ... the confirmation request to the Remote Gateway 204 Confirm Result Displays a number that indicates the result of the confirmation executed with SP5816 203 0 Succeeded 1 Confirmation number error 2 Registration in progress 3 Proxy error proxy enabled 4 Proxy error proxy disabled 5 Proxy error Illegal user name or password 6 Communication error 7 Certification update error 8 Other error 9 Confirmat...

Page 648: ...when either SP5816 204 or SP5816 207 was executed Cause Code Meaning 11001 Chat parameter error 11002 Chat execution error Illegal Modem Parameter 11003 Unexpected error 12002 Inquiry registration attempted without acquiring device status 12003 Attempted registration without execution of an inquiry and no previous registration Operation Error Incorrect Setting 12004 Attempted setting with illegal ...

Page 649: ...2389 Database out of service 2390 Program out of service 2391 Two registrations for same device Error Caused by Response from GW URL 2392 Parameter error 2393 RCG device not managed 2394 Device not managed 2395 Box ID for RCG device is illegal 2396 Device ID for RCG device is illegal 2397 Incorrect ID2 format 2398 Incorrect request number format 250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log 5821 ...

Page 650: ...m Stapler and Scanner counter values Engine SP data Therefore whenever you perform an NVRAM upload download make sure to print out the SP Data List before you perform SP5801 001 Memory Clear All Clear or SP5801 002 Memory Clear Engine NVRAM Upload Download Procedure 6 Print out the SP Data List from SP5990 002 7 Perform the NVRAM data upload to the SD card according to the procedure in the Service...

Page 651: ... set to 1 065 Job Spooling Enables disables Job Spooling 0 or 1 0 1 step 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 066 Job Spooling Clear Start Time Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists at power on 0 ON Data is cleared 1 OFF Automatically printed 069 Job Spooling Protocol Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for each protocol 0 Validates 1 Invalidates bit0 LPR bit1 FTP bit2 IPP bit3 SMB bit4 BM...

Page 652: ...tive IPv6 Stateless Address 5 These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses 1 to 5 referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 11b in the format Status Address Prefix Length The IPv6 address consists of a total 128 bits configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each 156 IPv6 Manual Address This SP is the IPv6 manually set address referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN 802 11b in the format Manual Set Add...

Page 653: ...ies Link visible Displays or does not display the link to Consumable Supplier on the top page and link page of the web system 0 to 1 1 1 0 Not display 1 Display 239 Web Link 1 Name This SP confirms or changes the URL1 name on the link page of the web system The maximum characters for the URL name are 31 characters 240 Web Link 1 URL This SP confirms or changes the link to URL1 on the link page of ...

Page 654: ...artition to initialize then press When the execution ends cycle the machine power off and on 001 HDD Formatting All 002 HDD Formatting IMH 003 HDD Formatting Thumbnail 004 HDD Formatting Job Log 005 HDD Formatting Printer Fonts 006 HDD Formatting User Info1 007 Mail RX Data 008 Mail TX Data 009 HDD Formatting Data for Design 010 HDD Formatting Log 011 HDD Formatting Ridoc I F for Ridoc Desk Top Bi...

Page 655: ...ting can be changed 0 to 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 072 Reduction for Copy B W Text 0 to 6 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 6 2 3 073 Reduction for Copy B W Other 0 to 6 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 6 2 3 075 Reduction for Printer B W 0 to 6 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 6 2 3 076 Reduction for Printer B W HQ 0 to 6 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 6 2 3 081 Format for Copy Color 0 to 3 1 0 JFIF JPEG 1 TIFF MMR 2 TIFF MH 3 TIFF M...

Page 656: ...ment management server with the MLB with JPEG selected as the format Enabled only when optional File Format Converter MLB Media Link Board is installed Hgih Quality for JPEG 092 Determines the quality level of JPEG images for high quality sent to the Document Server via the MLB Media Link Board 5 to 95 60 1 Low Quality for JPEG 093 Determines the quality level of JPEG images for low quality sent t...

Page 657: ... used Limit 8 alphanumeric characters Default Compression for Backup Files 097 This SP sets the compression rate for JPEG backup files when the print backup function is used This SP operates only after SP5826 094 has been set for 1 JPEG 0 to 2 0 1 Back Projection Removal 098 Removes the ghost images fransferred from the back sides of double sided originals 1 Enable 0 Disable Primary srv IP address...

Page 658: ...rver CS 000 000 000 000 Secondary srv scheme 112 Sets the IO device of the secondary CS remotely Max characters 6 Secondary srv port number 113 Sets the IO device of the secondary CS remotely Max characters 6 Secondary srv URL path 114 Sets the IO device of the secondary CS remotely Max characters 6 Default Reso Rate Switch 120 Sets the IO device of the CS remotely 0 to 1 0 1 Reso Copy Color 121 S...

Page 659: ...dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 100dpi 6 75dpi Reso Fax Color 125 Sets the IO device of the CS remotely 0 to 6 3 1 0 600dpi 1 400dpi 2 300dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 100dpi 6 75dpi Reso Fax Mono 126 0 600dpi 1 400dpi 2 300dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 100dpi 6 75dpi Reso Scan Color 127 0 600dpi 1 400dpi 2 300dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 100dpi 6 75dpi Reso Scan Mono 128 0 600dpi 1 400dpi 2 300dpi 3 200dpi 4 150dpi 5 100...

Page 660: ...nimum range of the bandwidth for operation of the wireless LAN This bandwidth setting varies for different countries 1 to 14 1 WEP Key Select 011 Determines how the initiator SBP 2 handles subsequent login requests 0 to 1 1 0 If the initiator receives another login request while logging in the request is refused 1 If the initiator receives another login request while logging in the request is refu...

Page 661: ...Debug Lvl1 045 Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application 1 to 3 3 1 1 Info 2 warning 3 error This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802 11 card is installed Supply Name Setting 5841 Press the User Tools key These names appear when the user presses the Inquiry button on the User Tools screen 001 Toner Name Setting Black 008 Paste Name 011 Staple Std 1 012 Staple Std 2 013 Staple St...

Page 662: ...g 1 Default 00000000 Do not change Netfiles Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 002 Setting 2 Adjusts the debug program modesetting Bit7 5682 mmseg log setting 0 Date Hour Minute Second 1 Minute Second Msec 0 to 6 Not used 5844 USB Transfer Rate 001 Sets the speed for USB data transmission Full Speed Auto Change Vendor ID 002 Sets the vendor ID Ini...

Page 663: ...tandardization mode 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 Disable 1 Level 1 2 Level 2 006 PnP Model Name Specifies PnP name for USB device 007 PnP Serial Number Specifies PnP serial number for USB device 100 Notify Unsupport Displays or does not display USB unsupport message 0 or 1 1 0 Not displayed Delivery Server Setting CTL 5845 Provides items for delivery server settings FTP Port No 0 to 65535 3670 1 step 001 Set...

Page 664: ...e computer designated to function as the secondary delivery server of Scan Router This SP allows only the setting of the IP address without reference to the DNS setting Delivery Server Model 0 to 4 0 1 step 009 Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I O device 0 Unknown 1 SG1 Provided 2 SG1 Package 3 SG2 Provided 4 SG2 Package Delivery Svr Capability 0 to 255 0 1 step C...

Page 665: ... Primary DFU 013 This is used for the scan router program Server Port Number Primary DFU 014 This is used for the scan router program Server URL Path Primary DFU 015 This is used for the scan router program Server Scheme Secondary DFU 016 This is used for the scan router program Server Port Number Secondary DFU 017 This is used for the scan router program Server URL Path Secondary DFU 018 This is ...

Page 666: ... and on Maximum Entries 2000 to 20000 2000 1 step 003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle If a value smaller than the present value is set the UCS managed data is cleared and the data excluding user code information is displayed Delivery Server Retry Timer 0 to 255 0 1 step 006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery server ...

Page 667: ... users Procedure 1 Turn the machine off 2 Install a new HDD 3 Turn the machine on 4 The address book and its initial data are created on the HDD automatically 5 However at this point the address book can be accessed by only the system administrator or key operator 6 Enter the SP mode and do SP5846 041 After this SP executes successfully any user can access the address book 043 Addr Book Media Disp...

Page 668: ...etes only the files that were uploaded from this machine This feature does not work if the card is write protected After you do this SP go out of the SP mode and then turn the power off Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stops flashing Search Option 060 This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search options for the UCS local address book Bit Meaning 0 Checks both upper lower case ...

Page 669: ...n mode 0 to 65535 3671 1 step 094 Encryption Stat Shows the status of the encryption function for the address book data Resolution Reduction 5847 5847 002 through 5847 006 changes the default settings of image data sent externally by the Net File page reference function 0 to 2 1 5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files controlled by NetFile Repository refers to jobs to be pri...

Page 670: ...100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded The default is equal to 1 gigabyte 002 Acc Ctrl Repository only Lower 4 Bits 0000 No access control 0001 Denies access to DeskTop Binder 003 Acc Ctrl Doc Svr Print Lower 4 Bits 004 Acc Ctrl User Directory Lower 4 Bits 009 Acc Ctrl Job Control Lower 4 Bits 011 Acc Ctrl Device Management Lower 4 Bits 021 Acc Ctrl Delivery Lower 4 Bits 022 Ac...

Page 671: ...Date 5849 Displays or prints the installation date of the machine 001 Display The Counter Clear Day has been changed to Installation Date or Inst Date 002 Switch to Print Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout for the total counter 0 to 1 1 0 No Print 1 Print 003 Total Counter Displays the total count from the day set with SP5849 001 0 to 9999 9999 Address Book Functio...

Page 672: ...ta via the local port IEEE 1284 during a remote ROM update This setting is reset to zero after the machine is cycled off and on Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable 0 to 1 1 0 Not allowed 1 Allowed 5857 Save Debug Log CTL On Off 1 ON 0 OFF 0 OFF 1 ON 001 Switches the debug log feature on and off The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on Targ...

Page 673: ...ee Space on SD Card 014 Copy SD to SD Latest 4 MB 015 Copy SD to SD Latest 4 MB Any Key 016 Make HDD Debug 017 Make SD Debug Debug Save When 5858 These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination selected by SP5857 002 SP5858 003 stores one SC specified by number 001 Engine SC Error 0 OFF 1 ON Stores SC codes generated by copier engine errors 002 Controller S...

Page 674: ... on the controller board 9999999 to 9999999 1 5860 SMTP POP3 IMAP4 Partial Mail Receive Timeout 020 1 to 168 72 1 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time MDN Response RFC2298Compliance 021 Determines whether RFC2298compliance is switched on fo...

Page 675: ...set the SMTP certification method directly However this SP can be used only after SP5860 003 has been set to 1 On Bit0 LOGIN Bit1 PLAIN Bit2 CRAM_MD5 Bit3 DIGEST_MD5 Bit4 to Bit 7 Not Used S MIME MIME Header Settings 026 Selects the MIME header type of an e mail sent by S MIME 0 to 2 0 1 0 Microsoft Outlook Express standard 1 Internet Draft standard 2 RFC standard E Mail Report 5866 This SP contro...

Page 676: ...er switch after the Initiralize 003 and Writing 001 have been done SD Card Appli Move 5873 Allows you to move applications from one SD card another 001 Move Exec Executes the move from one SD card to another 002 Undo Exec This is an undo function It cancels the previous execution SC Auto Reboot 5875 This SP determines whether the machine reboots automatically when an SC error occurs Note The reboo...

Page 677: ...lling Data Overwrite Security Unit 001 Data Overwrite Security Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit Touch EXECUTE on the operation panel Then cycle the machine off on 002 HDD Encryption Enables the Copy Data Security unit Touch EXECUTE on the operation panel Then cycle the machine off on Fixed Phase Block Erasing 5881 Touch EXECUTE on the operation panel Then erase all the fixed phase block 58...

Page 678: ...SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 lower slot The operation stores The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER The file is saved as a text file txt prefixed with the number of the machine 1 Insert the SD card in SD card Slot 2 lower slot 2 Select SP5887 then touch EXECUTE 3 Touch Execute in the message when you are prompted 5888 Personal Informatio...

Page 679: ... 1 PM registers a double count for paper longer than 420 mm in the sub scan direction Plug Play Maker Model Name 5907 Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows Plug Play This information is stored in the NVRAM If the NVRAM is defective these names should be registered again After selecting press the Original Type key and key at the same time When the setting is completed the beepe...

Page 680: ...ction 5915 Displays whether the mechanical counter is installed in the machine 0 to 2 0 Not detected 1 Detected 2 Unknown 5952 Fact Adjust Mode Paper Size 001 Tray 1 Select a paper size for the tray 1 0 or 1 NA 1 Others 0 1 0 A4 1 81 2 x11 005 Tray 4 LCT Japan only 5959 006 Cover Sheet Copy Server Set Function 5967 Enables and disables the document server This is a security measure that prevents i...

Page 681: ...Board NIC 0 to 2 0 1 step 0 OFF 1 ON 2 ON Limited When the Function limitation is set On board NIC is limited only for the Remote or LDAP NT authentication Other network applications such as WebImageMonitor Remote or LDAP NT authentication are not available when this SP is set to 2 Even if you can change the initial settings of those network applications settings may not actually work 002 On Board...

Page 682: ...stration Front Adjusts the side to side registration for the front in ADF mode 3 to 3 0 0 1 mm 002 ADF S to S Registration Back Adjusts the side to side registration for the back in ADF mode 3 to 3 0 0 1 mm 003 ADF L Edge Registration Front Adjusts the vertical registration for the front in ADF mode 5 to 5 0 0 1 mm 004 ADF L Edge Registration Back Adjusts the vertical registration for the back in ...

Page 683: ...ges for the back 5 to 5 1 0 1 mm 6007 ADF Input Check See p 4 255 ADF Input Check SP6007 in the Input Output Check section 6008 ADF Output Check See p 4 256 ADF Output Check SP6008 in the Input Output Check section 6009 DF Free Run Performs an ADF free run in duplex original mode 6010 Stamp Position Adj Adjust the position of Finished stamp 5 to 5 0 0 1 mm 6016 Original Size Determination Priority...

Page 684: ... 0 Delay skew correction only for small originals 1 Delay skew correction for all originals regardless of size May reduce the scanning speed of the ADF 6101 Punch Hole Position Adjustment Adjusts the punch hole positions in the direction of paper feed NA North America JPN Japan EU Europe NEU Northern Europe Scandinavia 001 JPN EU 2 Hole 002 JPN NA 3 Hole 003 EU 4 Hole 004 NEU 4 Hole 005 NA 2 Hole ...

Page 685: ...e Adj This SP corrects punch hole alignment by correcting the skew of each sheet To do this it adjusts the amount of time the finisher entrance roller remains off while the exit roller of the machine remains on This buckles the leading edge of the sheet slightly against the finisher entrance roller while it remains off 001 A3 SEF 5 to 5 0 0 25 mm 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF 005 B5 SEF 006 B5 ...

Page 686: ...finisher 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF 005 B5 SEF 006 B5 LEF 007 DLT SEF 008 LG SEF 009 LT SEF 010 LT LEF 011 12 x 18 012 Other 0 to 1 0 1 0 No adjustment Quickly restores the default setting if you forget what the other settings do 0 Paper stops for skew correction 1 Paper does not stop 6105 Jogger Fence Fine Adjust This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the side...

Page 687: ...the positions of the jogger fences when the pages are aligned jogged horizontally in the optional output jogger unit The jogger fences close in on the sides of the stack on the paper tray These side fences move in and out perpendicular to the direction of paper feed 1 5 to 1 5 0 0 5 mm The higher the setting the narrower the jogger span and the smaller the gaps between the fences and the edges of ...

Page 688: ...e stapling done by the corner stapler of the finisher This SP shifts the staple position forward and back across the direction of paper feed Use the key to toggle between and A larger value shifts the stapling position to shift forward A smaller value shifts the stapling position backward The settings are done for each paper size 3 5 to 3 5 0 0 5 mm 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF 005 ...

Page 689: ... 006 LG SEF 007 LT SEF 008 12 x 18 009 Other 3 to 3 0 2 mm Value Shifts staple position toward the crease Value Shifts staple position away from the crease 6114 Folding Number A3 SEF 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 B5 SEF This SP sets the number of times the folding rollers are driven forward and reverse to sharpen the crease of a folded booklet before it exits the folding unit of the Booklet...

Page 690: ...the number of sheets sent to the pre stack tray With this SP set to the default 3 3 sheets are sent to the pre stack tray When the 4th sheet feeds the 4th sheet and 3 sheets from the pre stack tray are sent to the stapling tray together Note You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick paper 0 to 4 3 1 0 None 1 1 sheet 2 2 sheets 3 3 sheets 4 4 sheets 6118 Jogge...

Page 691: ...3 Free Run 3 VIC Packing Mode Before you move the finisher to a new location do this SP When you switch on the machine after you moved it the finisher automatically goes to the ready condition 6121 Finisher Input Check Finisher 1 Finisher D373 D374 See p 4 258 Finisher 1 Input Check SP6121 D373 D374 in the Input Output Check section 6122 Finisher Input Check Finisher 2 Finisher D460 See p 4 263 Fi...

Page 692: ...the folding position when paper is stapled and folded in the D373Booklet Finisher 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 B5 SEF 005 DLT SEF 006 LG SEF 007 LT SEF 008 12 x18 SEF 009 Custom Size 3 to 3 0 0 2 mm Value Shifts staple position toward the crease Value Shifts staple position away from the crease 6127 Staple Jogging Times Finisher D460 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF Touch 1 1 Ti...

Page 693: ...ght Sensor 005 SortTray Door Switch 006 SortTray Spare Sensor Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes 6251 Finisher Output Check 001 SortTray Transport Motor Continuous 002 SortTray Transport Motor 1 Operation 003 SortTray Shift Tray Motor 1 Operation 004 SortTray Tray Lift Motor Up 005 SortTray Tray Lift Motor Down 006 SortTray Tray Lift Motor 1 Operation ...

Page 694: ...urposes 6300 Z Fold Position Adjustment Finisher D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 Other 2 to 40 2 1 mm 6301 Fine Adjust Z Fold Finisher D454 001 1st Fold A3 SEF 002 1st Fold B4 SEF 003 1st Fold A4 SEF 004 1st Fold DLT SEF 005 1st Fold LG SEF 006 1st Fold LT SEF 007 1st Fold 12 x18 008 1st Fold Other 009 2nd Fold A3 SEF 010 2nd Fold B4 SEF 4 to ...

Page 695: ... 6309 Fold Unit D454 Input Check See p 4 266 Finisher 3 Input Check SP6309 in the Input Output Check section 6310 Fold Unit D454 Output Check See p 4 267 Finisher 3 Output Check SP6310 in the Input Output Check section 6311 Fold Unit D454 Free Run 001 Free Run 1 002 Free Run 2 003 Free Run 3 004 Free Run 4 6312 Fine Adjust Z Fold 1 D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm ...

Page 696: ...EF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 8 Kai 019 Other 6313 Fine Adjust Z Fold 2 D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 8 Kai 019 Other 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm 6314 FM2 Equal Halves Fold Fine Adj D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm ...

Page 697: ...x18 008 8 Kai 009 B5 SEF 010 13 x19 2 011 13 x19 012 12 6 x19 2 013 12 6 x18 5 014 13 x18 015 SRA3 016 SRA4 017 226x310 018 310x432 019 Other 6315 FM3 Equal 3rds Fold1 Fine Adj D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 8 Kai 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm ...

Page 698: ... Other 6316 FM3 Equal 3rds Fold2 Fine Adj D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 8 Kai 009 B5 SEF 019 Other 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm 6317 FM4 3rds 1 Flap In Fold1 Fine Adj D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 8 Kai 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm ...

Page 699: ... 1 Flap In Fold2 Fine Adj D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 8 Kai 009 B5 SEF 019 Other 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm 6319 FM5 4ths V Center Fold1 Fine Adj D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 8 Kai 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm ...

Page 700: ...ther 6320 FM5 4ths V Center Fold2 Fine Adj D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 8 Kai 009 B5 SEF 019 Other 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm 6321 FM6 4ths 2 Flaps In Fold1 Fine Adj D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 008 8 Kai 009 B5 SEF 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm ...

Page 701: ...Fold2 Fine Adj D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 008 8 Kai 009 B5 SEF 019 Other 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm 6323 FM6 4ths 2 Flaps In Fold3 Fine Adj D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 8 Kai 009 B5 SEF 019 Other 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm ...

Page 702: ...er Fence Position Adjust D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 8 Kai 009 B5 SEF 019 Other 2 to 2 0 0 5 mm 6325 Registration Buckle Adjust D454 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 DLT SEF 005 LG SEF 006 LT SEF 007 12 x18 008 8 Kai 009 B5 SEF 019 Other 4 to 2 0 1 mm ...

Page 703: ...flow Sn 1 004 Paper Detect Sn 2 005 Vertical Transport Sn2 Bin3 006 Paper Overflow Sn 2 007 Paper Detect Sn 3 008 Paper Overflow Sn 3 009 Paper Detect Sn 4 010 Vertical Transport Sn3 Bin5 011 Paper Overflow Sn 4 012 Paper Detect Sn 5 Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes 013 Paper Overflow Sn 5 014 Paper Detect Sn 6 015 Vertical Transport Sn4 Bin7 016 Pap...

Page 704: ...24 Door Open Switch 6351 Mail Box Output Check 001 Vertical Transport Motor 002 Junction Gate SOL 1 003 Turn Gate SOL 1 004 Turn Gate SOL 2 005 Turn Gate SOL 3 006 Turn Gate SOL 4 007 Turn Gate SOL 5 008 Turn Gate SOL 6 009 Turn Gate SOL 7 010 Turn Gate SOL 8 Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes 6352 Mail Box Free Run 001 Free Run 1 6450 Cover Feeder Siz...

Page 705: ...k 001 Paper Feed Cover Sensor 0 to 1 0 1 002 Bottom Plate HP Sensor 0 to 1 0 1 003 Paper Near End Sensor 0 to 1 0 1 004 Paper Set Sensor 0 to 1 0 1 005 Bottom Plate HP Sensor 0 to 1 0 1 006 Grip Sensor 0 to 1 0 1 007 Guide Plate Set Sensor 0 to 1 0 1 008 Exit Sensor 0 to 1 0 1 009 Paper Set Sensor 0 to 1 0 1 010 Width Sensor 1 0 to 1 0 1 011 Width Sensor 2 0 to 1 0 1 012 Width Sensor 3 0 to 1 0 1 ...

Page 706: ...software However assurance that mechanical performance can be guaranteed is required before changing the setting to increase the staple load for more than the maximum in the feed exit specifications Raising this setting without quality assurance could damage the machine 001 0 to 50 Initial 0 0 to 50 0 1 002 0 to 50 Initial 0 0 to 50 0 1 Punch Function Enabled Z Fold 6890 Switch Z Folding OFF and O...

Page 707: ...ng intermittent shading 0 to 60 10 1 004 Interval 1 time Set the interval from interval 1 to interval 2 0 to 60 7 1 SP7xxx Data Logs 7001 Main Motor Operation Time 001 Displays the total drum rotation time Total SC Counter 7401 Displays the total number of SCs logged SC History 7403 Displays the latest 10 service call codes 001 Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest ...

Page 708: ...e a jam could have occurred These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate These are jams when the paper does not activate the sensor Paper late error Paper failed to arrive at prescribed time Paper lag error Paper failed to leave at prescribed time 001 At Power On 003 1st Paper Feed SN Late 004 2nd Paper Feed SN Late 005 3rd Paper Feed SN Late 006 4th Paper Feed SN Late 008 1st Vert...

Page 709: ...sport SN 2 Late 022 Duplex Transport SN 3 Late 023 Duplex Exit SN Late 024 LCT Relay SN Late 034 By pass Paper Feed SN Late 045 Sort Tray Paper Exit SN Late 046 Sort Tray Tray Lift Motor 047 Sort Tray Shift Tray Motor 053 1st Paper Feed SN Lag 054 2nd Paper Feed SN Lag 055 3rd Paper Feed SN Lag 056 4th Paper Feed SN Lag 058 1st Vertical Transport SN Lag 059 2nd Vertical Transport SN Lag 060 3rd Ve...

Page 710: ...ransport SN 3 Lag 084 By pass Paper Feed SN Lag 095 Sort Tray Paper Exit SN Lag 101 Finisher Entrance Sensor 102 Finisher Proof Tray Exit Sensor 103 Finisher Exit Sensor 104 Finisher Staple Entrance Sensor 105 Finisher Exit After Jogging 106 Finisher Corner Stapling 109 Finisher Shift Tray Motor 110 Finisher Jogger Fence Motor 111 Finisher Shift Roller Motor 112 Finisher Stapler Shift Motor 113 Fi...

Page 711: ...r Saddle Stapling 128 Finisher Paper Folding 129 Finisher Shift Tray Motor 130 Finisher Jogger Fence Motor 131 Finisher Shift Roller Motor 132 Finisher Stapler Shift Motor 133 Finisher Stapler Motor 134 Finisher Folder Plate Motor 135 Finisher Feed Out Belt Motor 136 Finisher Paper Punch Motor 151 Fin Entrance Sensor 152 Fin Proof Tray Exit Sn 153 Fin Shift Exit Sn 154 Fin Stapler Exit 155 Fin Pre...

Page 712: ...ear 165 Fin Shift Motor 166 Fin Drag Drive Motor 167 Fin Shift Tray Jogger Motor 168 Fin Shift Tray Jogger Retraction Motor 169 Fin Exit Guide Motor 170 Fin Staple Hammer Motor 171 Fin Stapler Movement Motor 172 Fin Stapler Rotation Motor 173 Fin Stack Feed Out Belt Motor 174 Fin Punch Motor 175 Fin Top Fence Motor 176 Fin Bottom Fence Motor 197 GBC Jam Reset 198 Plockmatic Jam 199 GBC Jam 201 Mai...

Page 713: ...ns where an original jam could have occurred These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate 001 At Power On 003 Skew Correction Sensor On 004 Registration Sensor On 005 Original Exit Sensor On 006 Registration Sensor On 007 Original Exit Sensor On 053 Skew Correction Sensor Off 054 Registration Sensor Off 055 Original Exit Sensor Off 056 Registration Sensor Off 057 Original Exit Sens...

Page 714: ...F 172 HLT SEF 255 Others Displays the total number of jams by paper size 7507 Plotter Jam History 001 Last 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 Displays the copy jam history the most recent 10 jams Sample Display CODE 007 SIZE 05h TOTAL 0000334 DATE Mon Mar 15 11 44 50 2000 where CODE is the SP7504 number see above SIZE is the ASAP paper size c...

Page 715: ...inal jam history of the transfer unit in groups of 10 starting with the most recent 10 jams Display contents are as follows CODE is the SP7 505 number SIZE is the paper size code in hex See Paper Size Hex Codes below TOTAL is the total jam error count SP7 003 DATE is the date the previous jam occurred 001 Last 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest...

Page 716: ...ode hex A4 LEF 05 B4 SEF 8D A5 LEF 06 B5 SEF 8E B5 LEF 0E DLT SEF A0 LT LEF 26 LG SEF A4 HLT LEF 2C LT SEF A6 A3 SEF 84 HLT SEF AC A4 SEF 85 Others FF A5 SEF 86 7509 Paper Jam Loc Fold Unit 046 Paper Feed Late 047 Paper Feed Lag 048 Pressure Timing SN Late 049 Pressure Timing SN Lag 050 Contact Timing SN Late 051 Contact Timing SN Lag 052 2nd Stopper Motor Late 053 2nd Stopper Motor Lag 054 Paper ...

Page 717: ...ntrance SN Late 097 Entrance SN Lag 098 Top Tray Exit SN Late 099 Top Tray Exit SN Lag 100 Horizontal Path Exit SN Late 101 Horizontal Path Exit SN Lag 102 1st Stopper HP SN Late 103 1st Stopper HP SN Lag 104 2nd Stopper HP SN Late 105 2nd Stopper HP SN Lag 106 3rd Stopper HP SN Late 107 3rd Stopper HP SN Lag 108 Skew Correction Jam 109 Folded Paper Path Jam 111 Entrance JG Motor Jam 112 Fold JG M...

Page 718: ...9 Jogger Fence Motor Jam 120 Positioning Roller Motor Jam 121 Direct Send JG Motor Jam 122 FM6 Pawl Motor Jam 7617 Parts PM Counter Display 001 Normal 002 Document Feed 7618 Parts PM Counter Reset Japan Only 001 Normal Clears the counter of SP7617 001 002 Document Feed Clears the counter of SP7617 002 Display PM Count 7621 0 to 99999999 Clear PM Count 7622 This SP clears the PM counts for the comp...

Page 719: ...999 7627 Pg Count History Latest 3 0 to 99999999 001 Developer 002 Hot Roller 003 Pressure Roller 004 Hot Roller Bearings 005 Pressure Roller Bearings 006 Hot Roller Strippers 007 Cleaning Roller 008 Cleaning Roller Bearings 009 Web Roll 010 Web Cleaning Roller 011 Web Bushings 012 Development Filter 013 Toner Recycling Unit 014 Pressure Release Filter 015 Charge Corona Wire 016 Grid Plate ...

Page 720: ...e Filter 023 ADF Pick up Roller 024 ADF Feed Belt 025 ADF Separation Roller 026 Feed Roller Tray1 027 Pick up Roller Tray1 028 Separation Roller Tray1 029 Feed Roller Tray2 030 Pick up Roller Tray2 031 Separation Roller Tray2 032 Feed Roller Tray3 033 Pick up Roller Tray3 034 Separation Roller Tray3 035 Feed Roller Tray4 036 Pick up Roller Tray4 037 Separation Roller Tray4 038 Feed Roller LCT 039 ...

Page 721: ...Clear the PM counter of all the PM parts that exceed the timing of exchanging Clear PM Counter Reset All Counts 002 Clear all the PM counters 7801 Displays the ROM version numbers of the main machine and connected peripheral devices 005 ROM No ADF 007 ROM No Finisher 009 ROM No Bank 010 ROM No LCT 011 ROM No Mail Box 020 ROM No Cover Interposer 024 ROM No Capacitaotr JPN only 025 ROM No Holding Un...

Page 722: ...counter SC Jam Counter Reset 7807 Resets the SC and jam counters To reset press 1 This SP does not reset the jam history counters SP7 507 SP7 508 MF Error Counter Japan Only 7826 Displays the number of counts requested of the card key counter 001 Error Total A request for the count total failed at power on This error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected 002 Error Staple The reque...

Page 723: ...Clear Pixel Coverage Data 7834 Push EXECUTE to clear the coverage data 001 Last Average 002 Toner Bottles In Use 003 Page Counts 2 Prev Toner Bottles 004 Pixel Coverage Clear Total Memory Size 7836 Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board 7852 DF Glass Dust Check 001 Dust Detection Counter 0 to 65535 0 1 002 Dust Counter Clear Counter 0 to 65535 0 1 003 Dust Detection Counter Ba...

Page 724: ... percentage 001 Developer 002 Hot Roller 003 Pressure Roller 004 Hot Roller Bearings 005 Pressure Roller Bearings 006 Hot Roller Srippers 007 Cleaning Roller 008 Cleaning Roller Bearings 009 Web Roll 010 Web Cleaning Roller 011 Web Bushings 012 Development Filter 013 Toner Recycling Unit 014 Pressure Release Filter 015 Charge Corona Wire 016 Grid Plate 017 Cleaning Pad 018 Cleaning Blade 019 Clean...

Page 725: ...ray1 027 Pick up Roller Tray1 028 Separation Roller Tray 1 029 Feed Roller Tray 1 030 Pick up Roller Tray 2 031 Separation Roller Tray 2 032 Feed Roller Tray 3 033 Pick up Roller Tray 3 034 Separation Roller Tray 3 035 Feed Roller Tray 4 036 Pick up Roller Tray 4 037 Separation Roller Tray 4 038 Feed Roller LCT 039 Pick up Roller LCT 040 Separation Roller LCT 041 Feed Belt Cover Feeder 042 Pick up...

Page 726: ...ument server SP8401 to SP8406 The number of pages printed from the document server SP8691 to SP8696 The number of pages sent from the document server Specifically the following questions can be answered How is the document server actually being used What application is using the document server most frequently What data in the document server is being reused Most of the SPs in this group are prefi...

Page 727: ...ser uses a file that is already on the document server Each counter will be discussed case by case O Other applications external network applications for example Refers to network applications such as Web Image Monitor Utilities developed with the SDK Software Development Kit will also be counted with this group in the future The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters forced by the necessit...

Page 728: ...Dup Duplex Duplex printing on both sides Emul Emulation FC Full Color FIN Post print processing i e finishing punching stapling etc Full Bleed No Margins GenCopy Generation Copy Mode GPC Get Print Counter For jobs 10 pages or less this counter does not count up For jobs larger than 10 pages this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 e g for an 11 page job the counter counts up 11...

Page 729: ... distributed evenly among the printers on the network and allows files to moved around combined and converted to different formats PC Personal Computer PGS Pages A page is the total scanned surface of the original Duplex pages count as two pages and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3 DLT counter SP is switched ON PJob Print Jobs Ppr Paper PrtJam Printer plotter Jam PrtPGS Print Pages R Red To...

Page 730: ...8 8001 T Total Jobs 8002 C Total Jobs 8004 P Total Jobs 8005 S Total Jobs 8006 L Total Jobs These SPs count the number of times each application is used to do a job 0 to 9999999 0 1 Note The L counter is the total number of times the other applications are used to send a job to the document server plus the number of times a file already on the document server is used These SPs reveal the number of...

Page 731: ...a stored on the document server only the L counter increments When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored the L counter increments When the customer prints a report user code list for example the O counter increments 8011 T Jobs LS 8012 C Jobs LS 8014 P Jobs LS 8015 S Jobs LS 8016 L Jobs LS 8017 O Jobs LS These SPs count the number of jobs stored to the document server by each applic...

Page 732: ... When a job already on the document server is printed with another application the L counter increments When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another application the S counter increments If the original was scanned from within document server mode then the L counter increments When images stored on the document server by a network application including Palm 2 are printed...

Page 733: ...ely The L counter counts the number of jobs scanned from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel When a stored copy job is sent from the document server the C counter increments When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2 are sent as an e mail the O counter increments 8051 T TX Jobs DesApl 8052 C TX Jobs DesApl 8054 P TX Jobs DesApl 8055 S TX J...

Page 734: ...Ps total finishing methods for scan jobs only The finishing method is specified by the application Note Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time L FIN Jobs 8066 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel The finishing method is specified from the print window within document server mod...

Page 735: ...nch is set for a print job the P counter increments See SP8064 6 806x 7 Other Reserved Not used T Jobs PGS 8071 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job regardless of which application was used C Jobs PGS 8072 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job P Jobs PGS 807...

Page 736: ...7x 6 6 to 10 Pages 807x 13 701 to 1000 Pages 807x 7 11 to 20 Pages 807x 14 1001 to Pages For example When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document server mode the appropriate L counter SP8076 0xx increments Interrupted jobs paper jam etc are counted even though they do not finish If a job is paused and re started it counts as one job If the finisher runs out of staples durin...

Page 737: ... the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be sent the job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router Scan to Email or Scan to PC or if one job is sent to more than one destination each send is counted sep...

Page 738: ...ed for sending the transmission counts as one job T Deliv Jobs PC 8151 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on a PC Scan to PC Note At the present time 8151 and 8155 perform identical counts S Deliv Jobs PC 8155 These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent with Scan to PC These counters count jobs not pages If the job is cancelled duri...

Page 739: ...ter all images of a job have been scanned Scans made in SP mode are not counted Examples If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored the S count is 4 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File button in the Copy mode window the C count is 6 and the L count is 6 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but no...

Page 740: ...Copy mode screen Reading user stamp data is not counted If a job is cancelled the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet the S count is 4 If pages are copied but not stored on the document server these counters do not change If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server the C count is 6 ...

Page 741: ...or duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1 If a jam occurs during the job recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting Also the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output Scan PGS Mode 8231 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the work load on the ADF 8231 1 Large Volume Selectab...

Page 742: ...e for all jobs regardless of which application was used 8242 C Scan PGS Org 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs 8245 S Scan PGS Org 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs 8246 L Scan PGS Org 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document ser...

Page 743: ...t is done for the last selected mode 8251 T Scan PGS ImgEdt These SPs show how many times Image Edit features have been selected at the operation panel for each application Some examples of these editing features are Erase Border Erase Center Image Repeat Centering Positive Negative 0 to 9999999 0 1 Note The count totals the number of times the edit features have been used A detailed breakdown of ...

Page 744: ...Scan PGS Stamp 8295 S Scan PGS Stamp 8296 L Scan PGS Stamp These SPs count the number of pages stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit 0 to 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen T Scan PGS Size 8301 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the tota...

Page 745: ...can PGS Size 8306 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 446 830x 1 A3 830x 2 A4 830x 3 A5 830x 4 B4 830x 5 B5 830x 6 DLT 830x 7 LG 830x 8 L...

Page 746: ...99dpi 831x 5 to 199dpi Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted 8381 T Total PrtPGS 8382 C Total PrtPGS 8384 P Total PrtPGS 8385 S Total PrtPGS 8386 L Total PrtPGS 8387 O Total PrtPGS These SPs count the number of pages printed by the customer The counter for the application used for storing the pages increments 0 to 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of pages stored fro...

Page 747: ...ese SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3 DLT and larger Note In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine 8401 T PrtPGS LS 8402 C PrtPGS LS 8404 P PrtPGS LS 8405 S PrtPGS LS 8406 L PrtPGS LS These SPs count the number of pages printed from the document server The counter for the application used to print the p...

Page 748: ...8424 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the printer application S PrtPGS Dup Comb 8425 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by the scanner application L PrtPGS Dup Comb 8426 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by binding and combine and n...

Page 749: ...9 9 pages on 1 side 9 Up 842x 11 16 16 pages on 1 side 16 Up 842x 12 Booklet 842x 13 Magazine These counts SP8421 to SP8427 are especially useful for customers who need to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption Pages that are only partially printed with the n Up functions are counted as 1 page Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Ma...

Page 750: ...e SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the print application L PrtPGS ImgEdt 8436 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode window at the operation panel with the three features below O PrtPGS ImgEdt 8437 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features bel...

Page 751: ...pages printed by the copy application P PrtPGS Ppr Size 8444 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the printer application S PrtPGS Ppr Size 8445 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner application L PrtPGS Ppr Size 8446 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages prin...

Page 752: ...T 844x 10 Full Bleed 844x 254 Other Standard 844x 255 Other Custom These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF PrtPGS Ppr Tray 8451 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station 8451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray 8451 2 Tray 1 Copier 8451 3 Tray 2 Copier 8451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit Option 8451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit Option 8451 6 Tray 5 LCT Option ...

Page 753: ...However these counts are based on output timing Blank sheets covers chapter covers slip sheets are also counted During duplex printing pages printed on both sides count as 1 and a page printed on one side counts as 1 C PrtPGS Ppr Type 8462 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application P PrtPGS Ppr Type 8464 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by paper...

Page 754: ...ly on the operation panel but performed remotely with an external network application capable of performing magnification adjustment as well Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also counted Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server are not counted Magnification adjustments performed autom...

Page 755: ...ication 0 to 9999999 0 1 T PrtPGS Emul 0 to 9999999 0 1 8511 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed P PrtPGS Emul 0 to 9999999 0 1 8514 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed 8514 1 RPCS 8514 2 RPDL 8514 3 PS3 8514 4 R98 8514 5 R16 8514 6 GL GL2 8514 7 R55 8514 8 RTIFF 8514 9 PDF 8514 10 PCL5e 5c 8514 11 PCL XL 8514 12 IPDL ...

Page 756: ...tions C PrtPGS FIN 8522 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application P PrtPGS FIN 8524 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print application S PrtPGS FIN 8525 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application L PrtPGS ...

Page 757: ... counted 8531 Staples This SP counts the amount of staples used by the machine 0 to 9999999 0 1 8541 T GPC Counter 8544 C GPC Counter Japan Only T Counter 8581 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output regardless of the application used In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report these counters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machin...

Page 758: ...hine the count is done for black only S S to Email PGS 8655 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e mail for the Scan application only Note This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines For this machine the count is done for black only The count for B W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD If the job is cancelle...

Page 759: ...black only S Deliv PGS Svr 8665 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by the Scan application Note This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines For this machine the count is done for black only The B W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router server If the job is canceled before s...

Page 760: ...he application that was used to store the pages is incremented 0 to 9999999 0 1 The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel Pages stored with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C counter Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count If several documents are merge...

Page 761: ... 8711 2 TIFF Multi Single 8711 3 PDF 8711 4 Other S Scan PGS Comp 8715 0 to 9999999 1 These SPs count the number of compressed pages scanned by the scan application counted by the formats listed below 8715 1 JPEG JPEG2000 8715 2 TIFF Multi Single 8715 3 PDF 8715 4 Other 8721 T Deliv PGS WSD Total number of pages sent via WSD WS Scanner for Web Services Devices 8725 S Deliv PGS WSD Total number of ...

Page 762: ...Dev Counter 8771 0 to 9999999 0 1 These SPs count the frequency of use number of rotations of the development rollers for black and other color toners Note For machines that do not support color the Black toner count is the same as the Total count Pixel Coverage Ratio 8781 This SP displays the number of toner bottles used The count is done based on the equivalent of 1 000 pages per bottle 8791 LS ...

Page 763: ...crements of 10 10 steps This SP is expanded for color MFP and color LP machines For this machine the count is done for black only 8851 Toner Coverage 0 10 0 to 9999999 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black and other color toners 8851 1 K Black toner 8851 2 M Magenta toner Do not display for this machine 8851 3 C Cyan toner 8851 4 Y Yellow toner 8861 Toner Coverage 11 20 0 to 999...

Page 764: ...ount the percentage of dot coverage for black and other color toners 8871 1 K Black toner 8871 2 M Magenta toner Do not display for this machine 8871 3 C Cyan toner 8871 4 Y Yellow toner 8881 Toner Coverage 31 0 to 9999999 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black and other color toners 8881 1 K Black toner 8881 2 M Magenta toner Do not display for this machine 8881 3 C Cyan toner ...

Page 765: ...useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards 8941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time Does not include time while controller is saving data to HDD while engine is not operating 8941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating Includes time while controller saves data to HDD Does not include time spent in Energy Save Low Power or O...

Page 766: ...n time due to toner end AddBook Register 8951 These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration 8951 1 User Code User code registrations 8951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations 8951 4 Group Group destination registrations 8951 6 F Code F Code box registrations 0 to 9999999 0 1 8951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations with the Program job settings feat...

Page 767: ...PCS PCL Printable area frame border 0 Disable 1 Enable bit 7 Enable The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the printable area 1001 Bit Switch Bit Switch 2 0 1 bit 0 DFU bit 1 DFU Applying a collation Type Shift Collate Normal Collate bit 2 A collation type shift or normal will be applied to all jobs that do not already have a Collate Type configured If 5 0 is enable...

Page 768: ...properly bit 4 DFU bit 5 DFU bit 6 DFU bit 7 DFU 1001 Bit Switch Bit Switch 3 0 1 bit 0 DFU bit 1 DFU PCL5e c Legacy HP compatibility 0 Disable 1 Enable bit 2 Enable Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000 HP8000 In other words the left margin defined in the job usually ESC r0A will be changed to ESC r1A bit 3 DFU bit 4 DFU bit 5 DFU bit 6 DFU 003 bit 7 DFU 1001 Bit Switch 004 ...

Page 769: ... used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a job is PS data or not Pattern3 includes most PS commands Pattern1 A small number of PS tags and headers Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000 jobs Disable 100 Enable 1000 bit 4 Enable Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via Job Type settings to 1000 The default is 100 Face up output Disable Enable bit 5 Enable...

Page 770: ...uplex unit This could result in problems with letterhead pre printed pages Only affects pages specified as Letterhead paper 1001 Bit Switch 006 Bit Switch 6 DFU 1001 Bit Switch Bit Switch 7 0 1 Print path Disable Enable bit 0 Enable Simplex pages in mixed simplex duplex PS PCL5 jobs only and the last page of an odd paged duplex job PS PCL5 PCL6 are always routed through the duplex unit Not having ...

Page 771: ...ithout a user code will be printed even if usercode authentication is enabled Color jobs will not be printed without a valid user code bit 4 DFU bit 5 DFU bit 6 DFU 008 bit 7 DFU 1003 Clear setting 001 Initialize Printer System Initializes the settings in the printer feature settings of UP mode 003 Delete Program DFU Print Summary 1004 Touch Execute to print the printer summary sheets 1005 Display...

Page 772: ...d Document server cannot be used 4 1 4 SCANNER SP TABLES 1001 Scan Nv Version Displays the scanner firmware version stored in NVRAM in a 9 digit format Func Name_Model Name_History No Compression Type 1004 Selects the compression type for binary picture processing 1 to 3 1 1 1 MH 2 MR 3 MMR Erase Margin Remote Scan 1005 Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image If the machine has ...

Page 773: ...tches the Clear Light PDF display off on 0 or 1 0 1 0 Display ON 1 Display OFF Org Count Display 1011 This SP codes switches the original count display on off 0 or 1 0 1 0 OFF no display 1 ON count displays User Info Release 1012 This SP code sets the machine to release or not release the following items at job end Destination E mail Folder CS Sender name Mail Text Subject line File name 0 or 1 1 ...

Page 774: ...Compression Ratio 5 LowLvl2 Quality Image 5 to 95 95 1 Compression ratio of ClearLight PDF 2024 Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be selected at the operation panel 2024 1 Compression Ratio Normal 5 to 95 25 1 step 2024 2 Compression Ratio High CTL 5 to 95 20 1 step 4 2 INPUT OUTPUT CHECK 4 2 1 COPIER INPUT CHECK SP5803 This procedure allows you to test...

Page 775: ...each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in the table below SP5803 001 Paper Feed 1 Bit Description Reading 0 1 7 Rear Side Fence Close Sensor Activated Deactivated 6 Rear Side Fence Open Sensor Activated Deactivated 5 Front Side Fence Close Sensor Activated Deactivated 4 Front Side Fence Open Sensor Activated Deactivated 3 Near End Sensor see tables below 2 Paper Height 1 Sensor 1 P...

Page 776: ...h 2 Not used 1 Not used 0 Not used 1500 sheets 1000 sheets 400 sheets 70 sheets bit 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 bit 2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 bit 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 bit 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 SP5803 003 Paper Feed 3 Reading Bit Description 0 0 7 3rd Paper Size Switch 6 3rd Paper Size Switch 5 3rd Paper Size Switch 4 3rd Paper Size Switch 3 3rd Paper Size Switch 2 Not used 1 Not used See Paper Size Tables Below ...

Page 777: ...51 2 x 81 2 SEF 81 2 x 51 2 LOW LOW LOW HIGH LOW 81 2 x 51 2 LEF 8 x 101 2 LOW LOW LOW LOW HIGH 8 x 101 2 SEF 7 x 101 2 HIGH LOW LOW LOW LOW 71 4 x 101 2 SEF 8 x 13 HIGH HIGH LOW LOW LOW 8 x 13 SEF HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH LOW In the user tool setting Universal Tray Size Detection EU ASIA models Paper Size Switch Setting LOW pressed Panel Display A3 SEF LOW HIGH HIGH HIGH HIGH A3 SEF 81 4 x 13 LOW LOW ...

Page 778: ...ption Reading 0 1 7 1st Paper Height Less than 30 30 or more 6 Japan only 5 2nd Paper Height Less than 30 30 or more 4 3rd Paper Height Less than 30 30 or more 3 1st Paper Near End Near End Not Near End 2 Japan only 1 2nd Paper Near End Near End Not Near End 0 3rd Paper Near End Near End Not Near End SP5803 005 Paper Feed 5 Reading Bit Item 0 1 7 6 5 4 3 Japan Only 2 Right Tray Paper Sensor Presen...

Page 779: ...nsor Deactivated Activated 3 Japan only 2 Rear Fence Return Sensor Deactivated Activated 1 Left Tray Paper Sensor Paper present Paper not present 0 Right Tandem Tray Set Set Not set SP5803 007 Paper Feed 7 Bit Item 0 1 7 1st Paper Feed Sensor Present Not present 6 Japan Only 5 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Present Not present 4 3rd Paper Feed Sensor Present Not present 3 1st Vertical Transport Sensor Pres...

Page 780: ...Sensor Off On 6 Japan Only Off On 5 2nd Tray Lift Sensor Off On 4 3rd Tray Lift Sensor Off On 3 1st Paper End Sensor Paper No Paper 2 Japan Only Paper No Paper 1 2nd Paper End Sensor Paper No Paper 0 3rd Paper End Sensor Paper No Paper SP5803 009 Paper Feed 9 Reading Bit Description 0 1 7 Not used 6 Not used 5 Toner Overflow SW Switch not pressed Switch pressed 4 Toner Collection Bottle Set SW Swi...

Page 781: ...ing 0 1 7 Toner Collection Motor Sensor Deactivated Activated 6 Toner End Sensor Toner end Not toner end 5 Toner Collection Coil Sensor Deactivated Activated 4 Not used 3 Exit Unit Set Set Not set 2 Paper Exit Sensor Paper present Paper not present 1 Exit Unit Entrance Sensor Paper present Paper not present 0 Web End Sensor Not web end Web end SP5803 014 Duplex Bit Description Reading 0 1 7 Not us...

Page 782: ...er present Paper not present 2 Duplex Jogger HP Sensor Deactivated Activated 1 Duplex Inverter Sensor Paper not present Paper present 0 Duplex Entrance Sensor Paper not present Paper present SP5803 015 Lock Detection 1 Bit Description Reading 0 1 7 Key Card Set Set Not set 6 Development Motor Lock Not locked Locked 5 Fusing Exit Motor Lock Locked Not locked 4 Drum Motor Lock Not locked Locked 3 CP...

Page 783: ...ed Not locked 3 Not used 2 Not used 1 Not used 0 Not used SP5803 017 Registration Sensor Bit Description Reading 0 1 7 Not used 6 Not used 5 Front Door Open Open Closed 4 Copy Tray Full Sensor Not full Full 3 Guide Plate Position Sensor Closed Open 2 Relay Sensor Paper present Paper not present 1 By pass Paper End Sensor Paper present Paper not present 0 Registration Sensor Paper present Paper not...

Page 784: ...se Open 202 Scanner fan lock signal Rotation Locked 4 2 2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK SP5804 Motors keep turning in this mode regardless of upper or lower limit sensor signals To prevent mechanical or electrical damage do not keep an electrical component on for a long time 1 Open SP mode 5804 2 Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check Refer to the table on the next page 3 P...

Page 785: ...or 1 002 Feed Motor 2 003 Feed Motor 3 004 Feed Motor 4 005 By pass Feed Clutch 006 LCT Feed Motor 009 Pick up SOL 1 010 Pick up SOL 2 011 Pick up SOL 3 012 Pick up SOL 4 013 By pass Pick up SOL 014 LCT Pick up SOL 017 Reverse Release SOL 1 018 Reverse Release SOL 2 019 Reverse Release SOL 3 020 Reverse Release SOL 4 022 Tandem Connection Release SOL 023 Left Tandem Lock SOL 024 Tandem Transport M...

Page 786: ...ase SOL 041 Exit Junction SOL 043 Inverter Duplex Motor 044 Duplex Transport Motor 045 Duplex Entrance Gate SOL 046 Inverter Jogger SOL 047 Duplex Transport CL 048 Duplex Jogger 052 Development Roller CL 053 Development Motor 054 Used Toner Motor 055 Web Motor 056 Toner Bottle Motor 057 Transfer Separation SOL 062 Quenching Lamp 063 Charge Corona 064 Grid Wire 067 Development Bias 069 Transfer Bia...

Page 787: ...0 FIN Juction SOL Proof 081 FIN Juction SOL Stapler 082 FIN End Roller SOL 084 Total Counter 085 FIN Main Motor 1 086 FIN Main Motor 2 087 FIN Exit Motor 088 FIN Staple Motor 089 FIN Punch Motor 090 LD DC Lamp 092 FIN Tray Lift Motor 093 FIN Jogger Motor 094 FIN Staple Transport Motor 095 FIN Exhaust Motor 096 FIN Shift Motor 097 FIN Staple Slant Motor 098 Status Lamp Green ...

Page 788: ...u click Off to switch off the output check currently executing 6007 ADF Input Check Reading 0 Description 1 001 Original Length Sensor 1 B5 No paper Paper detected 002 Original Length Sensor 2 A4 No paper Paper detected 003 Original Length Sensor 3 LG No paper Paper detected 004 Original Width Sensor 1 No paper Paper detected 005 Original Width Sensor 2 No paper Paper detected 006 Original Width S...

Page 789: ... Sensor Not HP HP 022 Bottom Plate Posirion Sensor Not Correct Position Correct Position 4 2 4 ADF OUTPUT CHECK SP6008 1 Open SP mode SP6008 2 Select the SP number that corresponds to the component you wish to check Refer to the table below 3 Press On then press Off to test the selected item You cannot exit and close this display until you click Off to switch off the output check currently executi...

Page 790: ...Input Output Check SM Appendix 4 257 D062 D063 D065 D066 Appendix Service Program Mode Tables 009 Pick up Motor Forward 010 Bottom Plate Motor Reverse ...

Page 791: ...140 5 Staple Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6140 6 Shift HP Sensor Not HP HP 6140 7 Shift Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6140 8 Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor Not HP HP 6140 9 Paper Detection Sensor Staple Paper not detected Paper detected 6140 10 Paper Detection Sensor Shift Paper not detected Paper detected 6140 11 Paper Full Sensor 2000 Sheet Not Full Full 6140 12 Osci...

Page 792: ...cted 6140 22 Staple Leading Edge Detection Staple not detected Staple detected 6140 23 Punch Moving HP Sensor Not HP HP 6140 24 Punch Registration HP Sensor Not HP HP 6140 25 Punch Registratioin Detection Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected 6140 26 Punch Chad Full Sensor Not Full Full 6140 27 Punch HP Not HP HP 6140 28 Punch Selection DIPSW 1 See 1 6140 29 Punch Selection DIPSW 2 See 1 6140 3...

Page 793: ...140 39 Saddle Full Sensor Rear Paper not detected 2 Paper detected 2 6140 40 Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation Front Not HP HP 6140 41 Saddle Stitch Detection Front Staple not detected Staple detected 6140 42 Saddle Stitch Leading Edge Detection Front Staple not detected Staple detected 6140 43 Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation Rear Not HP HP 6140 44 Saddle Stitch Detection Rear Staple not detected ...

Page 794: ...apan 1 0 Europe 0 1 North America 1 1 North Europe 2 Please refer to Lower Tray B804 Only in the Service Manual for the 2000 3000 Booklet Finisher 4 2 6 FINISHER 1 OUTPUT CHECK SP6124 6124 Finisher Output Check Finisher 1 Finisher D373 D374 001 Entrance Motor 002 Upper Feed Motor 003 Lower Feed Motor 004 Exit Motor 005 Knock Roller Motor 006 Shift Motor 007 Exit Guide Plate Open Close Motor 008 Tr...

Page 795: ...unction Gate Open Close Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes 021 Trailing Edge Fence Moving Motor 022 Saddle Stitch Staple Motor Front 023 Saddle Stitch Staple Motor Rear 024 Folder Plate Motor 025 Folder Roller Motor 026 Clamp Roller Motor 027 Punch Motor 028 Punch Moving Motor 029 Punch Registration Detection Motor 030 Exit Jogger Motor Front 031 Exit ...

Page 796: ...taple Exit Sensor 005 Tray Lower Sensor 006 Stack Feed out HP Sensor 007 Jogger HP Sensor 008 Shift HP Sensor 009 Stapler Moving HP Sensor 010 Staple HP Sensor 011 Staple Cartfidge Sensor 012 Staple Tray Paper Sensor 013 Door Sensor 014 Punch Unit Sensor 015 Punch HP1 Sensor 016 Punch Chad Full Sensor 017 Paper Detection Sensor Staple 018 Paper Detection Sensor Shift 019 Stapler Cartridge Set Sens...

Page 797: ...or 027 Stapler Sensor 028 Front Hold HP Sensor 029 Rear Hold HP Sensor 030 Knock Hold HP Sensor 031 Reverse Drive HP Sensor 032 Paper Sensor 033 Tray Lower Sensor 034 Punch HP 2 Sensor 035 Shift Jogger Sensor 036 Shift Jogger HP Sensor 037 Shift Jogger Release HP Sensor 038 Front Door Safety Switch 039 Top Fence HP Sensor 040 Bottom Fence HP Sensor 041 Lower Tray Full Sn Z Folded Paper ...

Page 798: ...Motor 009 Stapler Solenoid 010 Knock Roller Motor Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes See Finisher 2 Output Check SP6125 011 Stack Feed out Motor 012 Shift Motor 013 Staple Lift Motor 014 Staple Exit Motor 015 Exit Motor 016 Hold Motor 017 Pre stack Solenoid 018 Guide Solenoid 019 Stapler Release Solenoid 020 Front Hold Motor Turn on the electrical comp...

Page 799: ...PUT CHECK SP6309 6309 Fold Unit D454 Input Check 001 Entrance Sensor 002 Entrance JG HP Sensor 004 Registration Sensor 005 Dynamic Roller HP Sensor 006 Registration Roller HP Sensor 007 Fold Plate HP Sensor 008 Jogger Fence HP Sensorr 009 Positioning Roller HP Sensor 010 1st Stopper Paper Sensor 011 1st Stopper HP Sensor 012 2nd Stopper Paper Sensor 013 2nd Stopper HP Sensor 014 3rd Stopper Paper ...

Page 800: ...aper Sensor 025 Vertical Path Paper Sensor 026 Bypass Entrance Paper Sensor 027 Bypass Exit Paper Sensor 4 2 10 FINISHER 3 OUTPUT CHECK SP6310 6310 Fold Unit D454 Output Check 001 Horizontal Transport Motor 002 Top Tray Transport Motor 003 Top Tray Exit Motor 004 Dynamic Roller Transport Motor 005 Registration Roller Transport Motor 007 Entrance JG Motor 008 1st Stopper Motor 009 2nd Sopper Motor ...

Page 801: ...14 Jogger Fence Motor 015 Positioning Roller Motor 016 Direct Send JG Motor 017 FM6 Pawl Motor 018 1st Fold Motor 019 2nd Fold Motor 020 Crease Motor 021 Bypass JG Solenoid 022 Exit JG Solenoid 023 Top Tray JG Solenoid 024 LE Stop Pawl Solenoid 025 Reverse JG Solenoid Turn on the electrical components of the finisher individually for test purposes ...

Page 802: ... 2 1 0 Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DLT SEF DLT SEF LT LEF LT SEF LG SEF DLT SEF LT SEF LT LEF Change 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 x15 11 x15 US EXE LEF 8 x10 SEF F4 SEF 8K SEF 16K SEF 16K LEF Setting Procedure 1 Enter SP6016 2 Select the bit you would like to change and push the number key There are 8 bits from 7 bit to 0 bit Changed 1 Ù 0 For example if you would like Chinese model to detect Chinese paper size...

Page 803: ......

Page 804: ...D062 D063 D065 D066 SERVICE MANUAL Book 2 of 2 004778MIU ACCESSORIES ...

Page 805: ......

Page 806: ...D062 D063 D065 D066 SERVICE MANUAL BOOK 2 OF 2 ACCESSORIES ...

Page 807: ......

Page 808: ...D062 D063 D065 D066 SERVICE MANUAL Book 2 of 2 ACCESSORIES 004778MIU ...

Page 809: ......

Page 810: ...SION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION All product names domain names or product illustrations including desktop images used in this document are trademarks registered trademarks or the property of their respective companies They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for the benefit of such companies No such use or the use of any trade name or web site is inte...

Page 811: ......

Page 812: ...ation Users of this manual should be either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh Technical Training Program Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury damage to property or loss of warranty protection Ricoh Americas Corporation WARNING ...

Page 813: ......

Page 814: ...6001 SP 9060 9060sp D063 MP 7001 MP 7001SP LD370 LD370sp Aficio MP 7001 MP 7001 SP 9070 9070sp D065 MP 8001 MP 8001SP LD380 LD380sp Aficio MP 8001 MP 8001 SP 9080 9080sp D066 MP 9001 MP 9001SP LD390 LD390sp Aficio MP 9001 MP 9001 SP 9090 9090sp DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV NO DATE COMMENTS 06 2009 Original Printing ...

Page 815: ......

Page 816: ...LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B473 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 817: ......

Page 818: ...ID 3 1 4 PAPER END SENSOR UPPER COVER SWITCHES 4 1 5 TRAY MOTOR 5 1 6 PAPER STACK SENSOR 5 1 7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT 6 2 DETAILS 7 2 1 OVERVIEW 7 2 1 1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS 7 2 1 2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT 9 2 2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION 10 2 2 1 STARTING PAPER FEED 10 2 2 2 FEED AND SEPARATION 11 2 3 PAPER LIFT 12 2 4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION 14 2 5 PAPER END DETECTION 15 ...

Page 819: ......

Page 820: ...1 B473 Large Capacity Tray B473 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 EXTERNAL COVERS A Transport cover B Transport cover hinge x 1 C Rear cover x 4 D Top cover x 1 E Right cover x 2 F Front cover x 3 B473R001 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 821: ...D SEPARATION ROLLERS B473 2 SM 1 2 PICK UP FEED SEPARATION ROLLERS A Open the transport cover B Bracket cover x 2 C Pick up roller x 1 D Feed roller x 1 E Separation roller x 1 B473R002 WMF B473R003 WMF C D E B A ...

Page 822: ...PICK UP SOLENOID SM 3 B473 Large Capacity Tray B473 1 3 PICK UP SOLENOID Rear cover x 4 Open the transport cover 1 2 Bracket cover 1 2 A Pick up solenoid x 2 x 1 B473R004 WMF A ...

Page 823: ...ER END SENSOR UPPER COVER SWITCHES B473 4 SM 1 4 PAPER END SENSOR UPPER COVER SWITCHES Open the top cover Right cover 1 1 A Paper end sensor x 1 B Upper cover switches 1 2 x 2 B473R005 WMF B473R006 WMF A B ...

Page 824: ... B473 Large Capacity Tray B473 1 5 TRAY MOTOR Rear cover 1 1 A Tray motor x 2 x 1 1 6 PAPER STACK SENSOR Disconnect the LCT from the machine A Sensor cover x 1 B Paper stack sensor x 1 B473R007 WMF B473R008 WMF A B A ...

Page 825: ...Sideways or LT sideways at the top B and bottom brackets C After changing the side fences to accept another paper size you must execute SP5959 005 Paper Type Tray 4 and select the paper size of the side fence positions For details see SP5959 in section 5 Service Tables of the B064 B065 manual B473R109 WMF A B C ...

Page 826: ...3 Feed Sensor 4 Feed Roller 5 Lift Sensor 6 Pick up Roller 7 Paper End Sensor 8 Paper Near End Sensor 9 Paper Height Sensor 1 10 Paper Height Sensor 2 11 Paper Tray 12 Paper Height Sensor 3 13 Paper Tray Motor 14 Low Limit Sensor 15 Tray Drive Belt 16 Feed Motor 17 Stack Sensor B473D001 WMF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 17 1 16 15 ...

Page 827: ...ft motor and timing belt raise and lower the paper tray Paper Size Detection The side fences cannot be adjusted by customers The paper size must be entered with SP5959 005 For details see SP5959 in section 4 Service Tables Paper Height Detection A feeler and four photointerrupters are used Paper End Detection A reflective sensor on the upper stay detects paper end ...

Page 828: ... B473 Large Capacity Tray B473 2 1 2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Pick up Roller 2 Separation Roller 3 Transport Rollers 4 Feed Roller 5 Feed Motor 6 Tray Motor 7 Tray Lift Shaft 8 Tray Drive Belt B473D003 WMF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 ...

Page 829: ...dard FRR system is used It consists of the pick up feed and separation rollers 2 2 1 STARTING PAPER FEED The feed motor A drives the transport rollers B The separation roller C which is free to rotate in the direction indicated by the arrow remains at rest B473D004 WMF A B C ...

Page 830: ...p roller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top of the stack The separation roller E in contact with the feed roller only allows one sheet out of the tray As soon as the paper feed sensor not shown detects the leading edge of the paper it switches off the pick up solenoid which raises the pick up roller The feed roller feeds the sheet to the registration roller This process is r...

Page 831: ...or lowers the tray and stops When the paper height sensor activates the tray motor lifts the tray After several sheets have been fed the paper level lowers the actuator G activates the lift sensor H and switches on the motor again The motor raises stack until the actuator de activates the lift sensor This cycle repeats to maintain the correct height of the stack until the end of the job B473D006 W...

Page 832: ...ottom plate moves down once again by 5 cm This allows the customer to replenish paper in convenient amounts and at the same position A lower limit sensor E triggered by an actuator on the bottom of the tray is also provided to stop the tray motor if the stack sensor should fail Summary The tray raises when The main power switch is turned on When the lift sensor switches on during copying The top c...

Page 833: ...l displays a message for each paper height until the actuator reaches the near end sensor then a message warns the user that the tray is nearly empty The table summarizes the relation between sensor detection and the number of sheets remaining in the stack Sensors Sheet Remaining Bars 1 Near end P Height 1 P Height 2 P Height 3 75 1 O 1500 2 P O 2500 3 P P O 3500 4 P P P O 1 The number of vertical...

Page 834: ...CTION The paper end sensor A monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the stack When the last sheet feeds the cutout B is exposed and the paper end sensor receives no reflected light from below because there is no paper and this signals paper end B473D111 WMF A B ...

Page 835: ......

Page 836: ...3000 SHEET FINISHER JOGGER UNIT PUNCH UNIT B478 B513 B531 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 837: ......

Page 838: ... SENSORS 11 3 5 1 STACK HEIGHT 1 2 AND EXIT GUIDE OPEN SENSOR 11 Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2 11 Exit Guide Open Sensor 11 3 5 2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR 12 Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor 12 Upper Tray Exit Sensor 12 3 5 3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR 13 3 5 4 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS 14 Entrance Sensor 14 Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 14 3 5 5 PRE STACK PAPER SENSOR 15 3 5...

Page 839: ...n 1 33 Rotation 2 33 6 5 STAPLER 34 6 6 FEED OUT 36 6 7 PAPER EXIT STACKING 37 6 8 SHIFT TRAY 38 6 8 1 OVERVIEW 38 Stand by Mode 38 6 8 2 SHIFT TRAY UP DOWN MOVEMENT 39 Sort Stack Mode Shift Mode 39 Staple Mode 39 6 8 3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION 40 6 9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE TO SIDE MOVEMENT 41 6 10 JAM CONDITIONS 42 6 11 PUNCH UNIT B531 OPTION 43 6 11 1 PUNCH UNIT DRIVE 43 6 11 2 PUNCH WASTE COLL...

Page 840: ...t Jogger Unit Punch Unit B513 B53131 1 INSTALLATION For details about installing the 3000 Sheet Finisher B478 please refer to the instructions you received with the instructions or the 1 Installation in the main machine service manual ...

Page 841: ...PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE B513 B531 2 SM 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE For details about the 3000 Sheet Finisher B478 PM table please refer to Section 2 Preventive Maintenance in the main Service Manual ...

Page 842: ...53131 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 3 1 DOOR AND COVER Front Door 1 Remove the front door screw A x 1 2 Remove the front door B Left Inner Cover 1 Remove the front door 2 Remove the left inner cover C x 1 Inner Cover 1 Remove the inner cover D x 3 B478R502 WMF B478R505 WMF B D A C ...

Page 843: ...EPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B513 B531 4 SM Side Table and Upper Tray 1 Remove the side table A x 2 Slide to the right to remove it 2 Click the release lever B and remove the upper tray C B478R503 WMF A B C ...

Page 844: ... cover C x 4 Rear Cover and Top Cover 1 Remove the upper tray See Side Table and Upper Tray 2 Remove the step screws D x 2 3 Remove the top cover E x 2 Slide to the right to remove 4 Remove the rear cover F x 2 Shift Tray 1 If you need to lower the shift tray support the bottom of the tray with your hand then pull the gear toward you G to release the tray and lower it 2 Remove the shift tray H x 4...

Page 845: ...REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B513 B531 6 SM 3 2 ROLLERS 3 2 1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER 1 Above the shift tray pull the roller mount A out 2 Remove the rollers B and C x 1 each B478R522 WMF A B C ...

Page 846: ...JUSTMENT SM 7 B513 B531 Output Jogger Unit Punch Unit B513 B53131 3 2 2 POSITIONING ROLLER 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the snap ring A 3 Release the rubber belt B 4 Replace the positioning roller C B478R506 WMF A B C ...

Page 847: ... connectors x 8 4 Remove the screw A and tension spring B for the tension bracket C and release the tension of the timing belt 5 Remove the pulley D and bushing E x 2 6 Remove the inner cover F x 1 7 Open the guide G then remove the alignment brush roller assembly H x 1 8 Remove the alignment brush roller I x 1 bushing x 1 front back B478R507 WMF B478R508 WMF B C E D F G A H I ...

Page 848: ...et B x 1 x 1 clamp x 1 5 Remove the front guide C x 1 spring x 1 NOTE When re installing make sure that the flat end of the shaft is against the plate 6 Remove the front panel D from the stays x 6 7 Remove the old belt E from the bottom center then the top NOTE 1 Make sure the ribbed side of the new belt and pawl F are facing down 2 Make sure the new belt is engaged at all three rollers B478R523 W...

Page 849: ...ont door 2 Pull out the jogger and stapler unit 3 Push both fences to the center 4 Remove the left jogger fence A x 1 5 Remove the right jogger fence B x 1 NOTE If the screws are difficult to remove or re attach remove the jogger fence belt and spring plate B478R525 WMF B A ...

Page 850: ...nd 2 1 Remove the top cover 3 1 2 Remove the left upper panel and left upper cover x 2 x 2 3 Remove the protector plate A x 1 4 Remove the sensor feeler B x 1 5 Remove the sensor bracket C x 1 6 Replace the stack height sensor 1 D x 1 or 2 E x 1 Exit Guide Open Sensor 1 Remove the sensor bracket F x 1 2 Replace the exit guide open sensor G x 1 B478R509 WMF G F C E D B A ...

Page 851: ...pper Tray Paper Limit Sensor 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove the sensor cover A x 2 3 Remove the sensor bracket B x 1 4 Replace the upper tray paper limit sensor C x 1 Upper Tray Exit Sensor 5 Remove the sensor bracket D x 1 6 Replace the upper tray exit sensor E x 1 B478R510 WMF C A D E B ...

Page 852: ...OR 1 Remove the top cover 2 Open the front door 3 Remove the inner cover 4 Release the upper exit guide springs A x 2 5 Disconnect the link B from the cam x 1 6 Remove the upper exit guide C x 1 x 1 7 Remove the guide stay D x 2 8 Replace the shift tray exit sensor E x 1 x 1 B478R512 WMF B478R511 WMF D A C A E B ...

Page 853: ...nce Sensor 1 Disconnect the finisher from the copier 2 Remove the sensor bracket A x 1 3 Replace the entrance sensor B x 1 x 1 Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the sensor bracket C x 1 3 Replace the stapler tray entrance sensor D x 1 x 1 B478R513 WMF B478R514 WMF B A D C ...

Page 854: ...ER SENSOR 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the main board A x 8 x all 3 Release the guide B x 2 4 Open the front door 5 Remove the left vertical transport guide C 6 Remove the middle vertical transport guide D x 1 7 Replace the pre stack paper sensor E x 1 B478R521 WMF B478R515 WMF B478R516 WMF A E D C B ...

Page 855: ...ASTE HOPPER SENSOR 1 Open the front door pull out the stapler unit then remove the rear cover 2 Remove the rear cover x 2 3 Remove the staple waste hopper A x 1 4 Remove the hopper holder B x 2 5 Replace the staple waste hopper sensor C x 1 B478R517 WMF B A C ...

Page 856: ...Unit B513 B53131 3 5 7 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN SENSORS 1 Remove the stapler unit See next page 2 Remove the stapler mount bracket A x 4 springs x 2 3 Replace the stapler rotation HP sensor B x 1 4 Replace the stapler return sensor C x 1 B478R519 WMF A C B ...

Page 857: ...USTMENT B513 B531 18 SM 3 6 STAPLER 1 Open the front door and pull out the staple tray 2 Remove the stapler unit harness cover A 3 Remove the stapler cover B x 1 x 2 4 Lift the stapler off of the pegs C B478R518 WMF B A C ...

Page 858: ...REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT SM 19 B513 B531 Output Jogger Unit Punch Unit B513 B53131 3 7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR 1 Remove the front door and rear cover 3 1 2 Shift motor A x 2 x 3 B478R531 WMF A ...

Page 859: ...door and all covers with the exception of the left lower cover and top cover labeled C and E NOTE Be sure to lower the shift tray by pulling the gear toward you The shift tray must be down 2 Remove the shift tray motor 3 7 3 Remove the left stay A x 3 4 Unhook the stay at top B 5 Remove the shift tray mounting plate C x 2 B478R526 WMF A B C ...

Page 860: ...isengage the end fence races C from the rollers D behind the fence 8 Remove the upper stay E x 4 9 Remove the lower stay F x 4 10 Remove the cover G x 4 11 Remove the stacking roller drag motor stay H x 3 x 4 NOTE Make sure the motor and sensor connectors are disconnected before removing B478R527 WMF B478R528 WMF A E F G H C D B ...

Page 861: ...SM 12 Remove the stacking motor bracket A bushing x 1 x 1 13 Remove the stacking motor B x 2 14 Remove the roller drag motor bracket C x 2 15 Remove return HP sensor D 16 Remove the roller drag motor E x 1 B478R530 WMF B478R529 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 862: ...nstalled at installation and the remaining spacers were fastened with a screw to the rear frame of the finisher under the rear cover and slightly above the lock bar Right to Left Adjustment The position of the punched holes can be adjusted right to left in the sub scan direction with SP6 113 Punch Hole Position Adjustment The position can be adjusted in the range 7 5 mm in 0 5 mm steps The default...

Page 863: ...REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B513 B531 24 SM 3 9 JOGGER UNIT B513 OPTION 3 9 1 JOGGER UNIT 1 Remove the jogger unit cover A x 2 2 Remove the jogger unit B x 2 x 1 B513I002 WMF B513R003 WMF A B ...

Page 864: ...ENT AND ADJUSTMENT SM 25 B513 B531 Output Jogger Unit Punch Unit B513 B53131 3 9 2 JOGGER UNIT PCB 1 Remove the jogger unit from the finisher 3 9 1 2 Remove the jogger unit control PCB A x 2 x 3 B513R001 WMF A ...

Page 865: ...T AND ADJUSTMENT B513 B531 26 SM 3 9 3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR 1 Remove the jogger unit from the finisher 3 9 1 2 Remove the shift jogger motor A x 2 x 1 3 Remove the shift jogger lift motor B x 2 x 1 B513R002 WMF A B ...

Page 866: ...Punch Unit B513 B53131 4 TROUBLESHOOTING If the machine logs an SC code in the display of the operation panel see Section 4 Troubleshooting of the Service Manual Section 4 contains a complete list of all service codes and how to troubleshoot the problem ...

Page 867: ... main machine service manual 5 1 DIP SWITCHES DPS100 1 2 3 4 Description 0 0 0 0 Default 0 0 1 0 Free run A4 LEF staple mode 0 0 0 1 Free run staple and tray shift NOTE Do not use any other settings 5 2 TEST POINTS No Label Monitored Signal TP100 5V 5 V TP101 GND Ground TP102 RXD RXD TP103 TXD TXD 5 3 FUSES No Function FU100 Protects 24 V ...

Page 868: ... by the combinations of open and closed junction gates Selected Operation Mode Solenoid Gate Upper Tray Sort Stack Staple A Stapler junction gate solenoid Off Off ON B Stapler junction gate Closed Closed OPEN C Tray junction gate solenoid ON Off Off D Tray junction gate OPEN Closed Closed B478D506 WMF B478D505 WMF B478D507 WMF Upper Tray Mode B D C A Sort Stack Mode D C A B Staple Mode B D C A ...

Page 869: ...eet to the pre stack tray B This sheet cannot be fed to the stapler yet because the first set is still being stapled The pre stack paper stopper solenoid C turns on 350 mm after the 1st sheet turns on the entrance sensor The pre stack paper stopper D then stops the paper The pre stack junction gate solenoid turns off 230 mm after the trailing edge of the 1st sheet passes through the entrance senso...

Page 870: ...y is pressed the jogger motor F turns on and the jogger fences G move to the wait position about 7 2 mm wider than the selected paper size on both sides When the trailing edge of the paper passes the staple unit entrance sensor the jogger motor moves the jogger fences 3 7 mm towards the paper Next the jogger motor turns on again for 3 5 mm for the horizontal paper alignment then goes back to the w...

Page 871: ...ves to the rear stapling position first staples moves to the front position staples and waits at the front For the second stack the stapler staples the front corner first then moves to the rear corner and staples NOTE For continuous stapling jobs the corners are stapled rear then front for the odd number stacks and stapled front then rear for even number stacks After the job is completed the stapl...

Page 872: ...and the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove the staple cartridge C This allows the user to add new staples Once the staples have been installed and the front door closed the stapler unit returns to its home position As the stapler unit is returning to the home position the stapler return sensor D is activated the return solenoid E turns on and it assists the guid...

Page 873: ... the number of copies in the set there will be very little for a stack containing 100 sheets The staple waste drops into the tray D in the stapler When the stapler unit returns to its home position the tray hits the shaft E and the tray opens The staple waste drops into the staple waste hopper F When the staple waste hopper is full the actuator on its base activates the staple waste hopper sensor ...

Page 874: ...age is displayed advising the operator to install a staple cartridge If this condition is detected during a copy job the indication will appear and the copy job will stop The staple cartridge has a clinch area D where jammed staples collect The operator can remove the jammed staples from the clinch area by pressing in the releases E on both sides then lowering the bracket lever F B478D518 WMF B478...

Page 875: ...es the upper shift tray exit roller G in order to feed out the leading edge of the copy set smoothly The exit guide motor turns on again a certain time after stapling is complete and the upper exit guide plate is lowered Then the shift tray exit roller takes over the stack feed out The on off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by the exit guide open sensor H The stack feed out motor turns ...

Page 876: ...tacking rollers counter clockwise as the rollers move back The simultaneous rotation and backward movement of the roller assembly pulls each sheet back toward the copier to align the edges of the stack on the shift tray The actuator H is mounted on the cam and rotating with both rotating clockwise and detects the roller assembly home position when the actuator leaves the gap of the return drive HP...

Page 877: ...sensor 2 E S7 and switches it on This switches on the lift motor which raises the tray until the tray pushes the actuator out of the sensor E Then the lift motor stops the shift tray this is the home position the actuator D is between the two sensors E and F The shift tray upper limit switch SW1 prevents the drive gear from being damaged if staple mode HP sensor 2 E fails In case of a failure when...

Page 878: ...enters sensor G S12 and switches it on This switches on the lift motor A which raises the tray until the actuator leaves the sensor Then the lift motor stops the tray this is the home position In sort stack mode if S12 fails when the tray is being lifted the shift tray upper limit switch SW1 prevents the drive gear from being damaged Staple Mode The shift tray moves to home position which is when ...

Page 879: ... limit sensor B S11 for small paper smaller than B4 NOTE Sensor C S10 is not used When the actuator D enters sensor A while using large paper about 1500 sheets are on the tray a message will be displayed and copying will stop When the actuator D enters sensor B while using small paper about 3 000 sheets are on the tray a message will be displayed and copying will stop B478D010 WMF A B C D ...

Page 880: ...elivered to the shift tray the shift motor turns on driving the shift gear disk and the shaft D The end fence E is positioned by the shaft creating the side to side movement When the shift gear disk has rotated 180 degrees when the shift tray is fully shifted across the cut out in the shift gear disk turns on the shift tray half turn sensor F and the shift motor stops The next set of copies is the...

Page 881: ...urn on when the upper transport motor has fed paper 733 mm after the entrance sensor turned on 6 In sort stack mode the shift tray exit sensor does not turn off when the upper transport motor has fed paper 1 5 times the paper s length after it turned on 7 In staple mode the stapler tray entrance sensor does not turn on when the upper and lower transport motor have fed paper 835 mm after the entran...

Page 882: ... The punches on the cam rotate downward and punch holes in the paper After punching a sheet of paper the cam returns to home position and stops Home position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are being made so there are two punch HP sensors Punch HP sensor 1 C is used when 2 hole punching is selected and punch HP sensor 2 D is used when 3 hole punching is selected When the cut out E enters the...

Page 883: ...ate that the hopper is full and must be removed and emptied The job resumes automatically after the hopper is emptied and returned to the finisher The punch waste hopper sensor also functions as the hopper set sensor When the hopper is not in the finisher or if it is not inserted completely the spring loaded sensor arm rotates up and to the right with the punch waste sensor away from the hole in t...

Page 884: ...R UNIT B513 OPTION 6 12 1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT 1 Shift Jogger Fence Lift Motor 2 Shift Jogger Motor Timing Belt 3 Shift Jogger Motor 4 Shift Jogger Fence Timing Belt 5 Shift Jogger Fences 6 Shift Jogger HP Sensor 7 Shift Jogger Lift HP Sensor B513D003 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 885: ...gger fence lift motor F switches on and raises the fences until the actuator G leaves the slot of the shift jogger fence lift HP sensor H and shuts off the shift jogger fence lift motor At the same time the jogger motor reverses and drives the fences away from the sides of the stack until the actuator I deactivates the shift jogger fence HP sensor J and switches off the jogger motor The jogger fen...

Page 886: ...t Rollers 5 Tray Junction Gate 6 Stapler Junction Gate 7 Entrance Rollers 8 Punch Unit 9 Pre stack Junction Gate 10 Punch Waste Hopper 11 Pre stack Tray 12 Stack Plate 13 Staple Waste Hopper 14 Stapler 15 Alignment Brush Roller 16 Positioning Roller 17 Stack Feed out Belt 18 Shift Tray Drive Belt 19 Lower Transport Rollers 20 Shift Tray 21 Shift Tray Exit Roller B478V500 WMF 10 9 15 14 3 11 12 13 ...

Page 887: ... Stack Plate Rear Presses down the rear corner of the edge for stapling M15 Stapler Rotation Rotates the stapler 45 degrees for oblique stapling M16 Staple Hammer Drives the staple hammer M17 Punch Drives the punch shaft and roller Punch Unit B531 option M18 Upper Transport Drives the entrance rollers the middle and upper transport rollers and upper tray exit roller M19 Shift Jogger Drives the shi...

Page 888: ...the home position of the positioning roller S18 Stack Feed Out Belt HP Detects the home position of the stack feed out belt S19 Stapler Tray Paper Detects the copy paper in the stapler tray S20 Jogger HP Detects the home position of the shift jogger fences S21 Stack Plate Center HP Detects the home position of the center stack plate S22 Stack Plate Front Detects the home position of the front stac...

Page 889: ...per Stopper Drives the stopper pawl of the pre stacking tray SOL5 Stapler Return Positions the stapler correctly on its return from the staple supply point SWITCHES SW1 Shift Tray Upper Limit Cuts the power to the shift tray lift motor when the shift tray position is at its upper limit SW2 Front Door Safety Cuts the dc power when the front door is opened SW3 Emergency Stop Switches the current job...

Page 890: ... Exit Roller 10 Positioning Roller 11 Lower Transport Roller 3 12 Lower Transport Motor 13 Lower Transport Rollers 2 14 Lower Transport Roller 1 15 Transport Roller 1 16 Entrance Roller 2 17 Entrance Roller 18 Upper Transport Roller 1 19 Upper Transport Motor 20 Stack Feed out Motor 21 Jogger Motor 22 Jogger Fence 23 Stack Plate Motor 24 Stapler Motor 25 Stack Feed out Belt 26 Stapler Rotation Mot...

Page 891: ......

Page 892: ...COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 893: ......

Page 894: ...JUSTMENT 4 1 5 MAIN BOARD 5 1 6 MOTOR REPLACEMENT 6 1 6 1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR 6 1 6 2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR 6 1 6 3 FEED MOTOR TRANSPORT MOTOR 7 2 DETAILS 8 2 1 OVERVIEW 8 2 1 1 MAIN LAYOUT 8 2 1 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 9 2 1 3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION 10 2 1 4 PAPER PATH 13 2 2 PAPER FEED 14 Power On 14 Paper Separation and Feed 14 Bottom Tray Lift 14 Paper Near end 14 Paper End 14 ...

Page 895: ......

Page 896: ... 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 EXTERNAL COVERS A Open the feed cover B Upper front cover x 2 NOTE To remove the upper front cover screw C must be removed D Rear upper cover x 2 E Slip sheet tray x 2 x 1 F Rear middle cover x 2 B470R001 WMF A B D E F C ...

Page 897: ...ROLLER B704 2 SM 1 2 FEED UNIT AND PICK UP ROLLER Open the feed cover A Feed unit The unit is spring loaded Push it to the right to release it then lift it out B Pick up roller x 2 bushings x 2 B470R002 WMF B470R003 WMF A B ...

Page 898: ...parate from the holder Pull slowly to avoid losing the springs C Feed belt Re assembly 1 Position the pick up roller unit A and feed belt holder B as shown above 2 On the rear side slide out the bushing and rotate D until its flat side is parallel with E then snap it on 3 On the front side rotate F until its flat side is parallel with D then snap it on Viewed from the bottom the plates must be ali...

Page 899: ...overs or slip sheets are not correctly aligned with holes punched in the other sheets 1 Open the feed cover 2 Loosen the screw A 3 Push the table B left or right to change its position then tighten the screw NOTE If you want to see the scale C you must remove the rear cover and the support tray B470R151 WMF A B C ...

Page 900: ...SM 5 B704 Cover Interposer Tray B704 1 5 MAIN BOARD Open the top cover Rear cover x 1 A Main board x 9 x 4 NOTE All DIP switch settings on the main board of the cover sheet unit should be set to OFF B470R101 WMF A ...

Page 901: ...RTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR Open the top cover Rear middle cover x 1 1 1 A Motor bracket x 1 harness x 1 x 2 timing belt x 1 B Motor x 2 1 6 2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR Rear upper cover 1 1 A Bottom plate lift motor harness x 2 x 1 x 2 B470R102 WMF B470R104 WMF A B A ...

Page 902: ...ed gear and transport gear hold one hand under the gear to catch the pin as it falls from the hole in the shaft A Feed gear x 1 pin x 1 timing belt x 1 bushing x 1 B Transport gear x 1 pin x 1 timing belt x 1 bushing x 1 C Motor bracket harness x 5 x 4 D Feed motor x 1 x 2 E Transport motor x 1 x 2 B470R105 WMF B470R103 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 903: ...OVERVIEW B704 8 SM 2 DETAILS 2 1 OVERVIEW 2 1 1 MAIN LAYOUT 1 Support tray 2 Slip sheet tray 3 Pick up roller 4 Feed belt 5 Separation roller 6 Grip roller B470D001 WMF 6 5 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 904: ... SM 9 B704 Cover Interposer Tray B704 2 1 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Pick up Roller 2 Feed Belt 3 Bottom Plate Lift Motor 4 Feed Motor 5 Transport Motor 6 Timing Belt 7 Vertical Transport Motor B470D003 WMF 4 6 7 5 3 1 2 ...

Page 905: ...ensors B S4 S5 S6 detect the width and length of the original on the interposer feed tray S3 P5 S4 S5 S6 DLT SEF S2 S1 P4 P3 P2 P1 8 K SEF LG 10 x14 B4 SEF F4 A4 SEF LT SEF US EXE SEF 16 K SEF 8 x10 B5 SEF HLT SEF A5 SEF A3 SEF A5 LEF LT LEF 16 K LEF US EXE LEF B5 LEF HLT LEF B470D901 WMF ...

Page 906: ... 0 0 1 0 0 101 2 x 71 2 US Exec 1 1 1 0 0 0 8 K 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 K SEF 1 0 0 1 0 0 16 K LEF 1 1 1 0 0 0 The cover interposer tray detects all the paper sizes listed above However there are some limitations on the display of the correct paper size North America Europe Asia B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Displays 10 x14 1 B5 SEF 182 x 257 Displays US Exec 1 A5 SEF 148 x 210 Displays HLT SEF 1 A5 LEF 210 x 148 Di...

Page 907: ...0 81 2 x 11 8 x 10 171 Europe Asia Execute SP5959 006 and enter the correct number for the size of the paper loaded for feeding from the cover interposer tray Loaded Display Default To Select for Display Enter 11 x 17 8 K 11 x 17 160 81 2 x 11 16 K SEF 81 2 x 11 166 11 x 81 2 16 K LEF 11 x 81 2 38 81 4 x 13 81 2 x 13 SEF 81 4 x 13 168 B070 B071 B140 series Paper Size Detection Some paper sizes are...

Page 908: ...R PATH 1 Pick up Roller 2 Feed Belt 3 Separation Roller 4 Grip Roller 5 Transport Roller 1 6 Transport Roller 2 The paper feeds from the tray to the feed belt then to the grip roller and down into the paper path to the finisher below B470D006 WMF 6 5 4 1 2 3 ...

Page 909: ... F reverses if more than one sheet is fed Bottom Tray Lift As sheets feed from the top of the stack The pick up roller unit descends until the actuator on the pick up roller unit drops out of the pick up roller position sensor C The bottom plate lift motor switches on to raise the stack until the actuator enters the pick up roller unit position sensor again and switches the motor off This repeats ...

Page 910: ...9 BIN MAILBOX B762 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 911: ......

Page 912: ...ONTROL BOARD 3 2 DETAILS 4 2 1 OVERVIEW 4 2 1 1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT 4 2 1 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 5 2 1 3 PAPER PATH 6 2 2 BASIC OPERATION 7 2 2 1 PAPER PATH 7 2 3 OVERFLOW DETECTION 8 2 3 1 OVERVIEW 8 2 3 2 DETECTION TIMING 9 2 4 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING 10 2 4 1 A4 SIDEWAYS LEF 1ST BIN TRAY 10 2 4 2 A4 SIDEWAYS LEF 2ND 9TH BIN TRAY 10 ...

Page 913: ......

Page 914: ...MENT AND ADJUSTMENT CAUTION Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting and procedure in this section 1 1 COVERS AND TRAYS A Trays Grip each tray by the front and lift out B Front cover x 2 C Rear cover x 3 D Top cover B471R001 WMF A B C D ...

Page 915: ...SM 1 2 SENSORS Remove the tray 1 1 A Bin cover B Tray sensor x 1 C Tray overflow sensor x 1 D Vertical transport sensor x 1 Raise the pawl then grip the bottom of the sensor to remove B471R003 WMF B471R104 WMF B C D A ...

Page 916: ... AND CONTROL BOARD SM 3 B762 9 Bin Mailbox B762 1 3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD Rear cover 1 1 A Control board x 3 x 17 B Main motor bracket main motor x 1 x 2 C Timing belt D Main motor x 1 B471R002 WMF A B C D ...

Page 917: ...t Rollers x 5 3 Turn Gates x 8 4 Exit Rollers x 9 The trays are 1 to 9 bottom to top The numbers are clearly marked on the side of the unit The top tray does not require a turn gate When the top tray is selected for output all turn gates remain closed leaving only the top bin open B471D003 WMF 1 2 4 3 ...

Page 918: ...OVERVIEW SM 5 B762 9 Bin Mailbox B762 2 1 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Main Motor 2 Main Timing Belt 3 Timing Belt B471D002 WMF 1 2 3 ...

Page 919: ... Vertical Transport Path 3 LCT Feed 4 Selected Trays 5 Turn Gates 6 Mailbox Paper Path 7 Junction Gate paper goes either up to the mailbox or out to the finisher s proof tray The solenoid for the junction gate 7 is part of the mailbox B471D970 WMF 1 4 5 6 7 2 3 ...

Page 920: ...ted tray C A solenoid D opens and closes the junction gate E When a solenoid switches on the gate opens and directs to the paper to the tray NOTE When the top tray bin 9 is selected all solenoids are off and closed allowing the paper to pass to the top tray bin 9 does not require a solenoid When the last sheet is fed out it switches off the vertical transport sensor and both the mailbox main motor...

Page 921: ...ch paper tray The actuator mounted on a swivel arm remains in contact with the top of the stack The actuator rises as the stack becomes higher until it activates the sensor Then a tray full message appears on the operation panel and the job halts If the paper is removed before the tray is full the job continues B471D005 WMF A B ...

Page 922: ... size ppm x 3 s After the tray full sensor switches on if it remains on for the feeding of eight additional sheets then this notifies the machine that the tray is full T is calculated as shown below For example for a minimum ppm of 12 prints regardless of paper size the value T is 15 s Then if the sensor detects paper for 15 s or more the machine stops the copy job Full High Not Full Low Between S...

Page 923: ...WAYS LEF 2ND 9TH BIN TRAY Main Motor Main Unit Exit Sensor Main Motor Mailbox Turn Gate SOL 1 J1 1 1 Time required for A4 LEF B471D011 WMF Main Motor Main Unit Exit Sensor Main Motor Mailbox Turn Gate SOL 2 J1 1 1 Time required for A4 Sideways LEF 2 Feed to 9th Tray All SOLs OFF Vertical Transport Sensor 1 J2 J3 B471D012 WMF ...

Page 924: ... J2 Timing After the mailbox paper exit sensor is activated the machine determines that the paper has not yet fed and detects a misfeed if the vertical transport sensor does not activate within the time prescribed for the paper size 1 94 s for A4 paper for example J3 Timing After the vertical transport sensor is activated a misfeed is detected if the vertical transport sensor does not turn off wit...

Page 925: ......

Page 926: ...FINISHER SR4010 SR4040 SR4020 SR4030 D373 D374 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 927: ......

Page 928: ... EXIT SENSOR 5 1 2 6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR 6 1 2 7 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR 7 1 2 8 PRE STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR 7 1 3 STAPLER UNIT 8 1 3 1 CORNER STAPLER 8 1 3 2 POSITIONING ROLLER 9 1 4 FOLD UNIT 10 1 4 1 FOLD UNIT 10 1 4 2 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR 12 1 4 3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR 12 1 4 4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR 13 1 4 5 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT FOR B804 ONLY 14 1 4 6 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW AD...

Page 929: ...RAY B804 ONLY 46 2 5 CORNER STAPLING 49 2 5 1 STACKING AND JOGGING 49 2 5 2 STAPLER MOVEMENT 50 2 5 3 CORNER STAPLING 52 2 6 BOOKLET STAPLING B804 ONLY 53 2 6 1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM 53 2 6 2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING 54 2 6 3 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING MECHANISMS 60 2 7 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT 63 2 7 1 FEED OUT 63 2 7 2 FEED OUT STACKING 64 2 8 PUNCH UNIT B702 FOR B804 B805 65 2 8 1 OVERVIEW ...

Page 930: ...ocedure Safety Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the replacement procedures in this manual Symbols Used in this Manual This manual uses the following symbols See or Refer to Screws Connector Clip ring E ring ...

Page 931: ......

Page 932: ...PLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 COVERS 1 1 1 EXTERIOR COVERS 1 Open the front door D 2 Small upper cover A x1 3 Upper cover B x2 4 Front door bracket C x1 5 Front door D 6 Front left side cover E x2 7 Cover F 8 Paper exit cover G x2 9 Rear cover H x2 ...

Page 933: ...rear cover Exterior Covers 1 Support the tray A with your right hand 2 Pull gear B toward you to release 3 Slowly lower the tray until it stops 4 Front side cover C x1 5 Rear side cover D x1 6 Upper tray E x1 7 Tray bracket F x4 x1 shoulder screw 8 End Fence G x3 ...

Page 934: ...T 1 2 1 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR LIMIT SWITCH 1 Front door front left side cover rear cover upper cover Exterior Cover 2 End fence 1 1 2 Upper Tray End Fence 3 Upper tray exit mechanism A x4 x3 4 Upper tray limit sensor B x1 x1 5 Upper tray limit switch C x2 ...

Page 935: ... 2 2 POSITIONING ROLLER 1 Open the front door A 2 Pull out the stapling unit B 3 Positioning roller C x1 timing belt x1 1 2 3 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Small upper cover 1 1 1 Exterior Cover 2 Proof tray exit sensor bracket A x1 ...

Page 936: ...per cover 1 1 1 Exterior Cover 2 Upper tray paper height sensor bracket A x1 3 Upper tray paper height sensor B staple mode S08 x1 4 Upper tray paper height sensor C non staple mode S09 x1 1 2 5 EXIT GUIDE PLATE UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Rear cover Upper covers Front door Cover Paper exit cover 1 1 1 Exterior Cover 2 Inner cover A x2 ...

Page 937: ...plate B x1 Link and spring x1 x1 4 Upper tray exit sensor C S6 x1 1 2 6 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR 1 Exit guide plate 1 2 5 Exit Guide Plate Upper Tray Exit Sensor 2 Guide plate A hook x 2 3 Sensor bracket B x1 4 Proof tray full sensor C S11 x1 ...

Page 938: ... SENSOR 1 Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier 2 Sensor bracket A x1 3 Finisher entrance sensor B S1 x1 1 2 8 PRE STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier 2 Sensor bracket A 3 Pre stack tray exit sensor B S2 ...

Page 939: ...Stapler Unit D373 D374 8 SM 1 3 STAPLER UNIT 1 3 1 CORNER STAPLER 1 Open the front door 2 Pull out the stapler unit 3 Inner cover A x3 4 Stapler unit holder B x1 5 Corner stapler C M20 x1 ...

Page 940: ...Stapler Unit SM 9 D373 D374 Finisher D373 D374 1 3 2 POSITIONING ROLLER 1 Open the front door A 2 Pull out the stapling unit B 3 Positioning roller C x1 timing belt x1 ...

Page 941: ...d Unit D373 D374 10 SM 1 4 FOLD UNIT 1 4 1 FOLD UNIT 1 Remove the back cover 1 1 1 Exterior Covers 2 Open the front door The stapler unit is heavy 3 Ground cable A x1 4 Harness B x6 x6 5 Stapler unit C x4 ...

Page 942: ...he folding unit 1 Read the DIP SW settings on the decal A attached to the back of the new folding unit 2 Check the DIP SW settings on the main board B of the finisher 3 If these settings are different change these settings to match the settings printed on the decal attached to the folding unit Set DIP switches 1 to 4 the switch set on the right Do not touch the other DIP switches ...

Page 943: ... 1 3 2 Positioning Roller 2 Fold unit entrance sensor bracket A x2 3 Fold unit entrance sensor B S26 x1 x1 1 4 3 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR 1 Open the front door 2 Pull out the stapler unit 1 3 2 Positioning Roller 3 Fold unit vertical guide plate A 4 Fold unit inner cover B x2 Spring pin x1 ...

Page 944: ...acket E x1 8 Fold unit exit sensor F S31 x1 1 4 4 STACK PRESENT SENSOR If you intend to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit at the same time do those adjustments first then replace the sensor 1 4 5 Folding Horizontal Skew Adjustment or Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment 1 Remove the stapler unit 1 4 1 Fold Unit ...

Page 945: ...nt only if the edges of folded booklets are not even 1 Switch the copier on and enter the SP mode 2 Europe Asia Use SP6 134 001 this is for A3 paper North America Use SP6 134 005 this is for DLT paper If the original setting of SP6 134 001 or 005 is not 0 then you must do the vertical skew adjustment 1 4 6 Fold Vertical Skew Adjustment after you finish this horizontal skew procedure 3 Use the 10 k...

Page 946: ...y and allow it to descend under its own weight 10 Push the stapler unit into the finisher and close the front door 11 Do a folding test Switch the copier on Put one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF On the copier operation panel select booklet stapling Press Start One sheet is folded 12 Remove the sheet from the lower tray 13 Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and face up ...

Page 947: ...mm by moving the bottom fence K 18 Raise the tip of the adjustment screw J and allow it to lower under its own weight 19 Attach and tighten the lock screw L 20 Push the stapler unit into the machine close the front door then turn the copier on 21 Europe Asia Do SP6 134 001 this is for A3 paper North America Do SP6 134 005 this is for DLT paper 22 Reset it to 0 23 Do the test again 24 If the result...

Page 948: ... down and face up the same way that it came out of the finisher 4 Referring to the diagram determine if the skew is positive A or negative B 5 Measure the amount of skew 6 Enter the SP mode Europe Asia Use SP6 134 001 this is for A3 paper North America Use SP6 134 005 this is for DLT paper 7 Enter one half the measured amount of skew Example If the measure amount of skew is 1 2 mm enter 0 6 mm The...

Page 949: ...Fold Unit D373 D374 18 SM ...

Page 950: ...ER UNIT 1 5 1 BOOKLET STAPLER 1 Open the front door 2 Pull out the stapler unit 1 2 2 Positioning Roller 3 Harness cover A x2 4 Booklet stapler support stay B x4 x2 x4 5 Stapler C x4 1 5 2 BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the stapler unit 1 4 1 Fold Unit ...

Page 951: ...y A x4 4 Left plate B x4 5 Harness cover C x2 6 Booklet stapler support stay D x4 x2 x4 7 Booklet stapler E x4 8 Booklet stapler motor F x2 x1 To Reattach the Booklet Stapler Motor 1 Reattach the booklet stapler motor Do not tighten the screws ...

Page 952: ...klet stapler stay This tool is included with the stapler spare part 3 Turn the gear B with your finger until it stops 4 Tighten the screws to attach to the booklet stapler motor 5 Remove the stay again and remove the special tool 6 Reattach the booklet stapler stay 7 Push the stapler unit into the machine ...

Page 953: ...ONENT LAYOUT 2 1 1 GENERAL LAYOUT 1 Proof Tray Junction Gate 2 Punch Unit 3 Stapler Junction Gate 4 Pre Stack Junction Gate 5 Pre Stack Tray 6 Corner Stapler M20 7 Lower Tray Booklet 1 8 Folder Rollers 1 9 Folder Plate 1 10 Booklet Stapler 1 11 Upper Tray Shift 12 Proof Tray ...

Page 954: ...f tray 12 when neither sorting nor stapling are selected for the job Upper tray The upper tray 11 receives copies that are sorted and shifted and also receives copies that have been corner stapled Corner stapling is provided on both the B804 and the B805 Pre stack tray The pre stack tray 5 has a switchback mechanism to increase the productivity of stapling 2 3 Pre Stacking Pre stacking is done for...

Page 955: ...0 6 Proof Tray Full Sensor S11 7 Finisher Entrance Sensor S1 8 Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor S9 Non Staple Mode 9 Upper Tray Limit Sensor S12 10 Upper Tray Limit Switch SW2 11 Stacking Roller HP Sensor S13 12 Stacking Sponge Roller Motor M10 13 Upper Tray Exit Sensor S6 14 Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor S8 Staple Mode 15 Shift Roller HP Sensor S5 16 Shift Roller Motor M18 17 Exit Guide Plate Moto...

Page 956: ...ack Tray Exit Sensor S2 6 Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid SOL4 7 Positioning Roller Solenoid SOL3 8 Positioning Roller Motor M14 9 Lower Tray Full Sensor Front S34 1 10 Lower Tray Full Sensor Rear S33 1 11 Main Board PCB1 12 Upper Tray Full Sensor S20 2 13 Upper Tray Full Sensor S19 14 Booklet Stapler Board PCB2 1 15 Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid SOL5 1 1 B804 Only 2 B805 Only ...

Page 957: ...nsor S24 2 Punch Drive Motor M24 3 Punch HP Sensor S24 4 Punch Unit Board PCB3 5 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor M7 6 Paper Position Slide HP Sensor S22 7 Paper Position Sensor S3 8 Punch Hopper Full Sensor S4 9 Punch Movement Motor M9 10 Punch Movement HP Sensor S21 ...

Page 958: ...ut Belt Motor M5 5 Booklet Stapler EH185R Rear M23 1 6 Booklet Stapler EH185R Front M22 1 7 Jogger Fence Motor M15 8 Jogger Fence HP Sensor S15 9 Corner Stapler Movement Motor M6 10 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor S14 11 Corner Stapler EH530 M20 12 Corner Stapler Rotation Motor M13 13 Corner Stapler HP Sensor S17 14 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor S18 15 Stack Junction Gate Motor M17 1 1 B804 Only ...

Page 959: ...m HP Sensor S30 7 Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor S28 8 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor S26 9 Clamp Roller Retraction Motor M8 10 Fold Unit Exit Sensor S31 2 1 3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Here is a general summary of all the electrical components of the B804 B805 finishers In the table below a number that appears in bold text M8 etc denotes a component that is on the 2000 3000 Sheet Finisher B804 onl...

Page 960: ...ollers in the lower transport area M4 Upper Proof Tray Exit Motor Drives 1 proof tray exit rollers 2 extension and retraction of the stacking sponge roller 3 upper tray exit rollers M5 Feed Out Belt Motor Drives the feed out belt that moves the stapled stacks out of the stapling tray after stapling M6 Corner Stapler Movement Motor Moves the corner stapler horizontally on a steel rod to position th...

Page 961: ... of the stack into the nip of the fold rollers to start the fold M12 Fold Roller Motor Rotates forward and drives the fold rollers that fold the stack and feed it out of the fold unit reverses to feed the fold once more into the fold unit and then rotates forward again to feed the fold out of the fold unit M13 Corner Stapler Rotation Motor Swivels the corner stapler and positions it so the staple ...

Page 962: ...Motor Drives the mechanism that raises and lowers the exit guide plate M20 Corner Stapler EH530 This is the roving corner stapler mounted on a steel rail that staples 1 at the front 2 at the rear straight staple 3 at the rear diagonal staple and 4 font and rear two staples M21 Upper Tray Lift Motor Raises and lowers the upper tray during feed out to keep the tray at the optimum height until it is ...

Page 963: ... and signals an error if it is missing or not installed completely S5 Shift Roller HP Sensor Located near the shift roller motor controls the front to back movement of the shift roller as shifts paper during straight through feed S6 Upper Tray Exit Sensor A flat photo sensor located inside the guide plate detects the leading edge and trailing edge of the paper as it feeds out to the upper tray dur...

Page 964: ...S11 Proof Tray Full Sensor The top of the stack in the proof tray increases until it nudges the feeler of this sensor The sensor then signals that the proof tray is full and the job halts until some paper is removed from the proof tray S12 Upper Tray Limit Sensor This sensor controls the position of the upper tray 1 during straight through feed out 2 during shift feed out 3 when the machine is tur...

Page 965: ... this sensor near the top of the stapling unit the feed out belt motor M5 remains on for the time prescribed to position the pawl at the home position to catch the next stack S17 Corner Stapler HP Sensor Located at the front the stapling tray and mounted above the steel rod where the corner stapler travels this sensor detects the home position of the corner stapler The corner stapler is in its hom...

Page 966: ...ch HP Sensor Detects the home position of the punch unit and controls the vertical movement of the punches when they fire S24 Punch Encoder Sensor When the punch mode is selected for the job 2 hole 3 hole etc the machine controls the operation of the punch drive M24 motor which drives a small encoder shaped like a notched wheel This wheel is rotated forward and reverse precisely to select which pu...

Page 967: ...reverses This accounts for the left and right movement of fold plate S31 Fold Unit Exit Sensor 1 Detects the folded edge of the stack as it feeds out from the nip of the fold rollers stops the rollers and reverses them so the fold feeds back into the nip 2 when the folded booklet finally emerges from the nip of the fold rollers detects the leading and trailing edge of the booklet to make sure that...

Page 968: ... on it opens the gate and paper is diverted to the proof tray When this gate is closed the paper goes straight to the upper tray I SOL2 Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid Directs paper to the stapling tray When this solenoid is on paper feeds straight through When this solenoid is off paper feeds to the stapler tray below SOL3 Positioning Roller Solenoid Engages the stapler transport motor and t...

Page 969: ...itch cuts the dc power when the front door is opened SW2 Upper Tray Limit SW A micro switch cuts the power to the upper tray lift motor when the upper tray reaches its upper limit This switch duplicates the function of the upper tray limit sensor S12 and stops the upper tray if S12 fails 2 1 4 DRIVE LAYOUT ...

Page 970: ...4 1 Upper Transport Motor M2 2 Upper Proof Exit Motor M4 3 Upper Tray Lift Motor M21 4 Feed Out Belt Motor M5 5 Fold Roller Motor 1 M12 6 Folder Plate Motor 1 M11 7 Positioning Roller Motor M14 8 Lower Transport Motor M3 9 Entrance Motor M1 1 B804 Only ...

Page 971: ...er paper enters the finisher 2 2 1 PROOF MODE Proof tray junction gate A opens Staple tray junction gate B remains closed The proof tray junction gate directs paper to the proof tray above 2 2 2 SHIFT MODE Proof tray junction gate A remains closed Staple tray junction gate B remains closed With both junction gates closed the paper goes to the upper tray ...

Page 972: ... D373 D374 Finisher D373 D374 2 2 3 STAPLE MODE Proof tray junction gate A remains closed Staple tray junction gate B opens The staple tray junction gate directs the paper to the staple tray below for jogging and stapling ...

Page 973: ...tarts to descend C As the 2nd sheet of Set 2 continues to descend the 1st sheet of Set 2 is fed from the pre stack tray At this time the leading edges 6 of both sheets are even D The trailing edges of the 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 pass the junction gate 7 as the 3rd sheet of Set 2 8 enters the finisher E The 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 9 switch back together into the top of the pre stack and wai...

Page 974: ... In one staple mode one sheet goes to the pre stacking tray Then two sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time In two staple mode and booklet mode three sheets go to the pre stacking tray Then four sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time ...

Page 975: ... Limit Sensor G Upper Tray Limit Switch H Upper Tray Full Sensors The B804 shown above has only one upper tray full sensor the higher sensor at H The B805 has two upper tray full sensors the upper and lower sensor at H On the B805 the upper sensor detects tray full for heavier paper A3 DLT B4 LG 12 x 18 and the lower sensor detects tray full for lighter paper A4 LT etc The tray full capacity is 2 ...

Page 976: ...r tray is not attached Straight Through ON Shift ON Non staple mode operation During operation tray lift is controlled only by sensor F When the actuator leaves sensor F the tray lowers until the actuator reactivates sensor F Standby Staple Mode ON Standby The upper tray stops and waits for the paper output when the actuator activates sensor C D is not used for staple mode Staple Mode Operation Th...

Page 977: ...r H allows more sheets to stack on the upper tray Capacity 3 000 sheets A4 LT 2 4 2 LOWER TRAY B804 ONLY The lower tray sensor actuator arm A rests on the top of the stack of stapled booklets as they are output to the lower tray A flap depressor B keeps the open ends of the booklets down The front lower tray full sensor S34 C and rear lower tray full sensor S33 D detect when the lower tray is full...

Page 978: ...d folded booklet In the table below the conditions Ready Full 1 Full 2 Full 3 See the illustration on the previous page refer to the states of the sensors described on the previous page Condition Front Sensor Rear Sensor Ready ON OFF Full 1 ON ON Full 2 OFF ON Full 3 or lower tray not installed OFF OFF In the tables below Sht denotes sheets in a stack Cnt denotes Count see below for an explanation...

Page 979: ...Cnt Full 2 10 Cnt 10 Cnt 15 Cnt 20 Cnt 15 Cnt 10 Cnt 8 Cnt 8 Cnt Full 3 Examples After the copier makes a booklet with 1 sheet of A3 DLT paper the machine checks every 100 ms for the Full 1 condition If the Full 1 condition occurs 3 times the machine detects that the tray is full After the copier makes a booklet with 5 sheets of A4 LT paper the machine checks every 100 ms for the Full 2 condition ...

Page 980: ... beginning of the job the jogger fence motor M15 A switches on and moves the jogger fences B to the standby position 7 5 mm from the sides of the selected paper size When each sheet passes the pre stack tray exit sensor S2 and enters the stapling tray The jogger fence motor switches on and moves the jogger fences to within 5 5 mm of the sides of the selected paper size The positioning roller solen...

Page 981: ...s of the stack Reverses and moves the fences to the standby position 7 5 mm away for the sides and waits for the next sheet The jogger fence HP sensor D switches off the jogger motor at the end of the job After the last sheet feeds The stapling edge pressure plate solenoid E SOL4 switches on and pushes the pressure plate F onto the stack to press down the edge for stapling The corner stapler stapl...

Page 982: ...his is the stapling position for the paper size selected for the job The stapler movement motor switches off and the stapler waits for the signal to fire or swivel and for diagonal stapling If the stack is to be stapled at two positions The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the front position and staples the front The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the rear and the stapler s...

Page 983: ...APLING Staple firing is driven by the stapler motor A inside the stapler unit The stapler hammer B fires the stapler C The cartridge set sensor D detects the cartridge at the correct position The staple end sensor E detects the staple end condition ...

Page 984: ...sure Roller As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences the stack feed out belt moves In booklet mode immediately after the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and jogger fences the booklet pressure solenoid switches on and the booklet pressure roller presses down on the stack until booklet stapling is finished This prevents the stack from shifting duri...

Page 985: ... 7 Positioning Roller 8 Booklet Pressure Roller Rear 9 Jogger Fences x2 10 Pre Stack Exit Roller 11 Pressure Plate 12 Stapling Tray Bottom Fence 13 Corner Stapler M20 14 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor S14 15 Feed Out Belt 16 Fold Unit Bottom Fence 17 Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor S28 18 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor S26 19 Fold Unit Exit Rollers x2 20 Fold Unit Exit Sensor S31 21 Fold Rollers x2 22 Clamp Ro...

Page 986: ... sides of the stack 2 The pressure plate 3 and booklet pressure roller 4 press down on the sheet The stack feed out belt switches on and the pawl 5 on the feed out belt catches the bottom of the stack and raises it The stapling tray sensor 6 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack 3 The feed out belt 7 raises the stack to the prescribed stapling position and stops The jogger fences move to th...

Page 987: ...ract 5 The feed out belt 6 transport rollers 7 8 and clamp rollers 9 rotate and feed the stack past the closed stack junction over the top and down toward the bottom fence 10 At the same time the fold unit bottom fence descends from its home position and stops 10 mm below the fold position 6 The rollers feed the leading edge of the stack to within 3 mm of the stack stopper of the bottom fence 13 T...

Page 988: ... prescribed fold position 2 8 The fold plate 3 moves to the left and advances 1 3 its maximum horizontal stroke and exerts 20 kg 44 lb of pressure at the fold rollers 4 9 With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers 5 the fold rollers begin to rotate and fold the stack as it feeds out ...

Page 989: ... rotation of the fold rollers 4 reverses and feeds the folded edge back until only 3 mm of the fold 5 remains at the nip 12 The fold rollers 6 rotate forward once again feed out The fold unit exit sensor 7 once again detects the edge of the fold You can do SP6 136 001 to increase the sharpness of the fold The number of forward and reverse feeds can be set in the range of 2 to 30 The machine repeat...

Page 990: ... position 14 The fold rollers 2 and fold unit exit rollers 3 begin to rotate together and feed out the folded booklet to the lower tray 15 Once the trailing edge of the stack passes the fold unit exit sensor 4 the clamp rollers 5 close to be ready to feed the next stack The fold unit bottom fence 6 descends The bottom fence HP sensor 7 stops the bottom fence when it detects the actuator on the bot...

Page 991: ...tack Junction Gate Motor Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam E Stack Junction Gate Cam Opens and closes the stack junction gate F Stack Junction Gate The stack junction gate motor and stack junction gate cam close the stack junction gate The feed out belt pawl raises the stapled stack and sends it over the top and down to the fold unit G Leading Edge Pressure Roller Presses down on th...

Page 992: ...cting clamp roller The clamp rollers feed the stack to within 3 mm of the bottom fence when closed and then open to drop the stack onto the bottom fence D Clamp Roller HP Sensor Controls the rotation of the clamp roller retraction motor and cam that open and close the retracting clamp roller E Clamp Roller Cam Forces open the spring loaded retracting clamp roller Bottom Fence F Bottom Fence Raises...

Page 993: ...e Moves left and pushes the stack into the nip of the fold rollers and then moves right to retract Fold Rollers F Fold Roller Motor Drives forward to feed out the stack at the fold and then reverses to feed the fold in to sharpen the crease and then drives forward again to feed out the folded stack This reverse forward cycle is done once This cycle can be repeated by changing the setting of SP6114...

Page 994: ...hes on and drives the feed out belt B The pawl C attached to the feed out belt catches on the stack and lifts the stack toward the feed out slot The exit guide plate F remains open as the stack emerges at a prescribed distance away from the exit roller Next the exit guide plate closes and the exit roller feeds the stack out The opening and closing of the exit guide plate is controlled by the risin...

Page 995: ... There are two output pawls on the feed out belt to improve the productivity of the feed out operation 2 7 2 FEED OUT STACKING Upper proof exit motor A drives feed roller B and stacking sponge roller C Stacking sponge roller motor D moves the sponge roller forward and back with link E The position of the stacking sponge roller C is controlled by the stacking sponge roller motor which is switched o...

Page 996: ...inue to rotate This buckles the paper against the finisher entrance roller to correct skew The finisher entrance roller C starts to rotate again and feeds the sheet into the finisher These SP codes adjust the skew operation in the punch unit SP6130 This SP corrects the punch hole alignment To do this it corrects the skew of each sheet by adjusting the amount of time the finisher entrance roller re...

Page 997: ...nformation to the punch unit board The machine uses the detected position of the paper edge to calculate the correct position for punching The upper transport motor switches on and rotates the feed rollers D the prescribed distance to position the paper under the punch unit Using the result of the position calculation the punch unit control board moves the punch unit E to the adjusted punch positi...

Page 998: ...ese SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment SP6 128 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed SP6 129 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed For more see Section Service Tables 2 8 2 PUNCH MECHANISMS Paper Position Detection ...

Page 999: ...her entrance sensor S1 C detects paper when it enters the finisher and detects paper jams The paper position slide sensor motor M7 D extends and retracts the paper position slide that holds the paper position sensor S27 E The paper position sensor detects the position of the paper edge The detected position of the paper is used to calculate and position the punch unit for punching The paper positi...

Page 1000: ...ects the position when it retracts switches off the punch position movement motor and stops the punch unit at its home position The punch drive motor M24 C fires the punches that punch holes in the paper below Punch Selection and Firing A Punch Drive Motor M24 B Punch Encoder Wheel C Punch Encoder Sensor S24 D Punch HP Sensor S23 The punch drive motor M24 A turns the small notched encoder wheel B ...

Page 1001: ... starting position for 2 hole or 3 hole punching This is the 1 position in the diagrams the top diagram is for 2 hole punching and the bottom diagram is for 3 hole punching Then the punch drive motor turns counter clockwise to the 2 position This movement punches the holes in the paper Then the punch drive motor turns clockwise to the 1 position to be ready for the next sheet of paper 2 8 3 PUNCH ...

Page 1002: ...es the timing belt and gears that rotate the punch waste belt B The punchouts fall from the punch unit onto the belt The belt moves the punchouts to the front and dumps them in the punch waste hopper C The punch hopper full sensor D Signals that the hopper is full when it detects the top of the stack of punchouts that have collected in the hopper It also detects when the punch hopper is set proper...

Page 1003: ... R3 Proof Shift Staple Finisher entrance sensor lag After finisher entrance sensor goes ON it does not go OFF after enough time to feed a sheet 1 5 times its length has elapsed Proof exit sensor late After finisher entrance sensor goes ON proof exit sensor does not go ON even after enough time to feed 450 mm R3 Proof Proof exit sensor lag After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF proof exit sensor d...

Page 1004: ...m R5 to R7 Staple Pre stack tray exit sensor late After finisher entrance sensor goes ON pre stack tray exit sensor does not go OFF even after enough time to feed 1650 mm Fold unit entrance sensor late S26 The fold unit entrance sensor goes not go ON after enough time has elapsed to feed 1 5 times the length of the stack after the leading edge of the stack reaches the stack present sensor S32 Fold...

Page 1005: ......

Page 1006: ...FAX OPTION TYPE 9001 D418 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New 43 10 05 2009 Error Code 31 21 added 115 7 27 2011 G3 Switch 05 SP No 1 105 006 ...

Page 1007: ......

Page 1008: ... 2 One G3 Interface Unit Installation 2 Two G3 Interface Units Installation 2 Key Installation and Decal Attachment 2 Line Connection and Settings 2 2 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 2 2 1 FCU 2 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 2 3 1 ERROR CODES 2 3 2 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING 2 3 3 IP FAX TROUBLESHOOTING 2 3 3 1 IP FAX TRANSMISSION 2 Cannot send by IP Address Host Name 2 Cannot send via VoIP Gateway 2 Cannot send by Alia...

Page 1009: ...CHES 2 2 4 4 1 I FAX SWITCHES 2 4 4 2 PRINTER SWITCHES 2 4 5 BIT SWITCHES 3 2 4 5 1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES 2 4 6 BIT SWITCHES 4 2 4 6 1 G3 SWITCHES 2 4 7 BIT SWITCHES 5 2 4 7 1 G3 2 AND G3 3 SWITCHES 2 4 7 2 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES 2 4 7 3 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES 2 4 8 BIT SWITCHES 6 2 4 8 1 IP FAX SWITCHES 2 4 9 NCU PARAMETERS 2 4 10 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS 2 4 10 1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE 2 4...

Page 1010: ...OCUMENT SERVER 2 5 4 3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION 2 Mail Transmission 2 Mail Reception 2 Handling Mail Reception Errors 2 Secure Internet Reception 2 Transfer Request Request By Mail 2 E Mail Options Sub TX Mode 2 5 5 IP FAX 2 5 5 1 WHAT IS IP FAX 2 5 5 2 T 38 PACKET FORMAT 2 UDP Related Switches 2 5 5 3 SETTINGS 2 6 SPECIFICATIONS 2 6 1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 6 2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE I...

Page 1011: ......

Page 1012: ...one or cellular phone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak Before installing the fax unit switch off the main switch and disconnect the power cord The fax unit contains a lithium battery The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Discard batteries in accordance with th...

Page 1013: ...tion and prevent minor injuries Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine Always obey these guidelines to avoid serious problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine bold is added for emphasis This document provides tips and advice about how to be...

Page 1014: ...g list No Description Q ty 1 FCU 1 2 Interface Board 1 3 Fax Keytop 2 4 Ferrite Core ZCAT1730 730A 1 NA TWN 4 Ferrite Core TFC 25 15 12A 1 EU AA CHN 5 Ferrite Core RFC 9 1 6 Screws Blue M3 x 6 7 7 Speaker Unit 1 8 Super G3 Decal 1 9 Clamp 2 10 Telephone Cable NA only 1 11 FCC Decal NA Only 1 12 Serial Number Decal 1 13 Multi Language Decals 1 Excluding NA 2 EU 14 EMC Address Decal 1 EU only 15 Qui...

Page 1015: ...ta in the printer buffer 2 Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord and the network cable FCU D418 00 1 Remove the rear upper cover A x 2 Slide the rear upper cover up and then remove it 2 Remove the rear lower cover B x 2 First slide up the rear lower cover then slide it down 3 Controller box cover A x 13 ...

Page 1016: ...x Option Type 9001 D418 4 Attach the interface board A to the controller board securely x 2 5 Remove the jumper A on the MBU B and set it to the ON position If the jumper remains at the OFF position this will cause SC672 Controller Startup Error to appear ...

Page 1017: ...Installation Fax Option Type 9001 D418 00 D418 4 SM 6 Disconnect three harnesses A on the IPU 7 Install the FCU A in the interface board x 3 8 Connect three harnesses A to the IPU ...

Page 1018: ... the controller box with a flat headed screwdriver 10 Attach the ferrite core A to the cables B on the speaker unit and then clamp the cables x 2 The required ferrite core is different depending on the area For EU ASIA China use the ferrite core ZCAT1730 730A C For NA Taiwan use the ferrite core TFC 25 15 12A D ...

Page 1019: ... harness C x 2 13 Reattach the controller box cover x 13 14 Reattach the rear lower cover x 2 15 Reattach the rear upper cover x 2 Key Installation and Decal Attachment 1 Remove the blank keytop A 3rd from the top and replace it with one of the provided keytops B either the Facsimile keytop or the fax symbol keytop 2 Attach the multi language decal C EU only ...

Page 1020: ...the rear cover of the machine NA only 6 Put the power plug into the outlet and turn on the main power of the machine Make sure that the outlet is grounded SRAM formatted shows on the operation panel after you have turned the main switch on Turn the main switch off and on again for normal use 7 Make sure that the date and time are correctly set Line Connection and Settings 1 Loop one end of the tel...

Page 1021: ...Installation Fax Option Type 9001 D418 00 D418 8 SM RFC 9 B as shown Attach the ferrite core at least 9 cm 3 5 in from the connector 2 Connect the telephone cable to the LINE 1 jack ...

Page 1022: ...terface Unit 1 2 G3 Connector Bracket 1 3 CCUIF Harness 1 4 Screws Blue M3 x 6 5 5 Edge Saddle Clamp 1 6 Clamp 1 7 Ferrite Core RFC 5 1 8 Ferrite Core RFC 9 1 9 FFC Flexible Flat Cable 1 10 Telephone Cable NA Only 1 11 FCC Decal NA Only 1 12 EMC Address Decal EU Only 1 1 2 2 G3 INTERFACE UNIT INSTALLATION Before installing this fax unit 1 Print out all data in the printer buffer 2 Turn off the mai...

Page 1023: ...nstallation 1 Remove the rear upper cover A x 2 Slide the rear upper cover up and then remove it 2 Remove the rear lower cover B x 2 First slide up the rear lower cover then slide it down 3 Controller box cover A x 13 4 Attach the interface board A to the controller board securely x 2 ...

Page 1024: ...e Unit Type 9001 D418 06 SM 11 D418 Fax Option Type 9001 D418 5 Remove the jumper A on the MBU B and set it to the ON position If the jumper remains at the OFF position this will cause SC672 Controller Startup Error to appear ...

Page 1025: ...001 D418 06 D418 12 SM 6 Install the G3 interface unit A on the FCU x 3 Put the G3 interface unit on the FCU Tighten three screws 7 Connect the FFC Flexible Flat Cable to the FCU A Insert the FFC securely as shown above B Lock the stopper ...

Page 1026: ...8 8 Connect the other edge of the FFC to the G3 interface unit A Insert the FFC securely as shown above B Lock the stopper Make sure that both green sides of the FFC face each other 9 Attach the ferrite core RFC 5 A to the cable 10 Install the FCU assembly A in the interface board x 3 ...

Page 1027: ...ith a flat headed screwdriver 12 Attach the ferrite core provided with the Fax Unit A to the cables B on the speaker unit and then clamp the cables x 2 The required ferrite core is different depending on the area For EU ASIA China use the ferrite core ZCAT1730 730A C For NA Taiwan use the ferrite core TFC 25 15 12A D ...

Page 1028: ...B 14 Attach the edge saddle clamp A to the speaker unit B 15 Attach the G3 connector bracket C to the speaker unit B x 2 x 2 16 Install the speaker assembly A x 2 x 4 17 Attach two clamps at B and fasten the speaker harness C x 2 18 Reattach the controller box cover x 13 19 Reattach the rear lower cover x 2 20 Reattach the rear upper cover x 2 ...

Page 1029: ... Do steps from 1 to 5 of One G3 Interface Unit Installation 2 Release three clamps on the second G3 unit 3 Remove the G3 board A from the second G3 interface unit B x 2 4 Attach the G3 board A to the first G3 interface unit B x 2 Make sure that the board to board connectors C are securely connected ...

Page 1030: ...418 06 SM 17 D418 Fax Option Type 9001 D418 5 Clamp the cable A from the second G3 board x 3 6 Attach the ferrite cores RFC 5 A to each cable B 7 Connect the FFC Flexible Flat Cable to the FCU A Insert the FFC as shown above B Lock the stopper ...

Page 1031: ... the FFC to the G3 interface unit A Insert the FFC as shown above B Lock the stopper down Make sure that both green sides of the FFC face each other 9 Install the FCU assembly A in the interface board x 3 10 Remove the four cut outs A from the controller box with a flat headed screwdriver ...

Page 1032: ...vided with the Fax Unit A to the cables B on the speaker unit and then clamp the cables x 2 The required ferrite core is different depending on the area For EU ASIA China use the ferrite core ZCAT1730 730A C For NA Taiwan use the ferrite core TFC 25 15 12A D 12 Attach two modular jacks A to the G3 connector bracket B ...

Page 1033: ...speaker unit B 14 Attach the G3 connector bracket C to the speaker unit B x 2 x 2 15 Install the speaker assembly A x 2 x 4 16 Attach two clamps at B and fasten the speaker harness C x 2 17 Reattach the controller box cover x 13 18 Reattach the rear lower cover x 2 19 Reattach the rear upper cover x 2 ...

Page 1034: ...Attach the decal A SUPER G3 to the front door 4 Attach the serial number decal under the copier serial number decal on the rear cover of the machine 5 Attach the FCC decal to the rear cover of the machine NA only 6 Put the power plug into the outlet and turn on the main power of the machine Make sure that the outlet is grounded SRAM formatted shows on the operation panel after you have turned the ...

Page 1035: ...e power supply then turn on the main power switch 4 Enter the Service Mode 5 Touch Fax SP 6 Do these communication switch settings SP1104 23 Switch 16 Set Bit 1 1 Set Bit 3 1 if two G3 boards are installed 7 Exit the Service Mode and turn the machine off on with the main power switch 8 Do SP5990 001 to print the system parameter list then confirm that G3 is listed as an option 9 Enter the Service ...

Page 1036: ... FCU board remove the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it on the new FCU board 2 Set the correct date and time with the User Tools User Tools System Settings Timer Setting Set Date Time Do not turn off the battery switch SW1 Do SP6101 to print the system parameters Then check the settings ...

Page 1037: ...be incompatible Replace the NCU or FCU Check for DIS NSF with an oscilloscope If the rx signal is weak there may be a bad line 0 01 DCN received unexpectedly The other party is out of paper or has a jammed printer The other party pressed Stop during communication 0 03 Incompatible modem at the other end The other terminal is incompatible 0 04 CFR or FTT not received after modem training Check the ...

Page 1038: ...The other terminal did not reply to DCS Check the line connection Check the FCU NCU connectors Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings Replace the NCU or FCU The other end may be defective or incompatible try sending to another machine Check for line problems Cross reference See error code 0 04 0 07 No post message response from the other end after a page was sent Check the line...

Page 1039: ...ameter 01 PSTN Cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN Dedicated Tx parameters Section 4 0 14 Non standard post message response code received Check the FCU NCU connectors Incompatible or defective remote terminal try sending to another machine Noisy line resend Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings Replace the NCU or FCU Cross reference See error code 0 08 0 15 The other terminal i...

Page 1040: ...x machine Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first line and or rx cable equalizer setting Cross reference Reconstruction time G3 Switch 0A bit 6 Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN 0 21 EOL signal end of line from the other end not received within 5 s of the previous EOL signal Check the connections between the FCU NCU line Check for line noise or other line problems Replace the NCU or...

Page 1041: ...cable equalizer setting and or rx error criteria Cross reference Rx cable equalizer G3 Switch 07 PSTN Rx error criteria Communication Switch 02 bits 0 and 1 0 30 The other terminal did not reply to NSS A in AI short protocol mode Check the line connection Check the FCU NCU connectors Try adjusting the tx level and or cable equalizer settings The other terminal may not be compatible Cross reference...

Page 1042: ... 0 74 The calling terminal fell back to T 30 mode because it could not detect ANSam after sending CI The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due to noise etc ANSam was too short to detect Check the line connection and condition Try making a call to another V 8 V 34 fax 0 75 The called terminal fell back to T 30 mode because it could not detect a CM in response to ANSam ANSam timeout The termin...

Page 1043: ... 4 control channel start up 0 83 The line was disconnected due to a timeout in the V 34 control channel restart sequence The guard timer expired while starting these phases Serious noise narrow bandwidth or low signal level can cause these errors If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal Try making a call at a later time Try using V 17 or a slower modem using dedicated tx parameters Try ...

Page 1044: ...he other party to contact the manufacturer 0 87 The control channel started after an unsuccessful primary channel The receiving terminal restarted the control channel because data reception in the primary channel was not successful This does not result in an error communication 0 88 The line was disconnected because PPR was transmitted received 9 default times within the same ECM frame Try using a...

Page 1045: ...error Timeout JBIG data error Check the sender s JBIG function Update the MBU ROM 2 29 JBIG trailing edge maker error FCU defective Check the destination device 2 50 The machine resets itself for a fatal FCU system error If this is frequent update the ROM or replace the FCU 2 51 The machine resets itself because of a fatal communication error If this is frequent update the ROM or replace the FCU 2...

Page 1046: ...emporary memory shortage Test the SAF memory Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board 5 23 Print data error when printing a substitute rx or confidential rx message Test the SAF memory Ask the other end to resend the message Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board 5 25 SAF file access error Replace the FCU or EXMEM board 6 00 G3 ECM T1 time out during reception of facsimile data 6 01 G3 ECM no V 21...

Page 1047: ...he other terminal may be defective 6 09 G3 ECM ERR received Check for a noisy line Adjust the tx levels of the communicating machines See code 6 05 6 10 G3 ECM error frames still received at the other end after all communication attempts at 2400 bps Check for line noise Adjust the tx level use NCU parameter 01 or the dedicated tx parameter for that address Check the line connection Defective remot...

Page 1048: ...the server could not be found The PC is not ready to transfer files SMTP server not functioning correctly The DNS IP address is not registered Network not operating correctly Destination folder selection not correct 14 02 No Service by SMTP Service 421 SMTP server operating incorrectly or the destination for direct SMTP sending is not correct Contact the system administrator and check that the SMT...

Page 1049: ...t operating correctly 14 05 SMTP Server HDD Full 452 Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD on the server is full Insufficient free space on the HDD of the SMTP server Contact the system administrator and check the amount of space remaining on the SMTP server HDD Insufficient free space on the HDD where the destination folder is located Contact the system administrator and check the amou...

Page 1050: ...etting incorrect Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly Software application error 14 09 Authorization Failed for Sending to SMTP Server POP Before SMTP or SMTP authorization failed Incorrect setting for file transfer 14 10 Addresses Exceeded Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limit for the SMTP server 14 11 Buffer Full The send buffer is full so the transmission could not be complete...

Page 1051: ...e Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail address of the network administrator is registered 14 34 Address designated in the domain for SMTP sending does not exist Operational error in normal mail sending or direct SMTP sending Check the address selected in the address book for SMTP sending Check the domain selection 14 50 Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU mail job task error the send...

Page 1052: ...t been registered 15 03 Mail Address Not Registered The mail address has not been registered 15 10 DCS Mail Receive Error Error other than 15 11 to 15 18 15 11 Connection Error The DNS or POP3 IMAP4 server could not be found The IP address for DNS or POP3 IMAP4 server is not stored in the machine The DNS IP address is not registered Network not operating correctly 15 12 Authorization Error POP3 IM...

Page 1053: ...the mail was received 15 31 Final Destination for Transfer Request Reception Format Error The format of the final destination for the transfer request was incorrect 15 39 Send Delivery Destination Error The transmission cannot be delivered to the final destination Destination file format is incorrect Could not create the destination for the file transmission 15 41 SMTP Receive Error Reception reje...

Page 1054: ...ent could not be received because the TIFF header is incorrect The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported The TIFF file attachment is corrupted Software error 15 64 TIFF Decompression Error The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF decompression error The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted Software error 15 71 Not Binary Image Data The file could not be received because the ...

Page 1055: ...The format of the final destination or the transfer destination is incorrect Destinations are full so the final and transfer destinations could not be created 15 92 Memory Overflow Transmission could not be received because memory overflowed during the transaction 15 93 Memory Access Error Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction of SAF memory 15 94 Incorrect ID Code The machine rejecte...

Page 1056: ...rt the machine 22 04 The machine cannot store received data in the SAF Update the ROM Replace the FCU 22 05 No G3 parameter confirmation answer Defective FCU board or firmware 23 00 Data read timeout during construction Restart the machine Replace the FCU 25 00 The machine software resets itself after a fatal transmission error occurred Update the ROM Replace the FCU 31 21 LAN Fax Error It was can...

Page 1057: ... are lit General LAN 2 LAN activity Check that other devices connected to the LAN can communicate through the LAN 1 Network settings on the PC Check the network settings on the PC Is the IP address registered in the TCP IP properties in the network setup correct Check the IP address with the administrator of the network Between IFAX and PC 2 Check that PC can connect with the machine Use the ping ...

Page 1058: ... IP address conflict with other PCs Use the Network function in the User Tools If there is an IP address conflict inform the administrator 2 E mail account on the server Make sure that the machine can log into the e mail server Check that the account and password stored in the server are the same as in the machine Ask the administrator to check Between machine and e mail server 3 E mail server Mak...

Page 1059: ...hat the account and password stored in the server are the same as in the machine Ask the administrator to check 2 E mail server Make sure that the client devices which have an account in the server can send receive e mail Ask the administrator to check Send a test e mail with the machine s own number as the destination The machine receives the returned e mail if the communication is performed succ...

Page 1060: ...he ping command to contact the router Check that other devices connected to the router can sent data over the router Ask the administrator of the server to check 5 Error message by e mail from the network of the destination Check whether e mail can be sent to another address on the same network using the application e mail software Check the error e mail message Inform the administrator of the LAN...

Page 1061: ...not supported 5 IP address of local machine registered Register the IP address 6 Remote terminal port number setting other than 1720 Send by specifying the port number 7 Specified port number correct Confirm the port number of the remote fax 8 DNS server registered when host name specified Contact the network administrator 9 Remote fax a T 38 terminal Check whether the remote fax is a T38 terminal...

Page 1062: ...dministrator 4 VoIP Gateway power switched on Contact the network administrator 5 Is the IP address host name of the specified Gateway correct Check the IP address host name 6 Number of the specified fax correct Check the remote fax number 7 Firewall NAT is installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 8 Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported 9...

Page 1063: ...on 2 Number of specified Alias fax correct Confirm the Alias of the remote fax Error Code 13 14 3 Firewall NAT installed Cannot breach the firewall Send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 4 Transmission sent manually Manual sending not supported 5 Gatekeeper installed correctly Contact the network administrator 6 Gatekeeper power switched on Contact the network administrator 7 IP address hos...

Page 1064: ...the system administrator to increase the bandwidth Raise the delay level IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3 15 Network bandwidth too narrow Lower the modem transmission baud rate IPFAX SW 05 16 Remote fax cancelled transmission Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission 3 3 2 IP FAX RECEPTION Cannot receive by IP Address Host name Check Point Action 1 LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable conne...

Page 1065: ...ion Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway Check Point Action 1 LAN cable connected Check the LAN cable connection 2 Firewall NAT is installed Cannot breach the firewall Request the remote fax to send by using another method Fax Internet Fax 3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly Contact the network administrator 4 VoIP Gateway power switched on Contact ...

Page 1066: ...rectly Contact the network administrator Note The sender machine displays this error code if the sender fax is a Ricoh model 4 Power to Gatekeeper switched on Contact the network administrator Note The sender machine displays this error code if the sender fax is a Ricoh model 5 IP address host name of Gatekeeper correct on the sender s side Request the sender to check the IP address host name Note...

Page 1067: ... fax Alias number registered Register the Alias number Request the system administrator to increase the bandwidth 10 Network bandwidth too narrow Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the receiving side IPFAX SW06 11 Remote fax cancelled transmission Check whether the remote fax cancelled the transmission 12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper Contact the network administrator Note The sende...

Page 1068: ... or memory press the operation power switch to switch the power off wait for the power LED to go off and then switch the main power switch off The main power LED lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open while the main machine is communicating with a facsimile or the network server or while the machine is accessing the hard disk or memory for reading or writing data ...

Page 1069: ... Bit Switches Printer Switch 103 001 016 00 0F Changes the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option See section 4 2 Bit Switches Communication Switch 104 001 032 00 1F Changes the bit switches for communication settings for the fax option See section 4 2 Bit Switches G3 1 Switch 105 001 016 00 0F Changes the bit switches for the protocol settings of the standard G3 board See section 4 ...

Page 1070: ...itch 109 001 016 00 0F Not used Do not change the bit switches IP fax Switch 111 001 016 00 0F Changes the bit switches for optional IP fax parameters See section 4 2 Bit Switches 4 2 2 SP2 XXX RAM DATA 2 Mode No Function RAM Read Write 101 001 Changes RAM data for the fax board directly See section 4 5 Service RAM Addresses Memory Dump 001 G3 1 Memory Dump Prints out RAM data for the fax board Se...

Page 1071: ...ion 4 3 NCU Parameters G3 2 NCU Parameters 104 001 023 CC 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board See section 4 3 NCU Parameters G3 3 NCU Parameters 105 001 023 CC 01 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3 board See section 4 3 NCU Parameters 4 2 3 SP3 XXX TEL LINE SETTINGS 3 Mode No Function Service Station 001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station 101 002 S...

Page 1072: ...001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3 2 line If the machine is installed on a PABX line select PABX PABX GND or PABX FLASH 002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3 2 line 003 Memory Lock Disabled If the customer does not want to receive transmissions using Memory Lock on this line change this SP to on 104 004 Transmission Disabled If you turn this SP on the machi...

Page 1073: ...If you turn this SP on the machine does not send any fax messages on the G3 3 line ISDN Port Settings 001 Select Line 002 PSTN Access Number 106 003 Memory Lock Disabled 106 004 Transmission Disabled Not used Do not change the bit switches IPFAX Port Settings 001 H323 Port 002 SIP Port 003 RAS Port 004 Gatekeeper port 005 T 38 Port 006 SIP Server Port 107 007 IPFAX Protocol Priority Select H323 or...

Page 1074: ...3 modem version 106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used Do not change the bit switches 107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used Do not change the bit switches 4 2 5 SP5 XXX INITIALIZING 5 Mode No Function Initialize SRAM 101 000 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters user data in the SRAM files in the SAF memory and clock Erase All Files 102 000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory Reset Bit Swi...

Page 1075: ...the ON button to print the system parameter list Service Monitor Report 102 000 Touch the ON button to print the service monitor report G3 Protocol Dump List 001 G3 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for all G3 lines 103 002 G3 1 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3 1 line 003 G3 1 1 Communication Prints the protocol ...

Page 1076: ... Layer 004 Dch Link Layer 005 Dch Bch 2 104 006 Bch 2 Link Layer Not used Do not change the bit switches All Files print out 105 000 Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory including confidential messages Note Do not use this function unless the customer is having trouble printing confidential messages or recovering files stored using the memory lock feature Journal Print out 001 All Journ...

Page 1077: ...CU 013 Scanner Condition These log print out functions are for designer use only IP Protocol Dump List 001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the IP fax line 108 002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the IP fax line 4 2 7 SP7 XXX TEST MODES These are the test modes for PTT approval 7 Function 101 G3 1 Modem Tests 102...

Page 1078: ...3 1 V34 S3429baud 109 Recorded Message Test 110 G3 2 Modem Tests 111 G3 2 DTMF Tests 112 G3 2 V34 S2400baud 113 G3 2 V34 S2800baud 114 G3 2 V34 S3000baud 115 G3 2 V34 S3200baud 116 G3 2 V34 S3429baud 117 G3 3 Modem Tests 118 G3 3 DTMF Tests 119 G3 3 V34 S2400baud 120 G3 3 V34 S2800baud 121 G3 3 V34 S3000baud 122 G3 3 V34 S3200baud 123 G3 3 V34 S3429baud 124 IG3 1 Modem Tests Not used ...

Page 1079: ...used 129 IG3 1 V34 S3200baud Not used 130 IG3 1 V34 S3429baud Not used 131 IG3 2 Modem Tests Not used 132 IG3 2 DTMF Tests Not used 133 IG3 2 V34 S2400baud Not used 134 IG3 2 V34 S2800baud Not used 135 IG3 2 V34 S3000baud Not used 136 IG3 2 V34 S3200baud Not used 137 IG3 2 V34 S3429baud Not used 4 2 8 SP9 XXX DESIGN SWITCH MODE 9 Mode No Function 702 Design Switch DFU ...

Page 1080: ...s 0 Dedicated transmission parameter programming 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated transmission parameters Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated transmission parameters 1 Not used Do not change 2 Technical data printout on the Journal 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Instead of the personal name the following data are listed on the Journal for each G3 communicati...

Page 1081: ...s 256 16 16 dB 3 Not used Do not change this setting 4 Line error mark print 0 OFF 1 ON print When 1 is selected a line error mark is printed on the printout if a line error occurs during reception 5 G3 G4 communication parameter display 0 Disabled 1 Enabled This is a fault finding aid The LCD shows the key parameters see below This is normally disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the u...

Page 1082: ...48 4800 bps 192 19200 bps 24 2400 bps Resolution S Standard 8 x 3 85 dots mm D Detail 8 x 7 7 dots mm F Fine 8 x 15 4 dots mm SF Superfine 16 x 15 4 dots mm 21 Standard 200 x 100 dpi 22 Detail 200 x 200 dpi 44 Superfine 400 x 400 dpi Compression mode MMR MMR compression MR MR compression MH MH compression JBO JBIG compression Optional mode JBB JBIG compression Basic mode Communication mode ECM Wit...

Page 1083: ...automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to complete the job 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 File retention time 0 Depends on User Parameter 24 18 H 1 No limit 1 A file that had a communication error will not be erased unless the communication is successful 5 Not used Do not change this setting Memory read write by RDS Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting 0 0 Always disabled 6 7 0 1 User selectab...

Page 1084: ...re set to User selectable 00 99 hours BCD This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are set to User selectable The default setting is 24 hours System Switch 04 SP No 1 101 005 No Function Comments 0 2 Not used Do not change these settings 3 Printing dedicated tx parameters on Quick Speed Dial Lists 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Each Quick Speed dial number on the list is printed with...

Page 1085: ...col are listed on the Journal 1 Communications that reached phase A call setup of T 30 protocol are listed on the Journal This will include telephone calls 2 Automatic error report printout 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Error reports will not be printed 1 Error reports will be printed automatically after failed communications 3 Printing of the error code on the error report 0 No 1 Yes 1 Error codes are p...

Page 1086: ... System Switch 0A SP No 1 101 011 No Function Comments 0 Automatic port selection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled When 1 is selected a suitable port is automatically selected if the selected port is not used 1 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 Dialing on the ten key pad when the external telephone is off hook 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Prevents dialing from the ten key pad while the external telephone is...

Page 1087: ...ending Setting this switch to 1 enables direct sending without capture Setting this switch to 0 masks the direct sending function on the operation panel so it cannot be selected 3 Action when the external handset goes off hook 0 Manual tx and rx operation 1 Memory tx and rx operation the display remains the same 0 Manual tx and rx are possible while the external handset is off hook However memory ...

Page 1088: ...d 07 Finland 18 Singapore 08 Ireland 19 Malaysia 09 Norway 1A China 0A Sweden 1B Taiwan 0B Switz 1C Korea 0C Portugal 20 Turkey 0D Holland 21 Greece 0E Spain 22 Hungary 0F Israel 23 Czech This country area code determines the factory settings of bit switches and RAM addresses However it has no effect on the NCU parameter settings and communication parameter RAM addresses Cross reference NCU countr...

Page 1089: ...rs to be important G3 transmissions 1 TSI G3 printing position 0 Superimposed on the page data 1 Printed before the data leading edge Change this bit to 1 if the TSI G3 overprints information that the customer considers to be important 2 Not used Do not change the factory settings 3 TTI used for broadcasting 0 The TTIs selected for each Quick Speed dial are used 1 The same TTI is used for all dest...

Page 1090: ... change these settings System Switch 15 SP No 1 101 022 No Function Comments 0 Not used Do not change the settings 1 Going into the Energy Saver mode automatically 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 The machine will restart from the Energy Saver mode quickly because the 5V power supply is active even in the Energy Saver mode 2 3 Not used Do not change these settings Interval for preventing the machine from en...

Page 1091: ...TN 1 This function allows the user to select the default G3 line type The optional SG3 units are required to use the PSTN 2 or 3 setting 2 7 Not used Do not change these settings System Switch 17 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 18 Not used do not change these settings System Switch 19 SP No 1 101 026 No Function Comments 0 5 Not used Do not change the settings 6 Extended scanne...

Page 1092: ...hoto and Photo modes System Switch 1A SP No 1 101 027 No Function Comments 0 to 7 LS RX memory capacity threshold setting 00 FF 0 1020 Kbyte Hex Sets the value to x4KB When the amount of available memory drops below this setting RX documents are printed to conserve memory Initial setting 0x80 512 KB System Switch 1B Not used do not change these settings System Switch 1C Not used do not change thes...

Page 1093: ...he oldest communication records This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the report e g no paper 1 Action when the SAF memory has become full during scanning 0 The current page is erased 1 The entire file is erased 0 If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning the successfully scanned pages are transmitted 1 If the SAF memory becomes...

Page 1094: ...to block messages from senders that do not include an RTI or CSI change this bit to 1 then enable Authorized Reception Otherwise keep this bit at 0 default setting 5 7 Not used Do not change the settings System Switch 1F SP No 1 101 032 No Function Comments 0 Not used Do not change the settings 1 Report printout after an original jam during SAF storage or if the SAF memory fills up 0 Enabled 1 Dis...

Page 1095: ... machine receives all the pages in the memory 4 6 Not used Do not change the factory settings 7 Action when a fax SC has occurred 0 Automatic reset 1 Fax unit stops 0 When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other than SC1201 and SC1207 the fax unit automatically resets itself 1 When the fax unit detects any fax SC code the fax unit stops Cross Reference Fax SC codes See Troubleshooting ...

Page 1096: ...on can receive Bits 3 7 are reserved for future use or not used 0 A4 1 B4 2 A3 3 6 Reserved 7 Not used 0 Off not selected 1 On selected If more than one of these three bits is set to 1 the larger size has priority For example if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to 1 then the maximum size is A3 Bit 2 When mail is sent there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the destination so the sending ...

Page 1097: ...for mail transmission 0 Off No conversion 1 On Conversion When on set to 1 the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to determine the setting mail cannot negotiate between terminals the mm inch selection is determined by the sender fax When this swit...

Page 1098: ...s of an e mail attachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs This allows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent to the wrong e mail addresses for example 0 Prints 1st page only 1 Prints all pages Text String for Return Receipt This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the tr...

Page 1099: ...e media accept feature to the answer mail 1 Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer mail which contains the media accept feature field 5 6 Not Used Image Resolution of RX Text Mail 7 This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail 0 200 x 200 1 400 x 400 The 1 setting requires installation of the...

Page 1100: ...l destinations are correct or not 0 The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only addresses with no errors in them 1 If any address has an error in it the transfer station transfers no transmissions and returns a transfer transmission failure report to the requestor that initiated the transfer There is no negotiation between the transfer initiator and the transfer station to determin...

Page 1101: ...d to determine automatically the destination folder for each e mail 1 Subject corresponding to mail post database 0 Standard subject 1 Mail post database subject The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following three cases 1 When the service technician sets the service software switch 2 When memory sending or delivery specified by F code is applied by the SMTP se...

Page 1102: ...ed do not change the settings I fax Switch 07 Not used do not change the settings I fax Switch 08 SP No 1 102 009 No Function Comments Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception 0 7 This setting determines the amount of SAF Store and Forward memory SAF stores fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location and also holds incoming messages if they cannot be printed When the amoun...

Page 1103: ... Not used do not change the settings I fax Switch 0E Not used do not change the settings I fax Switch 0F SP No 1 102 016 No Function Comments Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files 0 This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or output immediately 0 Off Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery 1 On Files received via SMTP are delivered immedia...

Page 1104: ... and only a 2 is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page This helps the user to identify pages that have been split because the size of the paper is smaller than the size of the document received When A5 is used to print an A4 size document for example 1 Repetition of data when the received page is longer than the printer paper 0 Off 1 On 1 Default 10 mm of the trailing edge of the previ...

Page 1105: ...ot used 0 1 A3 1 0 B4 3 4 1 1 A4 These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printer switch 01 is 1 5 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Received message width restriction in the protocol signal to the sender 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 The machine informs the transmitting machine of the print width depending on the paper size available from the paper feed stations Refer to the table on the next p...

Page 1106: ...x printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 2nd paper feed station usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 2 3rd paper feed station usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 3 4th paper feed station usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 4 LCT usage for fax printing 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 0 The paper feed station can be used to print fax messages and reports 1 The specified paper feed station will ...

Page 1107: ...th is reduced when printing Maximum reducible length Printer Switches 04 bits 0 to 4 1 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 to 7 Page separation setting when sub scan compression is forbidden 00 0F 0 15 mm Hex Default 6 mm Page separation threshold with reduction disabled with switch 03 0 above For example if this setting is set to 10 and A4 is the selected paper size If the received document i...

Page 1108: ...nary setting of bits 0 to 4 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 mm 0 0 0 0 1 5 mm 0 0 1 0 0 20 mm 1 1 1 1 1 155 mm 0 to 4 For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper Maximum reducible length Paper length 0 75 x N x 5mm Length of the duplicated image on the next page when page separation has taken place Bit 6 Bit 5 Setting 0 0 4 mm 0 1 10 mm 1 0 15 mm 5 6 1 1 Not used 7 Not used Do not chan...

Page 1109: ...ion Comments 0 Reduction for Journal printing 0 Off 1 On 1 The Journal is reduced to 91 to ensure that there is enough space in the left margin for punch holes or staples 2 3 Not used Do not change the settings 4 List of destinations in the Communication Failure Report for broadcasting 0 All destinations 1 Only destinations where communication failure occurred 1 Only destinations where communicati...

Page 1110: ...witch determines which paper size is selected for printing A4 width fax data when the machine has both A4 and 8 5 x 11 size paper 2 Page separation 0 Enabled 1 Disabled 1 If all paper sizes in the machine require page separation to print a received fax message the machine does not print the message Substitute Reception is used After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette the machine automatic...

Page 1111: ... pages are printed without reduction Printer Switch 0F SP No 1 103 016 No Function Comments Smoothing feature Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Disabled 1 0 Enabled 0 1 1 1 Not used 0 0 0 1 Disable smoothing if the machine receives halftone images from other manufacturers fax machines frequently 2 Duplex printing 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 The machine always prints received fax messages in duplex p...

Page 1112: ...achine 4 5 1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES Communication Switch 00 SP No 1 104 001 No Function Comments Compression modes available in receive mode Bit 1 Bit 0 Modes 0 0 MH only 0 1 MH MR 1 0 MH MR MMR 0 1 1 1 MH MR MMR JBIG These bits determine the compression capabilities to be declared in phase B handshaking of the T 30 protocol Compression modes available in transmit mode Bit 3 Bit 2 Modes 0 0 MH onl...

Page 1113: ...blems occur using JBIG compression 6 JBIG compression method Transmission 0 Basic mode priority 1 Optional mode priority Change the setting when communication problems occur using JBIG compression 7 Closed network reception 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 1 Reception will not go ahead if the polling ID code of the remote terminal does not match the polling ID code of the local terminal This function is only ...

Page 1114: ...the received CSI do not match the last 8 digits of the dialed telephone number This does not work when manually dialed 1 0 The same as above except that only the last 4 digits are compared 1 1 The machine will disconnect the line without sending a fax message if the other end does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI 0 0 Nothing is checked transmission will always go ahead This function does not...

Page 1115: ...H 300 dpi 18 L 36 H 0 G3 Burst error threshold 0 Low 1 High 400 dpi 24 L 48 H 1 Acceptable total error line ratio 0 5 1 10 If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the acceptable ratio RTN will be sent to the other end 2 Treatment of pages received with errors during G3 reception 0 Deleted from memory without printing 1 Printed 0 Pages received with errors are not printed 3 Hang up decision when...

Page 1116: ... ECM is switched on Default setting 03 H Communication Switch 04 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 05 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 06 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 07 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 09 SP No 1 104 010 No Function Comment...

Page 1117: ...tion 0 Disabled 1 Enabled When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station this bit determines whether the machine prints the fax message coming in from the Requesting Terminal 5 7 Not used Do not change the settings Communication Switch 0C Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 0D SP No 1 104 014 No Function Comments 0 7 The available memory threshold below which ringing detecti...

Page 1118: ... 06 to FF Hex unit 2 s e g 06 H 12 s This value is the minimum time that the machine waits before it dials the next destination Communication Switch 0F Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 10 SP No 1 104 017 No Function Comments 0 7 Memory transmission Maximum number of dialing attempts to the same destination 01 FE Hex times Communication Switch 11 Not used do not change the s...

Page 1119: ...transmitted without conversion Note When storing the scanned data into SAF memory the fax unit always converts the data into mm format 1 The machine converts the scanned data or stored data in the SAF memory to the format which was specified in the set up protocol DIS NSF before transmission 1 5 Not used Do not change the factory settings Available unit of resolution in which fax messages are rece...

Page 1120: ...lling the first optional G3 unit 2 Not used 3 Select PSTN connection 0 Off 1 On This switch enables the G3 2 0 Off no connection 1 Recognizes and enables G3 2 This switch can be used only after G3 2 has been installed 4 7 Not used Do not change the settings Communication Switch 17 SP No 1 104 024 No Function Comments 0 SEP reception 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 Polling transmission to another maker s ma...

Page 1121: ...is no box with an F code that matches the received SUB code 0 Disconnect the line 1 Receive the message using normal reception mode Change this setting when the customer requires Communication Switch 18 SP No 1 104 025 No Function Comments 0 4 Not used Do not change the settings 5 IP Fax dial in routing selection 0 Off 1 On 1 Transfers received data to each IP Fax dial in number The IP Fax dial in...

Page 1122: ...o disable V 8 Example If 0 is the PSTN access code set bit 0 to 1 When the machine detects 0 as the first dialed number it automatically disables V 8 protocol Alternatively if 3 is the PSTN access code set bit 3 to 1 Communication Switch 1C SP No 1 104 029 No Function Comments 0 1 Extension access code 8 and 9 to turn V 8 protocol On Off 0 On 1 Off Refer to communication switch 1B Example If 8 is ...

Page 1123: ...Bit Switches 3 D418 110 SM Communication Switch 1E Not used do not change the settings Communication Switch 1F Not used do not change the settings ...

Page 1124: ...1 No Function Comments Monitor speaker during communication tx and rx Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Up to Phase B 1 0 All the time 1 1 Not used 0 1 0 0 The monitor speaker is disabled all through the communication 0 1 The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T 30 protocol 1 0 Used for testing The monitor speaker is on all through the communication Make sure that you reset these bits a...

Page 1125: ...ich cannot receive the extended DIS frames 5 Not used Do not change the setting 6 Forbid CED AMsam output 0 Off 1 On Forbid output Do not change this setting Default 0 Off unless communication problem is caused by a CED or ANSam transmission 7 Not used Do not change the setting G3 Switch 02 SP No 1 105 003 No Function Comments 0 G3 protocol mode used 0 Standard and non standard 1 Standard only Cha...

Page 1126: ...e Manual for details about Short Preamble G3 Switch 03 SP No 1 105 004 No Function Comments 0 DIS detection number Echo countermeasure 0 1 1 2 0 The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame twice 1 Before sending DCS the machine will wait for the second DIS which is caused by echo on the line 1 Not Used Do not change the settings 2 V 8 protocol 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 0 V 8 V 34 communi...

Page 1127: ...te used for the next page after receiving a negative code RTN or PIN 0 No change 1 Fallback 1 The machine s tx modem rate will fall back before sending the next page if a negative code is received This bit is ignored if ECM is being used 6 Not used Do not change the settings 7 Select detection of reverse polarity in ringing 0 Off 1 On This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on t...

Page 1128: ...rting modem rate for transmission Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to change this for specific receivers If a modem rate 14 4 kbps or slower is selected V 8 protocol should be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 kbps 0 0 0 1 2 4 0 0 1 0 4 8 0 0 1 1 7 2 0 1 0 0 9 6 0 1 0 1 12 0 0 1 1 0 14 4 0 1 1 1 16 8 1 0 0 0 19 2 1...

Page 1129: ...used Do not change the settings G3 Switch 06 SP No 1 105 007 No Function Comments Initial Rx modem rate kbps Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 kbps 0 0 0 1 2 4 0 0 1 0 4 8 0 0 1 1 7 2 0 1 0 0 9 6 0 1 0 1 12 0 0 1 1 0 14 4 0 1 1 1 16 8 1 0 0 0 19 2 0 3 1 0 0 1 21 6 These bits set the initial starting modem rate for reception Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems during reception If a modem rate 14...

Page 1130: ...ng of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem type for the machine in receive mode If V 34 is not selected V 8 protocol must be disabled manually Cross reference V 8 protocol on off G3 switch 03 bit 2 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Types 0 0 0 1 V 27ter 0 0 1 0 V 27ter V 29 0 0 1 1 V 27ter V 29 V 33 0 1 0 0 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V 33 0 1 0 1 V 27ter V 29 V 17 V33 V 34 4 ...

Page 1131: ... occurs Communication error Modem rate fallback occurs frequently This setting is not effective in V 34 communications PSTN cable equalizer rx mode Internal Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High 2 3 Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone exchange Also try using the cable equalizer if on...

Page 1132: ...lue that can be adjusted for the dial tone detection Select this if the dial tone cannot be detected when Normal parameter 0 is selected 7 Not used Do not change the settings G3 Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings G3 Switch 0A SP No 1 105 011 No Function Comments Maximum allowable carrier drop during image data reception Bit 1 Bit 0 Value ...

Page 1133: ... ECM frames from the other end Try using a longer setting if error code 0 21 is frequent 5 Not used Do not change the settings 6 Reconstruction time for the first line in receive mode 0 6 s 1 12 s When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer there may be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts set up data and sends CFR This is outside the T 30 recommendation But if ...

Page 1134: ... No Function Comments 0 Alarm when an error occurred in Phase C or later 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each error communication change this bit to 1 1 Alarm when the handset is off hook at the end of communication 0 Disabled 1 Enabled If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the handset is off hook at the end of fax communication change this bit to 1 2 3 Not us...

Page 1135: ...Japan Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual Refer to the System Parameter List printed by the machine 4 7 1 G3 2 AND G3 3 SWITCHES These switches require an optional G3 interface unit G3 2 and 3 switches are the same as for G3 1 switches 4 7 2 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES The G4 internal switches SW00 to 1F are displayed but do not change these settings 4 7 3 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHE...

Page 1136: ...111 001 No Function Comments 0 Not used Do not change this setting 1 IP Fax Transport 0 TCP 1 UDP Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP Fax 2 IP Fax single port selection 0 OFF 1 ON enable Selects single data port 3 IP Fax double ports single data port selection 0 OFF 1 ON enable Selects whether IP Fax uses a double port 4 IP Fax Gatekeeper 0 OFF 1 ON enable Enables disables the gatekeeper for IP Fax...

Page 1137: ...ne number in this machine If this confirmation fails the line is disconnected IP Fax Switch 01 SP No 1 111 002 No Function Comments IP Fax delay level setting Selects the acceptable delay level Level 0 is the highest quality Default is 0000 level 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 Level 0 0 0 0 1 Level 1 0 0 1 0 Level 2 0 3 0 0 1 1 Level 3 4 7 IP Fax preamble wait time setting Selects the preamble ...

Page 1138: ...or receiving IP Fax data This function is activated only when the sender has both TCP and UDP 3 CCM connection 0 No CCM connection 1 CCM connection When 1 is selected only the connection call message with H 323 or no tunneled H 245 is transmitted via CCM 4 Message reception selection from non registered SIP server 0 Answer 1 Not answer 0 This answers the INVITE message from the SIP server not regi...

Page 1139: ...een G3 standard and G3 non standard 2 AI modem rate function 0 OFF 1 ON enable Enables disables the AI modem rate 3 ECM frame size selection at transmitting 0 256byte 1 64byte Selects the ECM frame size for sending 4 DIS detection times for echo prevention 0 1 time 1 2 times Sets the number of times for DIS to detect echoes 5 CTC transmission selection 0 PPRx1 1 PPRx4 When 0 is selected the transm...

Page 1140: ...e TCF error threshold level 00 to 0f The default is 1111 0fH 4 7 Not used Do not change these settings IP Fax Switch 05 SP No 1 111 006 No Function Comments Modem bit rate setting for transmission kbps Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 kbps 0 0 0 1 2 4 0 0 1 1 4 8 0 0 1 1 7 2 0 1 0 0 9 6 0 1 0 1 12 0 0 1 1 0 14 4 0 1 1 1 16 8 1 0 0 0 19 2 1 0 0 1 21 6 0 3 1 0 1 0 24 0 Sets the modem bit rate for transmissio...

Page 1141: ...ype for transmission The default is 00 V29 6 7 Not used Do not change these settings IP Fax Switch 06 SP No 1 111 007 No Function Comments 0 3 Modem bit rate setting for reception Sets the modem bit rate for reception The default is 0110 14 4K bps Modem setting for reception Sets the modem type for reception The default is 0100 V27ter V29 V17 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Types 0 0 0 1 V 27ter 0 0 1 0 V...

Page 1142: ...Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1 timeout 2 Not used Do not change this setting 3 Hang up setting at DIS reception disabled 0 No hang up 1 Hang up after transmitting DCN Sets whether the machine disconnects after DIS reception 4 Number of times for training 0 1 time 1 2 times Selects the number of times training is done at the same bit rate 5 Space CSI transmission setting at no CSI registr...

Page 1143: ...0 1 3 5 s 1 0 4 s 2 3 1 1 5 s Adjust the T4 timer The default is 00 3 seconds T0 timer adjustment Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 75 s 0 1 120 s 1 0 180 s 4 5 1 1 240 s Adjusts the fail safe timer This timer sets the interval between setup data transmission and T 38 phase decision If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late adjust the longer interval timer The default is 00 75 secon...

Page 1144: ...n 0 Same setting as SIP server connection 1 Automatic setting 0 The I F setting for fax communication follows the setting for SIP server connection 1 The negotiation between the SIP server and the device decides whether IPv4 or IPv6 is used for the I F setting for fax communication 2 Record route setting 0 Disable 1 Enable 0 Disables the record route function of the SIP server 1 Enables the record...

Page 1145: ...dresses describe settings for the standard NCU Change the fourth digit from 5 to 6 e g 680500 to 680600 for the settings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from 5 to 7 e g 680700 for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit Address Function Unit Remarks Country Area code for NCU parameters Use the Hex value to program the country area code directly into this address or use ...

Page 1146: ...t detection is disabled Line current is not detected if 680501 contains FF 680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit high byte 680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit high byte 680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone det...

Page 1147: ...ack tone detected HIGH 20 ms 680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit high byte 680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit high byte 680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit low byte Hz BCD If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680517 PABX dial tone frequ...

Page 1148: ...ion time 20 ms If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680524 PABX detection time for silent period after ringback tone detected LOW 20 ms 680525 PABX detection time for silent period after ringback tone detected HIGH 20 ms If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680526 PABX busy tone frequency upper limit high byte 680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper limit lo...

Page 1149: ...f cycles required for detection a setting of 4 cycles means that ON OFF ON or OFF ON OFF must be detected twice Tolerance Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 75 0 1 50 1 0 25 1 1 12 5 680533 Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0 Bits 7 6 5 4 number of cycles required for cadence detection 680534 International dial tone frequency upper limit high byte 680535 International dial tone frequency upper limit low byte Hz BC...

Page 1150: ...auses for the pause time 68053D 68053E Belgium See Note 2 68053D International dial wait interval LOW 68053E International dial wait interval HIGH 20 ms 68053F Country dial tone upper frequency limit HIGH 680540 Country dial tone upper frequency limit LOW If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 680541 Country dial tone lower frequency limit HIGH 680542 Country dial tone lower fre...

Page 1151: ...12 parameter 11 68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3 SP2 103 013 parameter 12 68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3 SP2 103 014 parameter 13 68054D Time between final OHDI relay closure and DO relay opening or closing 1 ms See Notes 3 6 and 8 SP2 103 015 parameter 14 This parameter is only valid in Europe 68054E Minimum pause between dialed digits pulse dial mode See No...

Page 1152: ...uld not exceed the setting at 680552h above See Note 5 680554 PSTN DTMF tone attenuation level after dialling N x 0 5 3 5 dBm SP2 103 022 parameter 21 See Note 5 680555 ISDN DTMF tone attenuation level after dialling dBm x 0 5 See Note 5 680556 Not used Do not change the settings 680557 Time between 68054Dh NCU parameter 14 and 68054Eh NCU parameter 15 1 ms This parameter takes effect when the cou...

Page 1153: ...s address contains FF H the pause time stored in address 68054F is used Do not set a number more than 7 in the UK Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm 0 0 0 25 0 0 0 1 35 0 0 1 0 30 0 1 0 0 40 0 68055E Progress tone detection level and cadence detection enable flags Bits 2 0 See Note 2 68055F to 680564 Not used Do not change the settings 680565 Long distance call prefix HIGH BCD 680566 Long distance call prefix ...

Page 1154: ...ings until a call is detected 1 SP2 103 007 parameter 06 The setting must not be zero 680577 Minimum required length of the first ring 20 ms See Note 4 SP2 103 008 parameter 07 680578 Minimum required length of the second and subsequent rings 20 ms SP2 103 009 parameter 08 680579 Ringing signal detection reset time LOW SP2 103 010 parameter 09 68057A Ringing signal detection reset time HIGH 20 ms ...

Page 1155: ...nge the settings 6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit high byte 6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequency upper limit low byte BCD Hz If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled 6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit high byte 6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequency lower limit low byte BCD Hz If both addresses contain FF H tone detection is disabled...

Page 1156: ...500 ms 6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting 3000 ms 6805AD Number of CNG cycles required for detection The data is coded in the same way as address 680533 6805AE Not used Do not change the settings 6805AF Acceptable AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency upper limit high byte 6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone 800Hz detection frequency upper limit low byte Hz BCD If both addre...

Page 1157: ... Tx level from the modem dBm 6805B8 PABX 1100 Hz tone transmission level N 6805B7 0 5N 6805B8 dB 6805B9 PABX 2100 Hz tone transmission level N 6805B7 0 5N 6805B9 dB 6805BD Modem turn on level incoming signal detection level 37 0 5N dBm 6805BE to 6805C6 Not used Do not change the settings 6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 Not used Bit 4 V 34 protocol dump 0 Simple 1 Detailed default Bits 5 to 7 Not used 6805C8 to...

Page 1158: ...ings 1 Fixed for an externally connected line Do not change these settings Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 0 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 0 1 2 75 V 0 0 1 0 5 5 V 1 0 0 0 22 V 6805E3 1 1 1 1 41 25 V 0 RT 0 Low Bit 1 1 RT 1 High 0 RZ 0 High 6805E4 Bit 1 sets the level of the call signal Bit 3 sets the call signal impedance Bit 3 1 RZ 1 Composite 0 RT 0 Low Bit 0 1 RT 1 High 6805E5 Bit 0 sets the ring detection metho...

Page 1159: ...t 0 or bit 2 is set to 1 the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed 680508 if bit 0 1 or 680538 if bit 2 1 tolerance for on or off state duration and number of cycles required for detection coded as in address 680533 68050B if bit 0 1 or 68053B if bit 2 1 on time hex code unit 20 ms 68050C if bit 0 1 or 68053C if bit 2 1 off time hex code unit 20 ms 3 Pulse dial parameters addresses ...

Page 1160: ...opening France Between Ds closing and Di opening 68054D Europe Between Ds closing and Di closing France Between Ds opening and Di closing 7 Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz e g 800Hz tone for AI short protocol refer to the setting at 6805B5h Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h 8 68054A 68054D 68054E The actual inter digit pause pulse dial mo...

Page 1161: ...ect the address book that you want to program 4 For the fax parameter select Fax Dest for the E mail parameter select E mail then press Start Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green 5 The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed Press the bit number that you wish to change 6 To scroll through the parameter switches either 7 Do one of the following Select the next switch press N...

Page 1162: ...1 0 0 4 and so on until 0 1 1 1 1 15 0 to 4 If all five bits are at 1 the setting is Disabled If communication with a particular remote terminal often contains errors the signal level may be inappropriate Adjust the Tx level for communications with that terminal until the results are better If the setting is Disabled the NCU parameter 01 setting is used Do not use settings other than listed on the...

Page 1163: ...e left If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used Switch 02 No Function Comments Initial Tx modem rate kbps Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 0 1 2 4 0 0 1 0 4 8 0 0 1 1 7 2 0 1 0 0 9 6 0 1 0 1 12 0 0 to 3 0 1 1 0 14 4 If training with a particular remote terminal always takes too long the initial modem rate may be too high Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using these bit...

Page 1164: ...tings Not used 4 7 Not used Do not change the settings Switch 03 No Function Comments Inch mm conversion before tx Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Inch mm conversion available 0 1 Inch only 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled 0 1 The machine uses inch based resolutions for scanning If inch only is selected the printed copy may be slightly distorted at the other end if that machine uses mm based resolutions If the s...

Page 1165: ...nation always end at a lower modem rate 14 400 bps or lower disable V 8 protocol so as not to use V 34 protocol 0 V 34 communication will not be possible If the setting is Disabled the bit switch setting is used 5 Compression modes available in transmit mode 0 MH only 1 Disabled This bit determines the capabilities that are informed to the other terminal during transmission If the setting is Disab...

Page 1166: ...ge the settings Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings E mail Parameters The initial settings of the following e mail parameters are all 0 all parameters disabled Switch 00 No Function Comments 0 HM Compression mode for e mail attachments 0 Off 1 On Switches HM compression on and off for files attached to e mails for sending 1 HR Compression mode for e mail attachments 0 Off 1 On Switches H...

Page 1167: ...01 No Function Comments 0 Original width of e mail attachment A4 0 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as A4 1 Original width of e mail attachment B4 0 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as B4 2 Original width of e mail attachment A3 0 Off 1 On Sets the original width of the e mail attachment as A3 3 6 Not used Do not change these settings 7 Designates ...

Page 1168: ...tachment as 200 x 200 2 Line resolution of e mail attachment 200 x 400 0 Off 1 On Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 200 x 400 3 Not used Do not change these settings 4 Line resolution of e mail attachment 400 x 400 0 Off 1 On Sets the line resolution of the e mail attachment as 400 x 400 5 6 Not used Do not change these settings 7 Designates the bits to reference for original si...

Page 1169: ...settings Switch 04 Not used do not change the settings Switch 05 Not used do not change the settings Switch 06 Not used do not change the settings Switch 07 Not used do not change the settings Switch 08 Not used do not change the settings Switch 09 Not used do not change the settings ...

Page 1170: ...es 6800D0 H User parameter switch 00 SWUER_00 Not used 6800D1 H User parameter switch 01 SWUSR_01 Not used 6800D2 H User parameter switch 02 SWUSR_02 Bit 0 Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 1 Center mark printing on received copies this switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 2 Reception time printing this switch is not printe...

Page 1171: ... sender s name on reports 0 Off 1 On Bit 6 Not used Bit 7 Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0 Off 1 On 6800D5 H User parameter switch 05 SWUSR_05 Bit 0 Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition 0 Enabled 1 Disabled Bits 1 and 2 Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages Paper end toner end jam and during night mode Bit 2 Bit 1 Setting 0 0 The mach...

Page 1172: ...er parameter switch 09 SWUSR_09 Not used 6800DA H User parameter switch 10 SWUSR_0A Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 2 into 1 0 Off 1 On Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Page reduction 0 Off 1 On Bit 4 Not used Bit 5 Reception file printout 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 6 Use both e mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0 Off 1 On Bit 7 Not used 6800DB H User parameter switch 11 SWUSR_0B Bi...

Page 1173: ...t Bits 0 1 and 2 Cassette for fax printout Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 1 1st paper feed station 0 1 0 2nd paper feed station 0 1 1 3rd paper feed station 1 0 0 4th paper feed station 1 0 1 LCT Other settings Not used Bits 3 and 4 Not used Bit 5 Using the cassette specified by bits 0 1 and 2 above only 0 On 1 Off Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E0 H User parameter switch 16 SWUSR_10 This switch is not ...

Page 1174: ...cted for broadcasting 0 Not needed 1 Needed Bits 3 to 6 Not used Bit 7 Press Start key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone 0 Displays Cannot detect original size 1 Receives fax messages 6800E2 H User parameter switch 18 SWUSR_12 Bit 0 TTI date 0 Off 1 On Bit 1 TTI sender 0 Off 1 On Bit 2 TTI file number 0 Off 1 On Bit 3 TTI page number 0 Off 1 On Bit 4 to 7 No...

Page 1175: ... size paper for reports This switch is not printed on the user parameter list 0 Off 1 On Bits 6 and 7 Not used 6800E4 H User parameter switch 20 SWUSR_14 Bit 0 Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0 Off 1 On Bit 1 Not used Bits 2 to 5 Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax LAN fax driver Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting minutes 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 and so on unti...

Page 1176: ...nabled Bits 3 to 7 Not used 6800E7 H User parameter switch 23 SWUSR_17 Not used 6800E8 H User parameter switch 24 SWUSR_18 Bits 0 and 1 File retention time Cross reference System switch 02 bit 4 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 File retention impossible 0 1 24 hours 1 0 File retention impossible 1 1 72 hours Bits 2 to 7 Not used 6800E9 H User parameter switch 25 SWUSR_19 Bit 0 and 1 Not used Bit 2 Not used...

Page 1177: ...mber SP3 101 6801B0 to 6801B9 H Own fax PABX extension number 6801BA to 6801C3 H Own fax number PSTN 6801C4 to 6801D7 H Own fax number ISDN G4 Not used 6801D8 to 6801E3 H The first subscriber number ISDN G3 Not used 6801E4 to 6801EF H The second subscriber number ISDN G3 Not used 6801F0 to 6801FB H The first subscriber number ISDN G4 Not used 6801FC to 680207 H The second subscriber number ISDN G4...

Page 1178: ...ond 680387 H 00 Monday 01 Tuesday 02 Wednesday and so on until 06 Sunday 680394 H Optional equipment Read only Do not change the settings Bit 0 Page Memory 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bit 1 SAF Memory 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bits 2 to 7 Not used 680395 H Optional equipment Read only Do not change the settings Bits 0 to 3 Not used Bit 4 G3 2 0 Not installed 1 Installed Bit 5 G3 3 0 Not installe...

Page 1179: ...rver Main Max 128 characters ASCII 69EE84 H Redirect server Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 69EF04 H Registrar server Main Max 128 characters ASCII 69EF84 H Registrar server Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 69F004 H Gatekeeper server address Main Max 128 characters ASCII 69F084 H Gatekeeper server address Sub Max 128 characters ASCII 69F104 H Alias Number Max 128 characters ASCII 69F184 H SIP user name M...

Page 1180: ... 6BEC01 H Dial tone detection frequency Lower Limit Low Defaults NA 60 EU 90 ASIA 90 6BEC02 H Dial tone detection waiting time 20 ms Defaults NA 64 EU 64 ASIA 64 6BEC03 to 6BEC04 Dial tone detection monitoring time 20 ms Defaults Area 6BEC03 6BEC04 NA F4 01 EU F4 01 ASIA F4 01 6BEC05 H Dial tone detect judge time 20 ms Defaults NA 64 EU 1B ASIA 32 6BEC06 H Dial tone disconnect permission time 20 m...

Page 1181: ...contains the ROM and SRAM Also the FCU has an NCU circuit Fax Options Extra G3 Interface option This provides one more analog line interface This allows full dual access Two extra G3 interface options can be installed Memory Expansion This expands the SAF memory and the page memory used for image rotation without this expansion the page memory is not big enough for image rotation at 400 dpi so tra...

Page 1182: ...E3 Fax Application Control Engine CPU Data compression and reconstruction DCR DMA control Clock generation DRAM backup control Modem FAME V 34 V33 V17 V 29 V 27ter V 21 and V 8 DRAM The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows SAF memory 4MB Working memory 4MB Page memory 8MB The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery Memory Back up A rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory DRAM for 1 ho...

Page 1183: ...e MBU board ROM 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage 2MB 16bit x 1MB 1MB 16bit x 512K SRAM The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by a lithium battery Memory Back up A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items in the SRAM in case the base copier s main switch is turned off Switches Item Description SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on ...

Page 1184: ...on Control Processor Controls the SG3 board CPU RU30 DPRAM Dual Port RAM Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block DMA controller JBIG DSP V34 modem RL5T892 Includes the DTMF Receiver function DCR for MH MR MMR and JBIG compression and decompression FROM 1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage SDRAM 4Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer line buffer and workin...

Page 1185: ...ndependent dot erase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit s scanner bit switches not the copier s SP modes Then the FCU converts the data to mm format and compresses the data in MMR or raw format to store it in the SAF memory If image rotation will be done the image is rotated in page memory before compression At the time of transmission the FCU decompresses the stored da...

Page 1186: ...ts the data to the line JBIG Transmission Memory transmission If the receiver has JBIG compression the data goes from the DCR to the QM Coder Then the NCU transmits the data to the line When an optional G3 unit SG3 is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the line type JBIG compression is available but only for the PSTN 2 line Immediate transmission If the receiver has JBIG compression the data goes ...

Page 1187: ... the IPU If the optional G3 unit is installed the line that the message comes in on depends on the telephone number dialled by the other party the optional G3 unit has a different telephone number from the main fax board JBIG Reception When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN 1 the standard analog line the data is sent to the QM CODER for decompression Then the data is stored in the page me...

Page 1188: ...es at once Option Available Line Type Available protocol Combinations Standard only PSTN G3 Extra G3 Interface Unit single PSTN PSTN G3 G3 Extra G3 Interface Unit double PSTN PSTN PSTN G3 G3 G3 5 4 2 DOCUMENT SERVER The base copier s scanner scans the original at the selected resolution The IPU video processes the data and transfers it to the controller board Then the controller stores the data in...

Page 1189: ...ent is compressed with MMR and stored Up to 9 000 pages can be stored 1 file Up to 1 000 pages from the fax application Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted Scanned documents are given a name automatically such as FAX001 But it is possible to change the file name user name and password Up to 30 files can be selected at once The compression method of the fax application...

Page 1190: ...ss of the sender Reply To Destination requested for reply To Mail address of the destination Bcc Backup mail address Subject From CSI or RTI Fax Message No xxxx Content Type Multipart mixed Attached files image tiff Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 bit 8 bit Quoted Printable Message Body MIME converted TIFF F MIME standards specify how files are attached to e mail messages Direct SMTP Transmiss...

Page 1191: ...tion Secure Internet Transmission SMTP Authentication User Tools System Settings File Transfer SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP User Tools System Settings File Transfer POP Before SMTP Mail Reception Three Types This machine supports three types of e mail reception POP3 Post Office Protocol Ver 3 IMAP4 Internet Messaging Access Protocol SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol For details Core Techno...

Page 1192: ...r delivery then the machine responds with an error User Tools Facsimile Features E mail Settings SMTP RX File Delivery Settings 4 If the quick dial speed dial or group dial entry is incorrect the mail transmission is lost and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server and outputs an error report Auth E mail RX In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX the addresses of senders must be li...

Page 1193: ...Charset US ASCII ISO 8859 X Other types cannot be handled and some garbage may appear in the data Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 bit 8 bit Quoted Printable 2 MIME decoding errors 3 File format not recognized as TIFF F format 4 Resolution document size or compression type cannot be accepted Remaining SAF capacity error The machine calls the server but does not receive e mail if the remaining S...

Page 1194: ...hed files Content Transfer Encoding Base 64 7 Bit 8 bit Quoted Printable Mail body text part RELAY ID xxxx xxxx 4 digits for an ID code RELAY 01 X 01 Message body MIME converted TIFF F E Mail Options Sub TX Mode The following features are available as options for mail sending entering a subject designating the level of importance confirming reception of the mail Subject and Level of Importance You...

Page 1195: ...stered Confirmation of Reception From 4 None CSI RTI not registered Error Return Receipt processed error RTI or CSI of the station designated for delivery Mail delivery RTI or CSI of sender Mail sending from G3 memory Mail address of sender Memory sending Mail delivery memory transfer SMTP receiving and delivery From Mail address of sender SMTP receiving and delivery Off Ramp Gateway Fax Message N...

Page 1196: ... mail has been received correctly or not This confirmation is done in four steps 1 Send request for confirmation of mail reception To enable or disable this request known as MDN Sub TX Mode E mail Options 2 Mail reception receive confirmation request 3 Send confirmation of mail reception 4 Receive confirmation of mail reception The other party s machine will not respond to the request unless the t...

Page 1197: ...return receipt the information in the mail sender s journal about the receipt request is replaced i e the journal is annotated with OK in the Result column When the return receipt reports an error the journal is annotated with an E in the Result column The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separate communication Its arrival is only reported by the presence of OK or ...

Page 1198: ...Fax Communication Features SM 185 D418 Fax Option Type 9001 D418 Report Sample ...

Page 1199: ... Bit 0 Level 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 0 1 1 3 Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too many transmission errors are occurring on the network If TCP UDP is enabled on the network raise this setting on the T 30 machine Increasing the delay time allows the recovery of more lost packets If only UDP is enabled increase the number of redundant packets Level 1 2 3 Redundant packets...

Page 1200: ... 5 0 47 2 ins Width 105 297 mm 4 1 11 7 inch Double sided document Length 128 432 mm 5 0 17 inch Width 105 297 mm 4 1 11 7 inch Scanning Method Flat bed with CCD Resolution G3 8 x 3 85 lines mm Standard 8 x 7 7 lines mm Detail 8 x 15 4 line mm Fine Note1 16 x15 4 line mm Super Fine See Note 200 x 100 dpi Standard 200 x 200 dpi Detail 400 x 400 dpi Super Fine Note Optional Expansion Memory required...

Page 1201: ...33600 31200 28800 26400 24000 21600 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps Automatic fallback I O Rate With ECM 0 ms line Without ECM 2 5 5 10 20 or 40 ms line Memory Capacity ECM 128 KB SAF Standard 4 MB With optional Expansion Memory 28 MB 4 MB 24 MB Page Memory Standard 4 MB Print 2 MB Scanner 2 MB With optional Expansion Memory 12 MB 4 MB 8 MB Print 8 MB Scanner 4 MB ...

Page 1202: ...Document 6 Communication records for Journal stored in the memory 200 Specific Senders 30 The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory will change after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memory are installed Without the Expansion Memory With the Expansion Memory Memory Transmission files 400 400 Maximum number of pages for memory transmission 1000 10...

Page 1203: ...peed 10 Mbps Correspondent device E mail server Line conditions No terminal access Document Size Maximum message width is A4 LT Note To use B4 and A3 width IFAX SW00 Bit 1 B4 and or Bit 2 A3 must be set to 1 E mail File Format Single multi part MIME conversion Image TIFF F MH MR MMR Protocol Transmission SMTP TCP IP Reception POP3 SMTP IMAP4 TCP IP Data rate 100 Mbps 100base Tx 10 Mbps 10base T Au...

Page 1204: ...equired Original size Maximum A3 or 11 x 17 DLT Maximum scanning size Standard A3 297mm x 432mm Irregular 297mm x 1200mm Transmission protocol Recommended T 38 Annex protocol TCP UDP IP communication Compatible machines IP Fax compatible machines IP Fax transmission Specify IP address and send fax to an IP Fax compatible fax through a network Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to ...

Page 1205: ...5 Interface Board IF A 3 Interface Board IF3 D418 01 4 Included with fax option unit CCU I F Board 7 G3 Board D418 05 9 Included with optional G3 interface unit G3 Board D418 05 8 Included with optional G3 interface unit Expansion Memory B447 6 Common with R C4 4 5 Handset Type 1018 B433 USA only Common with R C4 4 5 ...

Page 1206: ...MULTI FOLDING UNIT FD5000 D454 REVISION HISTORY Page Date Added Updated New None ...

Page 1207: ......

Page 1208: ... 1 12 PULLING OUT THE FOLDING UNIT DRAWER 6 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS REAR SIDE 7 1 2 1 MAIN BOARD 7 1 2 2 HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTOR 7 1 2 3 TOP TRAY EXIT MOTOR 8 1 2 4 TOP TRAY TRANSPORT MOTOR 8 1 2 5 ENTRANCE JG JUNCTION GATE MOTOR 10 1 2 6 DYNAMIC ROLLER LIFT MOTOR 10 1 2 7 CREASE MOTOR 11 1 2 8 DYNAMIC ROLLER TRANSPORT MOTOR 12 1 2 9 REGISTRATION ROLLER RELEASE MOTOR 12 1 2 10 REGISTRATION RO...

Page 1209: ...LECTRICAL COMPONENTS 3RD STOPPER 32 1 5 1 3RD STOPPER UNIT 32 1 5 2 3RD STOPPER MOTOR 33 1 5 3 3RD STOPPER PAPER SENSOR 34 1 5 4 3RD STOPPER HP SENSOR 34 1 5 5 DIRECT SEND JG JUNCTION GATE HP SENSOR 35 1 5 6 REGISTRATION ROLLER HP SENSOR 35 1 5 7 FOLD PLATE HP SENSOR 36 1 5 8 ENTRANCE JG JUNCTION GATE HP SENSOR 37 1 5 9 TOP TRAY EXIT SENSOR 37 1 5 10 ENTRANCE SENSOR 38 1 5 11 TOP TRAY EXIT SENSOR ...

Page 1210: ... 63 1 8 1 FINE FOLD ADJUSTMENT 63 Before You Begin 63 FM1 Z Folding 63 FM2 Half Fold 65 FM3 Letter Fold out 68 FM4 Letter Fold in 70 FM5 Double Parallel Fold 72 FM6 Gate Fold 74 1 9 SKEW ADJUSTMENT 77 1 9 1 MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS BY SERVICE TECHNICIAN 77 Before You Begin 77 Front and Rear 77 Skew Correction Reference Diagrams and Table 79 General Procedure 81 Stopper Adjustment Procedures 83 2 DETAILS...

Page 1211: ... in 108 FM5 Double Parallel Fold 109 FM6 Gate Fold 109 Fold Adjustments with SP Codes 111 2 3 4 CREASE ROLLERS 113 2 4 TRAY FULL 114 2 5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 115 2 5 1 TRANSPORT SENSORS 115 2 5 2 OPERATION SENSORS 116 2 5 3 MOTORS SOLENOIDS 117 2 5 4 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTORS 118 2 5 5 FOLD MOTORS 119 2 5 6 MOTORS SOLENOIDS AROUND THE TOP TRAY 120 2 5 7 MOTORS SENSORS TOP 121 2 5 8 MOTORS SENSORS BO...

Page 1212: ... used in this manual Symbol What it means Core Tech Manual Screw Connector E ring C ring Harness clamp FFC Flexible Film Cable JG Junction Gate LE Leading Edge of paper LEF Long Edge Feed SEF Short Edge Feed TE Trailing Edge of paper S31E The Emitter sensor of a sensor pair S31R The Receptor sensor of a sensor pair ...

Page 1213: ... these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine General Safety Instructions For your safety please read this manual carefully before you use this product Keep this manual handy for future reference Safety Information Always obey the fol...

Page 1214: ...Installation Maintenance Power Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure After switching off the machine power is still supplied to the main machine and other devices To prevent electrical shock switch the machine off wait for a few seconds then unplug the machine from the power source Before you do any checks or adjustments after turning the machine off work carefull...

Page 1215: ...ge parts could damage the machine or cause injuries During Maintenance General Before you begin a maintenance procedure 1 Switch the machine off 2 Disconnect the power plug from the power source 3 Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes Avoid touching the components inside the machine that are labeled as hot surfaces Safety Devices Never remove any safety device unless it requires replac...

Page 1216: ... build up around machines that use ozone filters if they are not replaced at the prescribed time Excessive ozone could cause personnel working around the machine to feel unwell Power Plug and Power Cord Before servicing the machine especially when responding to a service call always make sure that the power plug has been inserted completely into the power source A partially inserted plug could lea...

Page 1217: ... about use of the machine Emphasize the following points Show operators how to remove jammed paper and troubleshoot other minor problems by following the procedures described in the operating instructions Point out the parts inside the machine that they should never touch or attempt to remove Confirm that operators know how to store and dispose of consumables Make sure that all operators have acce...

Page 1218: ...y 8 Gas generated by the molten glue can irritate the eyes throat and nose The machine should always be used in a well ventilated room 9 To avoid the dangers of fire and electrical shock make sure that the machine is never exposed to Excessive high temperatures and or humidity Dust Water Direct sunlight Open flame Corrosive gases Trademarks Microsoft Windows and MS DOS are registered trademarks of...

Page 1219: ......

Page 1220: ... and Inner Covers SM 1 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 EXTERIOR AND INNER COVERS 1 1 1 FRONT DOOR UPPER COVER 1 Open the front door A 2 Hinge cover A x 1 3 Cross piece A x 2 ...

Page 1221: ...ment D454 2 SM 4 Front door upper cover A x 2 1 1 2 TOP COVER 1 Open the front door 2 Hinge cover p 1 Front Door Upper Cover 3 Cross piece p 1 Front Door Upper Cover 4 Top cover A x 2 1 1 3 INNER UPPER COVER 1 Top cover p 2 ...

Page 1222: ...e the hooks C to remove the inner upper cover 1 1 4 FRONT DOOR 1 Top cover p 2 2 Inner upper cover p 2 3 Remove the screw A 4 Loosen three screws B 5 Lift up the hinge bracket C 6 Front door D 1 1 5 FOLDING UNIT COVER 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the knob A x 1 3 Remove four knobs B x 1 each 4 Folding unit cover C x 3 hook x 2 ...

Page 1223: ...lacement and Adjustment D454 4 SM 1 1 6 INNER LOWER COVER 1 Open the front cover 2 Inner lower cover A x 1 hook 1 1 7 REAR UPPER COVER 1 Rear upper cover A x 4 1 1 8 REAR LOWER COVER 1 Rear upper cover p 4 ...

Page 1224: ...D5000 D454 2 Rear lower cover A x 3 1 1 9 TOP REAR COVER 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Top rear cover A x 4 1 1 10 TOP TRAY 1 Top rear cover p 5 2 Inner upper cover p 2 3 Release the hook A and remove the top tray B x 1 1 1 11 TOP TRAY RIGHT COVER 1 Top tray p 5 ...

Page 1225: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 6 SM 2 Top tray right cover A x 1 1 1 12 PULLING OUT THE FOLDING UNIT DRAWER 1 Open the front door A 2 Pull out the folding unit drawer B ...

Page 1226: ...Folding Unit FD5000 D454 1 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS REAR SIDE 1 2 1 MAIN BOARD 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Main board A x all x 7 1 2 2 HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Top rear cover p 5 3 Horizontal transport motor bracket A x 1 x 2 ...

Page 1227: ... SM 4 Horizontal transport motor A x 2 1 2 3 TOP TRAY EXIT MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Top rear cover p 5 3 Top tray exit motor bracket A x 1 x 1 x 2 4 Top tray exit motor A x 2 1 2 4 TOP TRAY TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 ...

Page 1228: ... Components Rear Side SM 9 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 2 Top rear cover p 5 3 Main board bracket A x all x 5 ground cable x 1 4 Top tray transport motor bracket A x 1 x 2 5 Top tray transport motor A x 2 ...

Page 1229: ...5 ENTRANCE JG JUNCTION GATE MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Entrance JG motor A x 1 x 1 x 2 1 2 6 DYNAMIC ROLLER LIFT MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Top rear cover p 5 3 Main board bracket p 8 Top Tray Transport Motor 4 Rear upper stay A x 3 x 6 ...

Page 1230: ... Unit FD5000 D454 5 Dynamic roller lift motor bracket A x 1 x 2 6 Dynamic roller lift motor A x 2 1 2 7 CREASE MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Rear lower cover p 4 3 Top rear cover p 5 4 Main board bracket p 8 Top Tray Transport Motor 5 Crease motor A x 2 x 4 ...

Page 1231: ...SM 1 2 8 DYNAMIC ROLLER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Dynamic roller transport motor bracket A x 1 x 2 3 Dynamic roller transport motor x 2 1 2 9 REGISTRATION ROLLER RELEASE MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Rear lower cover p 4 ...

Page 1232: ...ide SM 13 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 3 Registration roller release motor bracket A x 1 x 2 4 Registration roller release motor A x 2 1 2 10 REGISTRATION ROLLER TRANSPORT MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Rear lower cover p 4 ...

Page 1233: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 14 SM 3 Registration roller transport motor bracket A x 1 x 2 4 Registration roller transport motor A x 2 ...

Page 1234: ...nit FD5000 D454 1 3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 1ST STOPPER 1 3 1 FOLD PLATE MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Rear lower cover p 4 3 Fold plate motor bracket A x 3 x 1 x 2 4 Fold plate motor A x 2 1 3 2 DIRECT SEND JG MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Rear lower cover p 4 ...

Page 1235: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 16 SM 3 Rear lower stay A x 5 x 2 4 Direct Send JG motor bracket A x 1 x 1 x 2 5 Direct Send JG motor A x 2 ...

Page 1236: ...17 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 1 3 3 1ST FOLD MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Rear lower cover p 4 3 1st fold motor A x 1 x 4 1 3 4 FM6 PAWL MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Rear lower cover p 4 3 FM6 pawl motor bracket A x 1 x 1 x 2 ...

Page 1237: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 18 SM 4 FM6 pawl motor A x 2 1 3 5 2ND FOLD MOTOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Rear lower cover p 4 3 2nd fold motor bracket A x 1 x 1 x 3 4 2nd fold motor A x 2 ...

Page 1238: ...Folding Unit FD5000 D454 1 3 6 JOGGER FENCE MOTOR 1 Pull out the folding unit drawer p 6 2 Jogger fence motor bracket A x 1 x 1 x 2 3 Jogger fence motor A x 2 1 3 7 1ST STOPPER UNIT 1 Folding unit cover p 3 2 Rear upper cover p 4 3 Rear lower cover p 4 ...

Page 1239: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 20 SM 4 Drawer stopper A x 1 5 Belt tension bracket A x 2 6 Release two clamps A 7 Disconnect two connectors B 8 Remove two screws A ...

Page 1240: ...B 11 Pull out the folding unit drawer p 6 12 Hold the 1st stopper unit A and then remove it x 2 The 1st stopper unit cannot hang the folding unit drawer without the two screws If you remove the 1st stopper unit without any support the 1st stopper unit can fall and be broken 1 3 8 POSITIONING ROLLER MOTOR 1 1st stopper unit p 19 ...

Page 1241: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 22 SM 2 Positioning roller motor bracket A x 1 x 1 x 2 3 Positioning roller motor A x 2 1 3 9 1ST STOPPER MOTOR 1 1st stopper unit p 19 ...

Page 1242: ...000 D454 2 1st stopper motor A x 1 x 1 x 2 1 3 10 JOGGER FENCE HP SENSOR 1 1st stopper unit p 19 2 Jogger fence motor bracket A x 2 3 Jogger fence timing belt bracket A x 2 4 Jogger fence HP sensor A hooks x 1 1 3 11 POSITIONING ROLLER HP SENSOR 1 1st stopper unit p 19 ...

Page 1243: ...cement and Adjustment D454 24 SM 2 Positioning Roller HP sensor A hooks x 1 1 3 12 1ST STOPPER PAPER SENSOR 1 1st stopper unit p 19 2 1st stopper paper sensor bracket A x 1 3 1st stopper paper sensor A hooks ...

Page 1244: ...ulti Folding Unit FD5000 D454 1 3 13 1ST STOPPER HP SENSOR 1 1st stopper unit p 19 2 1st stopper HP sensor bracket A x 1 3 1st stopper HP sensor A hooks 1 3 14 REGISTRATION SENSOR 1 Pull out the folding unit drawer Pull Out the Folding Unit Drawer ...

Page 1245: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 26 SM 2 Jam removal door A x 3 x 1 x 1 3 Registration sensor bracket A x 1 4 Registration sensor B hooks x 1 ...

Page 1246: ...AL COMPONENTS 2ND STOPPER 1 4 1 2ND STOPPER UNIT 1 1st stopper unit p 19 2 Jam removal door p 25 Registration Sensor 3 Remove two screws A at the rear side of the folding unit drawer 4 Remove the spring A for the solenoid spring B for the guide plate 5 Remove the arm C for the guide plate ...

Page 1247: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 28 SM 6 Release the clamp A and disconnect two connectors B 7 Pull out the folding unit drawer 8 Top stay A x 3 9 Move down the 2nd stopper unit A a little bit x 2 ...

Page 1248: ... D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 10 Open the jam removal door A and then remove the 2nd stopper unit B 1 4 2 2ND STOPPER MOTOR 1 2nd stopper unit p 27 2 2nd stopper motor A x 1 x 1 x 2 1 4 3 2ND STOPPER HP SENSOR 1 2nd stopper unit p 27 ...

Page 1249: ...lacement and Adjustment D454 30 SM 2 2nd stopper HP sensor bracket A x 1 3 2nd stopper HP sensor A hooks x 1 1 4 4 2ND STOPPER PAPER SENSOR 1 2nd stopper unit p 27 2 2nd stopper paper sensor bracket A x 1 ...

Page 1250: ...M 31 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 3 2nd stopper paper sensor A x 1 1 4 5 BYPASS EXIT PAPER SENSOR 1 Pull out the folding unit drawer 2 2nd stopper unit p 27 3 Bypass exit paper sensor bracket A x 1 4 Bypass exit paper sensor A x 1 ...

Page 1251: ...ECTRICAL COMPONENTS 3RD STOPPER 1 5 1 3RD STOPPER UNIT 1 Folding unit cover p 3 2 Rear upper cover p 4 3 Rear lower cover p 4 4 Drawer stopper A x 1 5 Release the clamp A 6 Disconnect two connectors B 7 2nd fold motor bracket p 18 2nd Fold Motor ...

Page 1252: ...the 3rd stopper unit A and then remove it x 2 The 3rd stopper unit cannot hang the folding unit drawer without the two screws If you remove the 1st stopper unit without any support the 3rd stopper unit can fall and be broken 1 5 2 3RD STOPPER MOTOR 1 3rd stopper unit p 32 2 3rd stopper motor A x 1 x 1 x 2 ...

Page 1253: ...1 5 3 3RD STOPPER PAPER SENSOR 1 Pull out the folding unit drawer 2 3rd stopper paper sensor bracket A x 1 3 3rd stopper paper sensor A x 1 1 5 4 3RD STOPPER HP SENSOR 1 Pull out the folding unit drawer 2 3rd stopper HP sensor bracket A x 1 ...

Page 1254: ...000 D454 3 3rd stopper HP sensor A x 1 1 5 5 DIRECT SEND JG JUNCTION GATE HP SENSOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Rear lower cover p 4 3 Direct Send JG HP sensor bracket A x 1 x 1 4 Direct Send JG HP sensor A hooks 1 5 6 REGISTRATION ROLLER HP SENSOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 ...

Page 1255: ... and Adjustment D454 36 SM 2 Rear lower cover p 4 3 Registration roller HP sensor bracket A x 1 x 1 4 Registration roller HP sensor A hooks 1 5 7 FOLD PLATE HP SENSOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Rear lower cover p 4 ...

Page 1256: ...Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 3 Fold plate HP sensor bracket A x 1 x 1 4 Fold plate HP sensor A hooks 1 5 8 ENTRANCE JG JUNCTION GATE HP SENSOR 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Entrance JG HP sensor A hooks x 1 1 5 9 TOP TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Top cover p 2 ...

Page 1257: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 38 SM 2 Top tray exit sensor bracket A x 1 3 Top tray exit sensor A x 1 1 5 10 ENTRANCE SENSOR 1 Entrance sensor bracket A x 1 ...

Page 1258: ...onents 3rd Stopper SM 39 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 2 Entrance sensor A hooks x 1 1 5 11 TOP TRAY EXIT SENSOR 1 Top tray right cover p 5 2 Top tray exit sensor bracket A x 1 3 Top tray exit sensor A hooks x 1 ...

Page 1259: ...cement and Adjustment D454 40 SM 1 6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS MAIN 1 1 6 1 TOP TRAY FULL SENSOR E 1 Top tray p 5 2 Paper exit cover A x 1 3 Top tray full sensor E bracket x 1 4 Top tray full sensor E A x 1 x 1 ...

Page 1260: ... 41 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 1 6 2 TOP TRAY FULL SENSOR R 1 Top tray p 5 2 Top tray full sensor R A x 1 x 1 1 6 3 VERTICAL PATH PAPER SENSOR 1 Top tray p 5 2 Remove the bracket x 5 3 Vertical path paper sensor A x 1 hooks ...

Page 1261: ... and Adjustment D454 42 SM 1 6 4 HORIZONTAL PATH PAPER SENSOR 1 Top tray p 5 2 Remove the bracket x 2 3 Horizontal path paper sensor A x 1 1 6 5 HORIZONTAL PATH EXIT SENSOR 1 Top tray p 5 2 Remove the bracket x 5 ...

Page 1262: ...rical Components Main 1 SM 43 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 3 Horizontal path exit sensor A x 1 1 6 6 DISCHARGE BRUSH 1 1 Top cover p 2 2 Discharge brush 1 A x 2 1 6 7 DISCHARGE BRUSH 2 1 Top tray p 5 ...

Page 1263: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 44 SM 2 Discharge brush 2 A x 1 1 6 8 DISCHARGE BRUSH 3 1 Discharge brush 3 A x 2 1 6 9 PSU 1 Left lower bracket x 6 ...

Page 1264: ...lectrical Components Main 1 SM 45 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 2 PSU A x 6 x 4 1 6 10 FIRST FOLD UNIT 1 1st stopper unit p 19 2 Jam removal door A x 1 x 3 x 1 3 Remove two guide plates A each x 2 ...

Page 1265: ... motor bracket A p 13 Registration Roller Transport Motor 5 Registration roller release motor bracket B p 12 Registration Roller Release Motor 6 Fold plate motor bracket C p 15 Fold Plate Motor 7 Timing belt of the 1st plate motor D 8 Remove three screws on the rear side ...

Page 1266: ...Electrical Components Main 1 SM 47 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 9 Disconnect four harnesses A on the rear side 10 Release two clamps A ...

Page 1267: ...11 Lower guide plate A keep the upper guide plate B up a little and remove the first fold unit x 3 snap fit C x 1 1 6 11 DYNAMIC ROLLER HP SENSOR 1 First fold unit p 45 2 Dynamic roller HP sensor bracket x 1 3 Dynamic roller HP sensor A x 1 ...

Page 1268: ... 7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS MAIN 2 1 7 1 BYPASS ENTRANCE PAPER SENSOR 1 Folding unit cover p 3 2 Rear upper cover p 4 3 Rear lower cover p 4 4 Disconnect the bypass entrance paper sensor harness A from the connector B x 2 5 Remove the clip A for the bypass entrance guide plate ...

Page 1269: ...nt and Adjustment D454 50 SM 6 Push the bypass entrance guide plate A to the rear then slide it to the left and remove it 7 Bypass entrance paper sensor bracket A x 1 8 Bypass entrance paper sensor A x 1 x 1 x 1 ...

Page 1270: ...ling the bypass entrance paper sensor Put the harness of the bypass entrance paper sensor through the hole A in the rear frame of the drawer 1 7 2 FIRST SECOND THIRD FOLD ROLLER 1 First fold unit p 45 2 Tension bracket A spring x 1 x 1 3 Rear bracket B x 3 4 Remove the gear A x 1 ...

Page 1271: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 52 SM 5 Guide plate A x 1 6 Remove the spring A at the front side 7 Remove six gears clip x 1 each 8 Remove the links A clip x 1 each ...

Page 1272: ...Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 9 Tension bracket A x 1 10 Remove the front bracket B x 2 11 Third fold roller with the guide plate A 12 Remove the guide plate B 13 Second fold roller C 14 Remove the gear A x 1 and then the first fold roller B ...

Page 1273: ...OLD ROLLER 1 Rear upper cover p 4 2 Rear lower cover p 4 3 Drawer stopper p 32 3rd Stopper Unit 4 Remove the links A on the front side clip x 2 each 5 Remove four gears B 6 Remove the links A pin x 1 each 7 Remove the gear B x 1 and the gear C timing belt x 1 ...

Page 1274: ...ng Unit FD5000 D454 8 Remove the spring A and the tension bracket B x 1 9 Left lower bracket x 6 10 Lift up the hook A to release the guide plate shaft B 11 Move the guide plate shaft B to the front side arrow direction and then remove the guide plate C ...

Page 1275: ...D454 56 SM 12 Remove the cam A on the front side 13 Fold roller fixing front plate B x 3 14 2nd fold motor A p 18 15 2nd fold pulley gear B x 1 and idle gear 16 Timing belt C 17 Spring D 18 FM6 pawl motor E p 17 19 Pulley gear F ...

Page 1276: ...et D and then remove the transmission pulley gear E pin x 1 24 Remove the entrance guide plate A at the 2nd fold unit x 4 25 Hold the fourth fold roller cam A at the rear of the drawer unit 26 Pull the fourth fold roller B to the front side 27 Keep the FM6 pawl C open and then remove the fourth fold roller Hold the holder A when pulling the fourth fold roller B in the direction ...

Page 1277: ...EASE ROLLERS Crease Rollers Idle Rollers 1 Folding Unit Cover p 3 2 Drawer stopper p 32 3rd Stopper Unit 3 Pull out the folding unit drawer fully p 6 4 Crease jam removal door A 5 Tension springs B front 4 rear 4 The lowest spring should be a black one when reinstalling the springs ...

Page 1278: ...wo types of tension brackets at the crease roller area The difference between these brackets is the number of screw holes A one hole B two holes Attach a bracket A with one hole to the crease roller frame with one hole Attach a bracket B with two holes to the crease roller frame with two holes 7 Magnet attachment bracket A x 1 ...

Page 1279: ...Crease Rollers Drive Rollers 1 Crease Rollers Idle Rollers described above 2 Rear upper cover p 4 3 Rear lower cover p 4 4 Main board bracket p 8 Top Tray Transport Motor 5 Rear upper stay p 10 Dynamic Roller Lift Motor 6 Drawer connector bracket A x 3 7 Crease motor p 11 ...

Page 1280: ...Electrical Components Main 2 SM 61 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 8 Crease path guide plate A x 5 9 Crease roller pulley gears A x 1 each 10 Crease roller fixing plate A x 2 ...

Page 1281: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 62 SM 11 Crease rollers drive rollers A ...

Page 1282: ... out Position 2 6754 FM4 1st 0506 Adjust Letter Fold in Position 1 6755 2nd 0507 Adjust Letter Fold in Position 2 6756 FM5 1st 0508 Adjust Double Parallel Fold Position 1 6757 2nd 0509 Adjust Double Parallel Fold Position 2 6758 FM6 1st 0510 Adjust Gate Fold Position 1 6759 2nd 0511 Adjust Gate Fold Position 2 6760 3rd 0512 Adjust Gate Fold Position 3 6761 1 These numbers are the same for Operator...

Page 1283: ... A4 SEF S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm DLT S 2 mm 2 to 20 mm LG S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm LT SEF S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm Other S 2 mm 2 to 17 mm Pitch Adj 1 mm Engine SP Adjustment The following fine adjustment of S and L can be done by the customer engineer in the SP mode L can be adjusted only for the paper sizes listed in the table below ...

Page 1284: ...m L 0 mm 4 mm LG S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm LT SEF S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm 12 x18 S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm 8 Kai S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm Other S 0 mm 4 mm L 0 mm 4 mm Pitch Adj 0 2 mm FM2 Half Fold User Tool Adjustment Operator Skilled Operator The following standard adjustment of S can be done by the operator or skilled operator in the User Tools mode Only S can be adjusted by the operator as shown i...

Page 1285: ...0 mm 10 mm A4 SEF S 0 mm 10 mm DLT S 0 mm 10 mm LG S 0 mm 10 mm LT SEF S 0 mm 10 mm Other S 0 mm 10 mm Pitch Adj 1 mm Notes No folding adjustment can be done for 13 x19 2 13 x19 12 6 x19 2 Engine SP Adjustment The following fine adjustment of S can be done by the customer engineer in the SP mode ...

Page 1286: ...m 4 mm 13 x19 S 0 mm 4 mm 12 6 x19 2 S 0 mm 4 mm 12 6 x18 5 S 0 mm 4 mm 13 x18 S 0 mm 4 mm SR A3 320x450 mm S 0 mm 4 mm SR A4 225x320 mm S 0 mm 4 mm 226x310 mm S 0 mm 4 mm 310x432 mm S 0 mm 4 mm A3 SEF S 0 mm 4 mm B4 SEF S 0 mm 4 mm A4 SEF S 0 mm 4 mm B5 SEF S 0 mm 4 mm DLT S 0 mm 4 mm LG S 0 mm 4 mm ...

Page 1287: ...ut User Tool Adjustment Operator Skilled Operator The following standard adjustment of S1 can be done by the operator or skilled operator in the User Tools mode Only S1 can be adjusted by the operator as shown in the table below Size Setting Default Range Setting Default Range A3 SEF S1 0 mm 10 mm B4 SEF S1 0 mm 10 mm A4 SEF S1 0 mm 10 mm DLT S1 0 mm 10 mm LG S1 0 mm 10 mm ...

Page 1288: ...e following fine adjustment of S2 and L can be done by the customer engineer in the SP mode Size Setting Default Range Setting Default Range A3 SEF L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm B4 SEF L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm A4 SEF L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm B5 SEF L 0 mm 3 mm S2 0 mm 3 mm DLT L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm LG L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm LT SEF L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm 12 x18 L 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm ...

Page 1289: ...tment Operator Skilled Operator The following standard adjustment of S1 can be done by the operator or skilled operator in the User Tools mode Only S1 can be adjusted by the operator as shown in the table below Size Setting Default Range Setting Default Range A3 SEF S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm B4 SEF S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm A4 SEF S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm DLT S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm LG S1 2 mm 2 to 7 mm LT SEF S1 2 mm 2 to 7 ...

Page 1290: ...f L1 and L2 can be done by the customer engineer in the SP mode Size Setting Default Range Setting Default Range A3 SEF L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm B4 SEF L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm A4 SEF L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm B5 SEF L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm DLT L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm LG L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm LT SEF L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm 12 x18 L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 mm 8 Kai L1 0 mm 4 mm S1 0 mm 4 m...

Page 1291: ... Fold User Tool Adjustment Operator Skilled Operator The following standard adjustment of S1 can be done by the operator or skilled operator in the User Tools mode Only S1 can be adjusted by the operator as shown in the table below Size Setting Default Range A3 SEF S1 0 mm 10 mm B4 SEF S1 0 mm 10 mm A4 SEF S1 0 mm 10 mm DLT S1 0 mm 10 mm LG S1 0 mm 10 mm ...

Page 1292: ... SP Adjustment The following fine adjustment of S1 and S2 can be done by the customer engineer in the SP mode Size Setting Default Range Setting Default Range A3 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm B4 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm A4 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm B5 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm DLT S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm LG S1 0 mm 4 mm S2 0 mm 4 mm ...

Page 1293: ...m S2 0 mm 4 mm Pitch Adj 0 2 mm FM6 Gate Fold User Tool Adjustment Operator Skilled Operator The following standard adjustment of S1 and S2 can be done by the operator or skilled operator in the User Tools mode Size Setting Default Range A3 SEF S1 S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm B4 SEF S1 S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm A4 SEF S1 S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm DLT S1 S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm LG S1 S2 2 mm 2 to 12 mm LT SEF S1 S2 2 mm 2 to 1...

Page 1294: ...ngine SP Adjustment The following fine adjustment of S1 S2 and S3 can be done by the customer engineer in the SP mode Size Setting Default Range A3 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm B4 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm A4 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm B5 SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm DLT S1 0 mm 4 mm LG S1 0 mm 4 mm LT SEF S1 0 mm 4 mm 8 Kai S1 0 mm 4 mm Other S1 0 mm 4 mm Pitch Adj 0 2 mm ...

Page 1295: ...m DLT S2 0 mm 4 mm LG S2 0 mm 4 mm LT SEF S2 0 mm 4 mm 8 Kai S2 0 mm 4 mm Other S1 0 mm 4 mm Pitch Adj 0 2 mm Size Setting Default Range A3 SEF S3 0 mm 4 mm B4 SEF S3 0 mm 4 mm A4 SEF S3 0 mm 4 mm B5 SEF S3 0 mm 4 mm DLT S3 0 mm 4 mm LG S3 0 mm 4 mm LT SEF S3 0 mm 4 mm 12 x18 S3 0 mm 4 mm 8 Kai S3 0 mm 4 mm Other S1 0 mm 4 mm Pitch Adj 0 2 mm ...

Page 1296: ...e stoppers inside the machine The positioning of the stoppers is critical because this determines the types of folding Front and Rear The terms Front and Rear are critical to understanding how paper is skewing during folding These terms are defined relative to the positioning of the paper in the paper path as it feeds and exits High means the distance from the nip of the fold roller to the stopper...

Page 1297: ...s are shown below Example 1 High Stopper Too Far From The Nip The black arrow shows the direction of paper feed from right to left When the skew sheet is opened the Front edge is longer than the Rear edge Example 2 FM2 Low Stopper to Close to the Nip ...

Page 1298: ...n the skew sheet is opened the Front edge is shorter than the Rear edge Skew Correction Reference Diagrams and Table Skew Correction Reference Diagrams Key Symbol Color What It Means Stopper 1 needs adjustment Stopper 2 needs adjustment Stopper 3 needs adjustment Blue line Peak fold points left Green line Valley fold points right ...

Page 1299: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 80 SM ...

Page 1300: ...bottom of the stack 2 If a fold is skewed spread the paper out in the direction of paper feed shown in the diagrams above 3 Carefully measure the distances between the folds between L1 L2 L3 4 Compare the Front and Rear measurements 5 Refer to the table below to determine where the paper is skewing and what type of adjustment is required Skew Correction Reference Table ...

Page 1301: ... Long Lower F Lower F Raise F F Short F Short F Short Raise F Raise F Lower F Table Key You must refer to the Skew Correction Reference Diagrams The following abbreviations are used in the table above Term What It Means F Long Front measurement of L1 L2 or L3 is longer than Rear F Short Front measurement of L1 L2 or L3 is shorter than Rear S1 S2 S3 Refers to Stopper 1 Stopper 2 Stopper In the diag...

Page 1302: ...Then compare the L3 measurements In this example imagine that L3 is longer at the front than at the rear Look at the table in the row for FM1 and the column for L3 F Long means Front measurement longer than Rear F Short means Rear measurement longer than Front L3 is longer at the front so we have an F Long situation again Then look at the next line below F Long It says Raise F on S3 This means you...

Page 1303: ...84 SM 3 The illustration above shows the location for each stopper adjustment Each stopper is equipped with two screws The black plastic screw is the Set screw and the metal silver screw is the Adjustment screw 4 Remove the Set screw ...

Page 1304: ... or Turn the Adjustment screw counter clockwise to raise the front of the fence 2nd Stopper Turn the Adjustment screw clockwise to raise the front end of the fence or Turn the Adjustment screw counter clockwise to lower the front of the fence 6 Fasten the Set screw in the hole of the diagonal cutout near the hole where you removed it The diagonal cut may be above or below the original hole dependi...

Page 1305: ...Replacement and Adjustment D454 86 SM stopper you are adjusting The photo above shows the Set screw for Stopper 2 7 Tighten the Set screw so the plate holds the adjustment ...

Page 1306: ...Overview SM 87 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 2 DETAILS 2 1 OVERVIEW 2 1 1 MOTORS ROLLERS The illustration above shows the roller groups and their related motors ...

Page 1307: ...Details D454 88 SM 2 1 2 JUNCTION GATES JUNCTION GATE SOLENOIDS The illustration above shows the paper path junction gates and the solenoids and motors that operate them ...

Page 1308: ...Overview SM 89 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 2 1 3 STOPPERS STOPPER MOTORS The illustration above shows the stoppers and the motors that operate them ...

Page 1309: ...th is adjusted to correct skew Leading edge of the sheet hits the registration roller and stops The upstream rollers continue to rotate 5 mm The leading edge of the paper buckles against the stationary registration roller to correct skew The registration roller starts rotating again after the paper has been straightened in the paper path ...

Page 1310: ...heets of paper can be pre stacked for folding The left illustration shows the parts that operate during pre stacking The paper enters the machine A The lower entrance junction gate B opens and guides the paper to the TE stop pawl C The paper pushes the TE stop pawl aside so it can pass ...

Page 1311: ...the paper passes the TE stop pawl B The TE stop pawl returns to its home position C after the trailing edge of the sheet passes After the trailing edge of the paper passes the dynamic roller the positioning roller D starts to rotate and feeds the paper as far as stopper 1 E ...

Page 1312: ...eaches stopper 1 B within the time prescribed for feeding for the size of the paper selected for the job The TE stop pawl C presses on the 1st sheet to prevent the leading edge of the 2nd sheet from hitting it The operation sequence for stacking the 2nd and 3rd sheets is the same as that of the 1st sheet ...

Page 1313: ...Details D454 94 SM The dynamic roller A raises after the leading edge of the 3rd and last sheet passes the TE stop pawl The position roller B rotates twice only after the last sheet has been pre stacked ...

Page 1314: ... After the last sheet has been pre stacked the TE stop pawl A lowers and the sheets are jogged vertically top to bottom Next with the TE stop pawl pressing down on the trailing edges of the stacked sheets the stack B is jogged horizontally front to back ...

Page 1315: ...Details D454 96 SM Finally after all three sheets have been pre stacked and jogged the fold blade A pushes the stacked sheets into the nip of the fold rollers B ...

Page 1316: ...Paper Path SM 97 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 2 2 3 JUNCTION GATES Entrance Junction Gates ...

Page 1317: ... fold unit to the next unit downstream When folding is selected the lower entrance junction gate raises and guides the paper to the fold units below Upper entrance junction gate remains at default position Lower junction gate rotates up and guides paper down When draft copies are sent to the top tray The upper entrance junction gate rotates down The lower junction gate remains at default position ...

Page 1318: ...nd junction gate at its home position The junction gate rotates to the right and paper is sent downstream without passing stopper 2 This is down for FM2 mode only when the paper is folded into equal halves The illustration above shows the actual location and appearance of the direct send junction gate ...

Page 1319: ...nd junction gate motor rotates the junction gate B to position C After the job is finished the motor rotates the junction gate back to its home position A For the other fold modes FM1 FM3 to FM6 the junction gate remains at its home position and does not touch the paper Bypass Junction Gate This is the bypass junction gate at its home position ...

Page 1320: ...es and allows paper to pass to folder unit 2 For fold modes other than FM1 FM6 the bypass junction gate remains at it default position Paper passes over the top of the bypass junction gate and into the bypass paper path Exit Reverse and Top Tray Junction Gates These three junction gates are shown above at their default positions ...

Page 1321: ... folded paper to the top tray Exit junction gate rotates left Reverse junction gate raises Top tray junction gate lowers This sequence guides the folded paper to the top tray Note Only Z folded paper is allowed to exit the multi folder and pass downstream to other peripheral units In this case the junction gates remain at their default positions The exit junction gate sensor 5 guides the paper tow...

Page 1322: ...ulge and flex toward the nip of the rotating fold rollers on the left When the paper reaches the rotating rollers it feeds into the nip The rollers catch the paper pull it into the nip and form the fold In this machine There are three fold stoppers placed at strategic positions in the fold path Not all the stoppers are used for folding Only the stoppers needed for the type of folding are used When...

Page 1323: ...OCATIONS The illustration above shows the stopper locations Note the locations of Stopper 1 Stopper 2 and Stopper 3 2 3 3 FOLDING METHODS There are six Folding Methods FM FM1 Z Folding FM2 Half Fold FM3 Letter Fold out FM4 Letter Fold in ...

Page 1324: ...aper feeds into the nip of fold rollers and The paper is stopped by Fold Stopper 2 The paper flexes toward the nip of fold rollers and which performs the first fold Next the paper is stopped by Fold Stopper 3 The paper flexes toward the nip of fold rollers and which performs the second fold and feeds the paper into the exit path Fold Stopper 1 is not used ...

Page 1325: ...he paper is stopped by Fold Stopper 1 The paper flexes toward the nip of fold rollers and which performs the first fold and feeds the folded edge of the paper into the nip of fold rollers and Fold rollers and feed the paper into the exit path Fold Stoppers 2 and 3 are not used ...

Page 1326: ...ge of the paper is stopped by Fold Stopper 1 The paper flexes toward the nip of fold rollers and which performs the first fold Fold Stopper 2 stops the paper and flexes it into the nip of fold rollers and Fold rollers and perform the second crease and feed the folded paper in exit path Fold Stoppers 3 is not used ...

Page 1327: ...erform the second crease and feed the folded paper in exit path Fold Stopper 3 is not used FM3 and FM4 follow the same sequence but the resultant fold is different In FM3 Fold Stopper 1 is positioned high so a short length of paper is allowed to feed before flexing toward the nip starts In FM4 Fold Stopper 1 is positioned low so a long length of paper is allowed to feed before flexing toward the h...

Page 1328: ...stops the paper and flexes it into the nip of fold rollers and Fold rollers and perform the second crease and feed the folded paper in exit path Fold Stopper 3 is not used FM3 FM4 and FM5 follow the same sequence but the resultant fold is different In FM5 Fold Stopper 1 is positioned so the paper will fold into halves when it enters the first nip This critical positioning of Fold Stopper 1 account...

Page 1329: ...the nip of fold rollers and Fold rollers and perform the second fold and feed the folded paper to Stopper 3 Fold Stopper 3 stops the paper and flexes it into the nip of fold roller and Fold roller and form the third crease and feed the folding paper into the exit path All three stoppers are used with this method A mechanism is provided to prevent the leading edge from catching and folding over on ...

Page 1330: ... the 3rd stopper for the last fold B The leading edge of the sheets s hit stopper 3 and the upstream rollers continue rotate equivalent to 18 mm of feed to flex paper toward the fold rollers C The edge of the FM6 pawl is raised to flatten the leading edge so it cannot bend back on itself as the paper enters the nip of the fold rollers D When the 3rd fold starts the FM6 pawl returns to its home pos...

Page 1331: ... 6752 FM3 LT Fold Out 1st 0504 6753 2nd 0505 6754 FM4 LT Fold In 1st 0506 6755 2nd 0507 6756 FM5 Double Parallel 1st 0508 6757 2nd 0509 6758 FM6 Gate Fold 1st 0510 6759 2nd 0511 6760 3rd 0512 6761 1 These numbers are the same for Operators Skilled Operators 2 The ranges for these SP codes are the same 4 to 4 0 0 2 mm ...

Page 1332: ...ur with coated paper and other types of media The adjustment is a manual adjustment done on springs Adjustment range R1 R2 R3 R4 Default Load 26 N 45 N Load Adjustment Possible Hook 4 mm Distance 4 5 N 9 5 N A projection fixed in slot and attached to a spring shortens the length to roller can be lowered There are four crease rollers Springs at the front and rear ends of each roller can be adjusted...

Page 1333: ...tor B As long as the signal remains unbroken the multi folder will continue to operate and feed folded paper to the top of the unit C When the top of the stack grows high enough to interrupt the signal between the tray full sensors D this will signal the machine to shut down the line temporarily After the operator removes the stack from the top tray folding and paper exit will resume ...

Page 1334: ...Electrical Components SM 115 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 2 5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 2 5 1 TRANSPORT SENSORS ...

Page 1335: ...Details D454 116 SM 2 5 2 OPERATION SENSORS ...

Page 1336: ...Electrical Components SM 117 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 2 5 3 MOTORS SOLENOIDS ...

Page 1337: ...tor 7 2nd Fold Motor 2 Top Tray Exit Motor 8 1st Fold Motor 3 Top Tray Transport Motor 9 Fold Plate Motor 4 Dynamic Roller Lift Motor 10 Registration Roller Release Motor 5 Crease Motor 11 Dynamic Roller Transport Motor 6 FM6 Pawl Motor 12 Registration Roller Transport Motor ...

Page 1338: ...mponents SM 119 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 2 5 5 FOLD MOTORS 1 Entrance JG Motor 2 Direct Send JG Motor 3 Positioning Roller Motor 4 Stopper 3 Motor 5 Stopper 1 Motor 6 Jogger Fence Motor 7 Stopper 2 Motor ...

Page 1339: ...120 SM 2 5 6 MOTORS SOLENOIDS AROUND THE TOP TRAY 1 Horizontal Transport Motor 2 Top Tray Exit Motor 3 Reverse JG Solenoid 4 Exit JG Solenoid 5 Top Tray Transport Motor 6 Entrance JG Solenoid 7 Top Tray JG Solenoid ...

Page 1340: ...al Components SM 121 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 2 5 7 MOTORS SENSORS TOP 1 Dynamic Roller Lift Motor 2 Dynamic Roller Transport Motor 3 Dynamic Roller HP Sensor 4 Fold Plate Motor 5 Registration Sensor ...

Page 1341: ...RS SENSORS BOTTOM 1 Registration Roller Release Motor 2 Jogger Fence HP Sensor 3 Fold Plate HP Sensor 4 FM6 Pawl HP Sensor 5 1st Fold Motor 6 Positioning Roller Motor 7 Direct Send JG HP Sensor 8 Registration Roller Transport Motor ...

Page 1342: ...4 2 5 9 SENSORS AROUND TOP TRAY 1 Top Tray Full Sensor R 2 Entrance JG HP Sensor 3 Top Tray Full Sensor E 4 Top Tray Exit Sensor 5 Top Tray Paper Path Sensor 6 Entrance Sensor 7 Horizontal Path Paper Sensor 8 Vertical Path Paper Sensor 9 Horizontal Path Exit Sensor ...

Page 1343: ...Sensor 2 Stopper 2 HP Sensor 9 Stopper 3 Paper Sensor 3 Jogger Fence Motor 10 Stopper 3 HP Sensor 4 Stopper 2 Paper Sensor 11 Stopper 3 Motor 5 Stopper 1 Paper Sensor 12 Positioning Roller Motor 6 Positioning Roller HP Sensor 13 Direct Send JG Motor 7 Stopper 1 Motor 14 LE Stop Pawl Solenoid ...

Page 1344: ...ical Components SM 125 D454 Multi Folding Unit FD5000 D454 1 Bypass Entrance Paper Sensor 2 Bypass Exit Paper Sensor 3 FM6 Pawl HP Sensor 4 2nd Fold Motor 5 FM6 Pawl Motor 6 Bypass JG Solenoid 7 Crease Motor ...

Page 1345: ...1 Main Board 2 Front Door Switch 3 PSU 4 PSU Fan 5 Breaker Switch 2 5 12 COMPONENT LIST Motors M Entrance JG Motor Operates the entrance junction that directs paper from the upstream device to the 1 horizontal paper path 2 paper fold path 3 top tray ...

Page 1346: ...ller M Jogger Fence Motor Moves the jogger fence according to the width of the paper to align its edges M Positioning Roller Motor Operates the positioning roller when the paper strikes stopper 1 when more that one sheet of paper is stacked for folding M Stopper 1 Motor Moves Stopper 1 to the correct position for folding according to the paper size M Fold Plate Motor Operates the fold plate for th...

Page 1347: ... according to the paper size M 2nd Fold Motor Drives 3rd fold roller Reverses when the paper does not pass through the 3rd fold unit M Crease Motor Drives the crease rollers Sensors S Top Tray Exit Sensor Checks for the presence of paper at power on Detects paper jams at the exit of the top tray Used to create timing for control of paper fed to the top tray S Entrance Sensor Checks for the presenc...

Page 1348: ...ing for paper exit to the downstream unit S Vertical Path Paper Sensor Checks for the presence of paper at power on S Positioning Roller HP Sensor Detects when the jog roller is in and out of its home position S Stopper 1 Paper Sensor Checks for the presence of paper at power on Also checks for jams during paper feed Detects the condition of the stacked sheets during multi sheet folding S Stopper ...

Page 1349: ...d junction gate is in and out of its home position S Stopper 2 Paper Sensor Checks for the presence of paper at power on Also checks for jams during paper feed Used to create operation timing of the LE pawl solenoid S Stopper 2 HP Sensor Detects when Stopper 2 is in and out of its home position S Bypass Exit Paper Sensor Checks for the presence of paper at power on S Bypass Entrance Paper Sensor C...

Page 1350: ...e that directs paper from the multi fold unit to the exit for the downstream unit or to the exit for the folded paper tray SOL Reverse JG Solenoid Operates the junction gate that opens the horizontal feed path to paper sent from the fold crease unit SOL LE Stop Pawl Solenoid Operates the pawl that prevents bending of the leading edge while the paper is being folded in the 2nd fold unit SOL Bypass ...

Page 1351: ...Details D454 132 SM Boards PCB Main Board Controls operation of the motors solenoids sensors and interface with the main machine ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for AFICIO MP 6001

Reviews:

Ricoh AFICIO MP 6001, Service Manual, Page: 730 / 1351

Search results

Summary of Contents for AFICIO MP 6001

Reviews: